Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy i: History, Mission & Goals

WNC Policy i
Procedure: History, Mission & Goals
Policy No.: Introduction: i

HISTORY

Western Nevada College (WNC) is a comprehensive community college, which serves more than 6,000 students each semester within an 18,000-square-mile service area. One of four community colleges authorized by the Nevada Legislature and governed by the Nevada System of Higher Education of Nevada Board of Regents, it is accredited by the Northwest Association of Schools and Colleges and Universities.

Western Nevada College opened its doors in leased facilities, serving Carson City, Reno, and most of western Nevada on September 19, 1971. In 1974, the Bristlecone Building opened on the Carson City Campus. In 1976, WNC split with the north campus in Reno. The Fallon Campus opened Sage Hall in 1981.

In 1987, the local builders and manufacturers donated time and materials to construct the machine tool technology building. The machine tool technology program was considered a state-of-the-art program.

The Pinion Hall classroom building opened on the Fallon Campus in 1988. The Aspen Building on the Carson City Campus opened in 1991 and brought the much needed science and art laboratories to campus and expanded the areas for counseling and admissions. The (Marvin) Sedway Cafe was also created.

In 1992, Stillwater Hall opened at the Fallon Campus and housed a new science and art labs, student services areas, and the first on-campus library and media services area. The Library and media services additions opened at the Carson City Campus followed by the Child Development Center in 1993.

In 1997 with Bently Hall opening on the Douglas Campus in Minden, Nevada, and the John Sheldon Trade and Industrial Complex opening on the Carson City Campus.

In 1999, the Donald W. Reynolds Center for Technology opened at the Carson City Campus. The WNC High Tech Center also opened at Carson High School and providing technology programs in a joint use college-high school facility.

The Jack C. Davis Observatory opened in 2003 and the Joe Dini, Jr. Library and Student Center opened at the Carson City Campus in 2004.

Rural instructional centers operate throughout the seven-county service area to meet the increasing demand for access to education in the rural communities of Dayton, Fernley, Hawthorne, Lake Tahoe, Lovelock, Smith Valley, and Yerington. Distance education offerings including Internet courses and interactive video reach students in even the remotest locations.

MISSION STATEMENT

Western Nevada College inspires success in our community through opportunities that cultivate creativity, intellectual growth and technological excellence, in an environment that nurtures individual potential and respects differences.

WNC STRATEGIC GOALS 2006-2012

  1. Improve student success in program completion and graduation rates.
  2. Ensure institutional excellence in teaching, programs and services.
  3. Embrace our college's many communities and respond to their diverse needs.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/i.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy ii: Policies and Procedures: Adding, Revising, or Deleting

WNC Policy ii
Procedure: Policies and Procedures: Adding, Revising, or Deleting
Policy No.: Introduction: ii
Department: President's Office
Contact: Assistant to the President

DEFINITIONS

Approval Authority: The College Council is the recommending authority for all additions, revisions, or deletions of policies/procedures, as authorized by the College President and subject to the Nevada System of Higher Education (NSHE) Board of Regents approval.

College Wide: includes information of interest to the entire College community. It is recommended that departmental procedures/policies be placed on departmental web pages.

Originating Division/Department: is the responsible division/department authorized to implement and/or modify the usage of the policy/procedures.

Contact: is the position responsible for maintaining, reviewing, revising, modifying, and answering any inquiries regarding the policy/procedure.

Policies: are broad guidelines that chart a course of action. They tell what is wanted and may include why and how much. A policy has the following characteristics:

  • States goals, purposes, and aspirations.
  • States how the Board of Regents and the College operate.
  • Assigns responsibility or authority to the President.
  • Establishes the position of the Board of Regents or the College on a topic of concern.
  • Only the Board of Regents and administration have the authority to set policy.
  • Answers the questions what and why, rather than how.

Policy Number: is the assigned administrative chapter and sequential number of the Policy/Procedure. The official policy number is assigned by the President's office.

Procedures: provide detailed directions developed by a responsible party/review authority to put policy into practice. They tell how, by whom, where, and when thing are done. A procedure has the following characteristics:

  • Sets forth mechanics for implementing policies
  • Lists specific do's and don'ts
  • Lists required step-by-step instructions
  • Answers the question how, rather than what and why

NSHE Code: The Code shall establish the primary organizational structure of the System and the basic personnel policies for its faculty. In institutional bylaws, procedures, and regulations the Code shall prevail.

The Nevada Revised Statutes: The Nevada Revised Statutes (NRS) are the actual Laws.

The Nevada Administrative Code: The Nevada Administrative Code (NAC) are Rules and Regulations.

ADDING A NEW POLICY/PROCEDURES (See Policy 1-1-1, Policy and Procedure Development at WNC)

  1. A new college wide policy or procedure must be submitted by the contact department.
  2. Ensure that all individuals who share responsibility for this policy or procedure have been consulted, including your supervisor.
  3. Your policy and procedure needs to include the following:
    1. Policy/Procedure name
    2. Policy/Procedure proposed number
    3. Originating Department
    4. Contact Position
    5. The text of the policy/procedure
    6. References contained within the policy/procedure, e.g., NSHE Board of Regents Code, Board of Regents' Meeting Minutes date, NAC/NRS, and other, etc.
    7. Copies of any referenced forms
  4. Format for the policy/procedure must be consistent with the general Policies and Procedures format.
  5. Submit electronically the proposed new policy/procedure, including any referenced forms, to the Assistant to the President.

REVISING AN EXISTING POLICY/PROCEDURE

  1. Revisions may be submitted only by the originating department.
  2. Ensure that all individuals who share responsibility for this policy/procedure have been consulted, including your supervisor.
  3. Ensure that your proposed changes are consistent with the format used in the Policies and Procedures Manual.
  4. Submit an electronic copy of the original policy/procedure, with your changes marked preferably in red to the Assistant to the President.

DELETING AN EXISTING POLICY/PROCEDURE

  1. Deletions must be submitted by the originating department.
  2. Ensure that all individuals who share responsibility for this procedure/policy have been consulted, including your supervisor.
  3. Identify the policy/procedure to be deleted, and submit a brief statement explaining why the deletion is requested, to the Assistant to the President.

Disclaimer:� This document of policies and procedures serves as an informational service only and should not be relied upon as an official record of action.� For official information, please refer to the NSHE Code, The Nevada Revised Statutes (NRS), and the Nevada Administrative Code (NAC).

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted July 2, 2008 Dates Revised September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/ii.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy iii: Principles of Community

WNC Policy iii
Procedure: Principles of Community
Policy No.: Introduction: iii
Department: President's Office
Contact: Assistant to the President

As members of the WNC community, we choose to be part of an academic community dedicated to those principles that foster personal and professional integrity, civility, and acceptance.

We strive toward lives of personal integrity and academic excellence--We will encourage in ourselves, and in one another, those responsible actions which lead to lives of productive work, personal enrichment, and useful citizenship in an increasingly interdependent world.

We commit to treat one another with civility--Recognizing that there will be differences of opinion, we will explore the differences in a courteous and forthright manner, always acknowledging individual rights to the freedom of expression and association.

We embrace diversity--We encourage those of all cultures, orientations, and backgrounds to understand and respect one another in a safe and supportive educational environment.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted January 25, 2005 Dates Revised October 17, 2008; September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/iii.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy iv: Definition of Terms and Organizational Structure

WNC Policy iv
Procedure: Definition of Terms and Organizational Structure
Policy No.: Introduction: iv
Department: Information & Marketing Services
Contact: Webmaster, Director
Policy:

The purpose of this policy is to define the terminology that is used to describe various aspects of Western Nevada College so that consistent terms are used across the campus by faculty, staff, and students and should reduce confusion in communication. This policy does not attempt to redefine any organizational structures, only to clarify the terminology used for what is already in existence at WNC. This is intentionally limited in scope to the academic areas of the campus, with the exception of section 1, which is included to differentiate between Administrative and Academic Divisions and Departments. All examples are accurate as of January 2007.

  • Section 1: Organizational Units - Administrative
    • A. (Administrative) Divisions: Administrative divisions are the broadest groupings of organization on the WNC campus. A vice president, who reports directly to the college president, is the head of each division. There are presently four Divisions: "Academic and Student Affairs," "Finance and Administration," "Human Resources and Legal Services" and "Institutional Advancement." Administrative divisions are usually referred to as "divisions."
      • 1. Under the Academic and Student Affairs administrative division, there are additional administrative divisions. They include (but are not limited to) "Student Services" and "Instruction." These are functionally similar to academic divisions in that there is a dean that reports to the Academic and Student Affairs division. Under the Instruction division are academic divisions (see below) instead of administrative departments.
    • B. (Administrative) Departments: Administrative Departments are non-academic organizational areas of the college. A director or coordinator heads each department who usually reports to an administrative division or another administrative department. Some departments may report directly to the president instead. Administrative departments are usually referred to as "departments."
  • Section 2: Organizational Units - Academic
    • A. (Academic) Division: A collection of departments that grant degrees in particular fields.i These are the broadest divisions of academic areas. An Academic Director, who reports to the dean of instruction under the division of Academic and Student Affairs, heads each academic division. There are presently five divisions: "Business & Technology," "Communications & Fine Arts," "Nursing & Allied Health," "Science, Mathematics & Engineering," "Social Science, Education, Humanities & Public Service." Academic divisions may be referred to as "division" when in context of academic areas.
    • B. (Academic) Discipline: Academic disciplines are distinct areas of study, branch of instruction, or academic field.ii At WNC, academic disciplines are individual areas of instruction and are directly supervised by the academic divisions (or department if there is a designated department head). There are currently more than 40 academic disciplines on campus, including history, philosophy, music, Italian, etc. Academic disciplines may have an appointed "lead faculty" that oversees the academic discipline. Academic disciplines may be referred to as "discipline." All academic disciplines have a three or four letter designation, such as ACC for accounting, or MUS for music.
  • Section 3: Programs, Specializations, and Degrees
    • A. Degrees: the award given to graduates based on educational level. The basic levels include associate degree, bachelor's degree, master's degree, and doctorate.iii This is the terminal result of a degree program.
      • 1. Programs: An academic title that signifies completion of a [program] of study.iv There are four degrees programs of study that WNC currently offers: Associate of Arts (AA), Associate of Science (AS), Associate of Applied Science (AAS), Associate of General Studies (AGS).
        • a. Emphasis: Emphasis refers to individual programs of study within a broader program, such as Associate of Arts, Computer Science Emphasis.
        • b. Specializations: Specializations are a specific area or branch of study within a student's [Emphasis]. For example: a student majoring in [Associate of Applied Science in Web Technology] may choose to pursue an emphasis (i.e. option or concentration) in [Web Administration].v Specializations are smaller divisions of emphasis.
        • c. Certificate Programs: An award made for satisfactory completion of a certain level of skill in an occupational curriculum.vi
    • B. Non-Degree Programs: Non-Degree programs are programs of study that do not end with the award of a degree
      • 1. Transfer Programs: Are programs of study similar to a degree program but do not carry a degree. Instead these programs are designed to facilitate transferring of credits to another institution degree program.
      • 2. Special Academic Programs: There are various Special Academic Programs. These have neither a degree nor certificate, but usually lead towards a certification or other industry accepted academic standing.
      • 3. Certification and Licensing Preparation: Are non-degree programs of study designed to help students take external certification or licensing exams. No degree, certificate or license is awarded
  • Section 4: Courses and Sections
    • A. Courses: A single instructional subject commonly described by title, number, and credits in the college catalog or bulletin.vii There may be multiple "sections" of a course in any one semester.
      • 1. Courses are referred to by their course number. As each course is under a specific academic discipline, the course number starts with the academic disciplines three or four letter designation, followed by a three or four digit to differentiate a specific course. For example, ACC 201 refers to "Financial Accounting," while BUS 101 refers to "Intro to Business."
    • B. Classes or Sections: Classes, or Sections, refer to the individual courses being taught and are listed in the schedule of classes.
      • 1. Classes are referred to by the course number followed by a one letter and two digit number. The first letter refers to the "location" of the class. For example, C01 would be the first section of a particular course on the Carson campus, D03 would be the third section of a particular course at the Douglas campus, and W02 would be the second section taught on the web.
      • 2. Classes are also assigned individual call numbers, which is a five-digit number that starts with the semester it is being offered. For example, a 32005 number would be a fall semester call number while 18635 would be a spring semester call number.

i NSHE Procedures and Guidelines Manual, Section 7, Chapter 6
ii NSHE Procedures and Guidelines Manual, Section 7, Chapter 6
iii NSHE Procedures and Guidelines Manual, Section 7, Chapter 6
iv Western Nevada College Catalog 2006-2007
v NSHE Procedures and Guidelines Manual, Section 7, Chapter 6
vi Western Nevada College Catalog 2006-2007
vii Northwest Association of Schools and Colleges, Accreditation Handbook

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted February 20, 2007 Dates Revised June 19, 2013; September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/iv.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy v: Non-Discrimination Statement

WNC Policy v
Procedure: Non-Discrimination Statement
Policy No.: Introduction: v

WNC is guided by the principle that there shall be no difference in the treatment of persons because of race, religion, color, age, sex, including a pregnancy-related condition, sexual-orientation, military status or military obligations, disability, including veterans with service-connected disabilities, or national origin, and that equal opportunity and access to facilities shall be available to all. Similarly, there shall be no difference in the treatment of persons who file charges of discrimination, participate in a discrimination proceeding, or otherwise oppose discrimination. It is our policy to comply fully with the non-discrimination provision of all state and federal regulations with regard to recruitment, admission, financial aid, activities, hiring, promotions, training, terminations, benefits and compensation.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised February 9, 2009
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/v.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy vi: Statement on Academic Freedom

WNC Policy vi
Procedure: Statement on Academic Freedom
Policy No.: Introduction: vi

The faculty of Western Nevada College is committed to the preservation of freedom of speech through the defense of academic freedom. To this end we:

i) hold that the oversight and approval of course content is principally the purview of the academic faculty and solely the purview of the institution;

ii) reaffirm the principles in Title 2, Chapter 2, Section 2.1 of the NSHE Code, which states in part:

Academic freedom is essential to these purposes and is applicable to both teaching and research. Freedom in teaching is fundamental for the protection of the rights of the teacher in teaching and of the student learning. Freedom in research is fundamental to the advancement of truth and knowledge. A member of the faculty has freedom and an obligation, in the classroom or in research, to discuss and pursue the faculty member’s subject with candor and integrity, even when the subject requires consideration of topics which may be politically, socially or scientifically controversial. (B/R 4/02)

iii) follow the AAUP Statement of Principles on Academic Freedom and Tenure:

1. Teachers are entitled to full freedom in research and in the publication of the results, subject to the adequate performance of their other academic duties; but research for pecuniary return should be based upon an understanding with the authorities of the institution.

2. Teachers are entitled to freedom in the classroom in discussing their subject, but they should be careful not to introduce into their teaching controversial matter which has no relation to their subject. Limitations of academic freedom because of religious or other aims of the institution should be clearly stated in writing at the time of the appointment.

3. College and university teachers are citizens, members of a learned profession, and officers of an educational institution. When they speak or write as citizens, they should be free from institutional censorship or discipline, but their special position in the community imposes special obligations. As scholars and educational officers, they should remember that the public may judge their profession and their institution by their utterances. Hence they should at all times be accurate, should exercise appropriate restraint, should show respect for the opinions of others, and should make every effort to indicate that they are not speaking for the institution.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted February 17, 2012 Dates Revised
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/vi.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 1-1-1: Policy and Procedure Development at WNC

WNC Policy 1-1-1
Procedure: Policy and Procedure Development at WNC
Policy No.: 1-1-1
Department: President's Office
Contact: President's Office
Policy:

WNC shall operate under policies and procedures recommended by the College Council and approved by the College president. These policies and procedures shall conform to NSHE Code, Nevada Revised Statutes, and other regulatory directives.

  • Section 1: Composition of College Council
    • A. College Council members shall be:
      • 1. College President
      • 2. Vice President Academic and Student Affairs
      • 3. Vice President Finance and Administrative Services
      • 4. Vice President of Administrative Services and General Counsel
      • 5. Academic Faculty Senate Chairperson
      • 6. Administrative Faculty Senate Chairperson
      • 7. Classified Council Chairperson
      • 8. Associated Students of Western Nevada President or representative
      • 9. Academic Director
      • 10. SPFIE Representative
  • Section 2: Development of College Policies and Procedures
    • A. Proposal for new or modified policies or procedures shall be submitted to the College Council through Faculty Senate, Administrative Faculty Senate, Classified Council, Associated Students of Western Nevada or appropriate college committees. Proposed changes will be distributed, in writing by the originator of the policy change, to the college community within 7 calendar days of the College Council meeting wherein it was presented as an e-mail attachment.
    • B. All proposed policies and procedures, new and modified must be reviewed by those bodies represented on College Council and action must be taken within 60 calendar days.
  • Section 3: Approval of Policies and Procedures
    • A. New and modified policies and procedures shall be recommended by a majority vote of the College Council and approved by the College President.
  • Section 4: Distribution of College Policies and Procedures
    • A. Approved policies and procedures shall be available in the College's libraries.
    • B. Approved policies and procedures shall be available on the College's web site.
    • C. Approved policies and procedures shall be distributed by the President's Office via e-mail attachment to the college community within 7 calendar days of approval by the College Council.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted October 9, 2001 Dates Revised May 14, 2013; September 2, 2008; November 21, 2006; January 25, 2005; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

WNC Bylaws

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/1-1-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 1-1-2: College Committee Nominations/Appointments

WNC Policy 1-1-2
Procedure: College Committee Nominations/Appointments
Policy No.: 1-1-2
Department: President's Office
Contact: President's Office
Policy:

The President will inform the Senate and Council Chairs, (hereafter referred to as "the chairs") as to the college committees and requisite number of positions to be filled for the academic year.

  • Section 1: Procedure
    • A. The chairs will solicit volunteers and discuss the composition of the committees with the President. The chairs will each nominate and submit, to the President, a ratified pool of names for each college committee.
    • B. The chairs will meet individually with the President to discuss the committee nominations before appointments are made.
    • C. The President will inform the college of the appointments to the college committees.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted December 17, 2002 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

WNC Bylaws

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/1-1-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 1-1-3: Delegation of Signature Authority

WNC Policy 1-1-3
Procedure: Delegation of Signature Authority
Policy No.: 1-1-3
Department: President's Office
Contact: President
Policy:

Guidelines governing the authorization for delegation of signature authority

  • Section 1: Delegation of Signature Authority
    • A. The President, a vice president, or a dean may delegate signature authority for the
      duration of an absence to a vice president or a dean.
    • B. Signature authority will not be delegated below the level of dean, and in the case of
      administrative or academic supervisory personnel, delegation can only be up to the
      dean or vice president level.
    • C. The delegation of signature authority must be set forth in an email distributed to the
      relevant direct reports and the President’s staff to create a record of the delegation
      and to provide notice to those employees affected by the delegation.
    • D. The recipient of delegated authority cannot re-delegate that authority to another
      individual.
  • Section 2: Delegation of Signature Authority for Employment Related Documents
    • A. Each vice president is considered the appointing authority in his or her respective area. As the appointing authority, each vice president is responsible for signing employment related documents in his or her respective area.
  • Section 3: Delegation of Signature Authority for Approving or Denying Annual or Sick Leave
    • A. Each director or equivalent department head is delegated signature authority for approving or denying requests for annual or sick leave in his or her respective area.
    • B. Each dean is delegated signature authority for approving or denying requests for annual or sick leave of directors in his or her respective area. In the absence of a dean, the vice presidents are responsible for approving or denying requests for annual or sick leave of directors in their respective areas.
    • C. Requests for leave pursuant to the Family Medical Leave Act or catastrophic leave must also be approved by Human Resources.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted October 12, 2012 Dates Revised January 14, 2014
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/1-1-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 1-2-1: Nevada Ethics in Government Law

WNC Policy 1-2-1
Procedure: Nevada Ethics in Government Law
Policy No.: 1-2-1
Department: President's Office
Contact: President's Office
Policy:

WNC employees will abide by the Nevada Ethics in Government Law, Code of Ethical Standards.

  • Section 1: Statement
    • A. ...Amendments to the Nevada Ethics in Government Law took effect October 1, 1991. Three prohibitions in the Code of Ethical Standards (NRS 281A) which have a potential impact on employees of the NSHE are:
      • 1. A public officer or employee shall not accept any salary, retainer, augmentation, expense allowance or other compensation from any private source for the performance of his duties as a public officer or employee.
      • 2. A public officer or employee, other than a member of the legislature, shall not use governmental time, property, equipment or other facilities to benefit his personal or financial interest.
      • 3. A public officer or employee shall not seek other employment or contracts through the use of his official position.
    • B. The term "compensation," as used in paragraph 1 quoted above, is defined by the statute as "any money, thing of value or economic benefit conferred on or received by any person in return for services rendered, personally or by another."
    • C. Willful violations of the law are punishable by civil fines or up to $5,000 and/or repayment of any compensation or benefit received in violation of the law.
    • D. In addition, the law provides: "A Public officer or public employee shall not accept or receive an honorarium."
    • E. An "honorarium" is defined in the law as "the payment of money or anything of value for an appearance or speech by the public officer or public employee in his capacity as a public officer or public employee..." The term does not include travel or per diem expenses, nor is the receipt of an honorarium prohibited if it is paid to a charitable organization on behalf of the public officer or employee.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted October 2, 1991 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
NRS Code NRS 281.481
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/1-2-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 1-2-2: Availability of Public Records

WNC Policy 1-2-2
Procedure: Availability of Public Records
Policy No.: 1-2-2
Department: President's Office
Contact: President's Office
Policy:

In compliance with NRS 239.010, the college makes available public records to any member of the public or employee who makes a request for such.

  • Section 1: Costs
    • A. Copies of such public documents will be made available at the cost of $.10 per page.
    • B. In the event that copying such documents requires an extraordinary use of personnel or college resources, the college has the right also to bill for staff time or other actual expenses.
    • C. If a copying request requires less than a half hour of staff time, the requestor will only be charged for the copies.
    • D. If the copying takes one half hour or more, the requestor shall be charged in half hour increments for the employee's time at the actual hourly rate of the employee who does the copying.
      • 1. For example, if the employee earns $52,000 per year, the college will charge the requestor a minimum of $12.50 for the first half hour, plus an additional $12.50 for every additional half hour of copying, in addition to $.10 per page.
    • E. If charges for extraordinary use of staff time or college resources are anticipated, the requestor shall be notified of the estimated charges before the requested information is copied.
    • F. Public requests and employee requests, not directly related to their job performance, must be made through the President's Office.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted August 25, 2003 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004; September 10, 2003
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
NRS Code NRS 239.010
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/1-2-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 1-2-3: Political Activities Guidelines

WNC Policy 1-2-3
Procedure: Political Activities Guidelines
Policy No.: 1-2-3
Department: President's Office
Contact: President's Office
Policy:

A policy of nonpartisanship should govern Western Nevada College at all times in its relationships with elected officials or persons campaigning for public office.

  • Section 1: Guidelines
    • A. The following guidelines should be followed:
      • 1. The campus mail should not be used to distribute political materials of any form. This applies to both members and non-members of the college community.
      • 2. Campaign signs and handbills for public officials should not be posted on college grounds or on campus buildings.
      • 3. The college will not sponsor or support political candidates.
      • 4. Elected officials or persons campaigning for public office will not be introduced at college functions.
    • B. Questions and information regarding political activity on campus will be handled by the Vice President of Administrative and Legal Services/General Counsel.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted April 1, 1994 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/1-2-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 1-2-4: Political Activity for Public Employees

WNC Policy 1-2-4
Procedure: Political Activity for Public Employees
Policy No.: 1-2-4
Department: President's Office
Contact: President's Office
Policy:

Employees shall have the right to vote as they choose and to express their political opinions on all subjects without recourse unless otherwise specified.

  • Section 1: Guidelines
    • A. Employees shall have the right to vote as they choose and to express their political opinions on all subjects without recourse, except that no employee shall:
      • 1. Directly or indirectly solicit or receive, or be in any manner concerned in soliciting or receiving any assessment subscription, monetary or non-monetary contribution for a political purpose from anyone who is in the same department and who is a subordinate of the solicitor.
      • 2. Engage in political activity during the hours of his state employment for the purpose of improving the chances of a political party or individual seeking office; and at any time engage in political activity for the purpose of securing preference for promotion, transfer, or salary advancement.
      • 3. While off duty, engage in political activity to an extent that it impairs his attendance or efficiency as an employee.
      • 4. As an employee in an agency administering federally aided programs, engage in political activities at any time which are forbidden by federal law.
    • B. This standard is to be applied to all college employees.
    • C. College facilities, materials, or personnel duty time are not to be used for the promotion of any political candidate.
    • D. This policy in no way precludes any employee from participating in political activities as a private citizen.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted April 30, 1984 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NAC Code NAC 284.770

Memo from Dr. Calabro to Faculty and Staff referring to the State Rules for Personnel Administration - (Rule XI - Section C - Political Activity)

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/1-2-4.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 1-2-5: Distinguished Visitors

WNC Policy 1-2-5
Procedure: Distinguished Visitors
Policy No.: 1-2-5
Department: President's Office
Contact: President's Office
Policy:

It is the general policy of Western Nevada College to inform the president or his/her office when elected officials or other distinguished guests are on campus so that appropriate courtesies can be extended.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted September 1, 1992 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/1-2-5.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 1-2-6: Non-Campus Group Solicitation

WNC Policy 1-2-6
Procedure: Non-Campus Group Solicitation
Policy No.: 1-2-6

This policy is has been rescinded and is no longer active.

If you wish to view an archive of this policy, please visit the WNC library.

Note: This policy was removed 2/3/2009 by College Council. The content of this policy is now incorporated into policy 6-1-1.

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 1-3-1: Inclement Weather

WNC Policy 1-3-1
Procedure: Inclement Weather
Policy No.: 1-3-1
Department: President's Office
Contact: President's Office
Policy:

In case of inclement weather, every effort will be made to notify students and employees of the closure of a campus or instructional center in a timely manner.

  • Section 1: Campus/Instructional Center Decision
    • A. The decision to close a campus or instructional center or cancel classes, shall be made independent of other campuses and instructional centers operated by WNC.
    • B. The administrator in charge shall make the decision based on the best information available at the time.
  • Section 2: Decision Made During Hours of Operation
    • A. If the decision is made to cancel classes and/or close the campus/instructional center during normal operating hours (8 am to 10 pm, Monday through Friday) the following shall apply:
      • 1. The administrator in charge shall determine the hour of cancellation or closure and make the announcement via e-mail to all faculty and staff.
      • 2. The administrator in charge shall make arrangements to inform radio and television stations of the cancellation or closure.
      • 3. The administrator in charge will make arrangements for the receptionist to properly inform those who call and to update voice mail, if available, to inform those who call the status of the cancellation or closure.
  • Section 3: Decision Made During Non-Operating Hours
    • A. If the decision is made to cancel classes and/or close the campus/instructional center during non-operating hours (10:01 pm to 7:59 am, Monday through Friday and all day Saturday and Sunday) the following shall apply:
      • 1. The administrator in charge shall make arrangements to inform radio and television stations of the cancellation or closure.
      • 2. The administrator in charge shall contact key administrative staff to solicit assistance in informing as many campus employees as possible about the cancellation or closure.
      • 3. The administrator in charge shall make arrangements to update voice mail, if available, to inform those who call the status of the cancellation or closure.
  • Section 4: Campus Open/Classes Not Canceled During Inclement Weather
    • A. Because of the localization of inclement weather in western Nevada, bad weather that affects one area may not affect other areas.
    • B. In cases where a campus remains open or classes are not canceled, every effort will be made to keep students informed about individual classes that are canceled due to instructors' unavailability.
  • Section 5: Instructional Centers
    • A. When an instructional center is located in a non-college building, closure of the building will dictate cancellation of college classes.
  • Section 6: Allied Health
    • A. The Director of Allied Health is responsible for the cancellation of clinical laboratories in the event of inclement weather.
  • Section 7: Child Development Center
    • A. Whenever, due to weather, utility or other natural disaster, it is deemed necessary to close the Carson City Campus, the Child Development Center Director or designee shall be notified, so that the Center's procedure for notifying parents to pick up their children can be implemented.
    • B. The President/Vice President of Finance and Administrative Services is to be notified by the Child Development Center Director or designee.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted July 8, 2008 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/1-3-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 1-4-1: Charter School Statement

WNC Policy 1-4-1
Procedure: Charter School Statement
Policy No.: 1-4-1
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Vice President's Office
Policy:

Western Nevada College is dedicated to post-secondary educational access for all Nevadans and welcomes all students who meet our admissions requirements.

  • Section 1: Statement
    • A. WNC welcomes people of all ages and a broad range of abilities. We also work with businesses, agencies, and school districts to provide instruction at off site locations, via contract courses and custom-tailored educational experiences. Many high school students take advantage of this access, and we often have students enrolled in college classes during their high school years. In this manner, we welcome cooperation with public, private, and charter schools.
    • B. Our college strategic plan calls for heavy enrollment growth in both daytime and evening classes in the future. All of our current activities are focused on supporting this plan and maximizing the use of our current facilities for the support of post-secondary educational opportunities for Nevadans. During this transitional period, we do not expect to undertake any major new classroom or laboratory construction at any of our sites. Therefore, we are not able to offer use of our facilities for educational activities which are not post-secondary in nature.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted October 29, 2002 Dates Revised September 2, 2008
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
NRS Code NRS 386.503
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/1-4-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 1-5-1: Consensual Relationships

WNC Policy 1-5-1
Procedure: Consensual Relationships
Policy No.: 1-5-1
Department: President's Office
Contact: President's Office
Policy:

It shall be the policy of WNC to prohibit romantic or sexual relationships between members of the college community only when one of the individuals involved has direct professional power or direct authority over the other.

  • Section 1: Background Information
    • A. When employees of the college have romantic relationships with subordinates they supervise or when academic faculty have romantic relationships with students enrolled in their classes, the college and the person in the position of superior power are vulnerable to charges of harassment from the person in the position of lesser power or from third parties.
      • 1. Faculty, staff, and administrators, particularly in relationships with students and persons under their supervision, need to be aware of potential conflicts of interest and the possible compromise of their evaluative capacity.
      • 2. Faculty, staff, and administrators need to be aware that a sexual relationship may
        give rise to a perception on the part of others that the evaluative capacity of the faculty
        member or the supervisor has been compromised.
      • 3. The power differential inherent in faculty-student and supervisor-supervisee relationships may compromise the student's or the supervisee's ability to make decisions and thus may call into question the bona fide consensual nature of a relationship.
      • 4. Romantic relationships between supervisors and subordinates they supervise and romantic relationships between academic faculty and students enrolled in their classes constitute conflicts of interest and are prohibited.
    • B. Consensual relationships existing between individuals - neither of whom has direct professional power or authority over the other - are not prohibited by this policy.
  • Section 2: Definitions
    • A. Direct professional power or authority over another individual occurs when a person is in the position to do any of the following:
      • 1. Supervise the academic work of a student in any capacity, including assigning grades, academic advising, or serving on scholarship committees;
      • 2. Influence a student's employment or any other college activity;
      • 3. Supervise and/or evaluate the work performance of a member of the faculty or professional or classified staff;
      • 4. Recommend or award merit or promotions to a member of the faculty or professional or classified staff;
      • 5. Serve on promotion or tenure committees.
  • Section 3: Sanction
    • A. When a romantic or sexual relationship exists, both parties involved may be subject to sanction possibilities. However, the person in the position of power or authority over the other will bear a greater degree of accountability.
    • B. To avoid possible sanction, the person in the position of power or authority over the other must, at the beginning of such a relationship, report its existence to his or her supervisor.
  • Section 4: Administrative Recourse
    • A. Once the college administration learns of a romantic or sexual relationship, whether through self-reporting or otherwise, it will take immediate steps to eliminate the power or authority of the one individual over the other.
    • B. This may be accomplished by reassigning duties or responsibilities or requiring withdrawal from a committee or similar action.
    • C. Should the action fail to remedy the situation, and the relationship continues, or if the relationship is not self-reported, the administration may impose one or more of the sanctions available through the college's disciplinary procedures, as outlined in the NSHE Code, the Nevada Administrative Code, or WNC policy(ies).
  • Section 5: Groundless or Malicious Charges
    • A. Persons bringing groundless or malicious charges under this policy are subject to disciplinary action for personal misconduct under the appropriate personnel or student policies.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted January 1, 1996 Dates Revised October 12, 2012; September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/1-5-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 1-6-1: Possession and Purchase of Alcoholic Beverages

WNC Policy 1-6-1
Procedure: Possession and Purchase of Alcoholic Beverages
Policy No.: 1-6-1
Department: President's Office
Contact: President's Office
Policy:

WNC and the Nevada System of Higher Education prohibit the possession on its properties and the purchase of alcoholic beverages except as noted.

  • Section 1: Possession of Alcoholic Beverages
    • A. The possession and use of alcoholic beverages on WNC properties is prohibited except in the following circumstances with written institutional president approval:
      • 1. Event scheduled by a non-college group or organization, which has received approval for the event through the established college facility-use process.
        • a. During an approved non-college event for which the sponsoring organization(s) provide the college with evidence of appropriate insurance liability coverage and/or contractual arrangements with an outside vendor who demonstrates similar liability coverage
      • 2. Scheduled academic or community education class that involves the consumption of alcoholic beverages as part of the academic requirements (i.e., wine tasting, POST Academy, etc.).
      • 3. Conferences and institutes, having institutional approval through the established facility use process, where fees are collected for a reception or other event where alcohol is served.
      • 4. College-sponsored and approved events where Host account expenditures are authorized for such events. College employees are not permitted to possess and/or consume alcoholic beverages during assigned work hours including meal periods and/or breaks.
      • 5. Student association events having the institutional president's approval:
        • a. The institutional president is the only person authorized to approve the purchase of alcoholic beverages from student association funds.
        • b. This approval only is granted when sufficient evidence is provided to ensure the legal dispensing of alcoholic beverages.
  • Section 2: Sale of Alcoholic Beverages
    • A. The college prohibits the sale of alcoholic beverages on all owned and/or leased properties with the following exceptions with written institutional president approval:
      • 1. During an approved non-college event for which the sponsoring organization(s) provide the college with evidence of appropriate insurance liability coverage and/or contractual arrangements with an outside vendor who demonstrates similar liability coverage
      • 2. At college sponsored events at which an outside vendor provides the alcoholic beverage service. All agreements with vendors or other third party providers for the distribution of alcoholic beverages must have the institutional president's approval.
  • Section 3: Events and Activities Not Specified in Sections 1 through 2
    • A. Purchase or consumption of alcoholic beverages not addressed in sections 1 through 2 must have the institutional president's approval.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted June 22, 1982 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; December 20, 2005; September 20, 2005; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

UNS Memo from Mary Lou Moser, Acting Secretary of the Board, to Presidents, Vice Presidents, Deans of Students, Controllers, Student Associations, Graduate Student Associations, business Managers of Student Associations. (6-22-82)

NSHE Board of Regents' Meeting Minutes: 6/82; 6/92

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/1-6-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 1-7-1: Behavioral Intervention Team

WNC Policy 1-7-1
Procedure: Behavioral Intervention Team
Policy No.: 1-7-1
Department: President's Office
Contact: Vice President for Human Resources/General Counsel, Dean of Student Services, Co

This policy is available as a downloadable file only.

Download this policy.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted May 14, 2013 Dates Revised
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/1-7-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 2-1-1: Research

WNC Policy 2-1-1
Procedure: Research
Policy No.: 2-1-1
Department: Institutional Research and Effectiveness
Contact: Director of Institutional Research
Policy:

The Western Nevada College policy on research covers all college sponsored research.

  • Section 1: Internal College-Sponsored Research
    • A. This policy is designed to cover college-sponsored research.
      • 1. College-sponsored research is defined as research by faculty, departments, divisions or other entities that is used to describe students, services or programs to external audiences or is presented as official college findings.
      • 2. College-sponsored research is defined as research by faculty, departments, divisions or other entities that is used to describe students, services or programs to external audiences or is presented as official college findings.
    • B. The following are exempt from this policy but are required to notify Institutional Research for implementation purposes if Institutional Research is involved:
      • 1. Regular classroom examinations, research assignments, or test studies
      • 2. Faculty research protected by academic freedom
      • 3. Survey by academic faculty of their students
      • 4. Survey by administrative and executive faculty of academic faculty, students or classified employees
    • C. A college-sponsored research subcommittee of SPFIE shall review all instruments before they are used. This committee shall consist of the Director of Institutional Research, or his/her designee, and two academic faculty recommended by the Academic Senate Chair and appointed by the SPFIE Chair. All individuals shall serve a two-year term.
    • D. The Office of Institutional Research will provide technical assistance to faculty, departments, divisions, or other entities after their instruments have been approved by the college-sponsored research subcommittee. Nonapproved instruments are not college-sanctioned and are not publishable as official college findings.
    • E. All instruments approved by the college-sponsored research subcommittee will follow the Code of Federal Regulations governing the protection of human subjects (45CFR46).
  • Section 2: External Agency-Requested Research
    • A. The Director of Institutional Research is responsible for coordinating the college's response to external questionnaires and other external data requests that will represent the college's position.
    • B. The Dean of Student Services is responsible for coordinating the college's response to requests for current student information.
    • C. The Director of Human Resources is responsible for coordinating the college's response to requests for employee information.
    • D. The Controller is responsible for coordinating the college's response to requests for information concerning purchasing and financial information. The Controller coordinates all responses to internal audit recommendations and follow-up.
    • E. The Budget Officer is responsible for coordinating the college's response to requests for information concerning the college budget.
    • F. The Director of Financial Aid is responsible for coordinating the college's response to requests for information concerning student scholarships, grants, loans and employment opportunities.
    • G. The Director of Library and Media Services is responsible for coordinating the college's response to requests for current library information.
    • H. External research not meeting the above criteria is the responsibility of the college-sponsored research subcommittee until such time as a suitable responder can be designated. It is understood that such data will be secondary once it is reported. It is further understood that WNC-IR will assist as needed in data gathering.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008; January 15, 2008

Code of Federal Regulations (45CFR46)

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/2-1-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 2-2-1: Evaluation by Students

WNC Policy 2-2-1
Procedure: Evaluation by Students
Policy No.: 2-2-1
Department: Instruction
Contact: Academic Director
Policy:

It shall be the policy of WNC to solicit evaluation of instruction and effectiveness of the instructor's teaching from students. This evaluation will be conducted in a systematic way each semester (fall, spring and summer).

  • Section 1: In-Class Evaluation
    • A. The evaluation by students shall be conducted during the last half of the instructional period.
    • B. A student selected by the faculty member shall distribute the survey forms to those students in attendance, collect the surveys after the surveys are completed, and seal the surveys in the envelope provided. The faculty member (after reading the instructions to students) shall leave the room during the evaluation process.
    • C. The packet is returned to Institutional Research following the instructions noted on the envelope.
  • Section 2: Student Participation
    • A. Students will be afforded the opportunity to evaluate the quality of instruction in every one of their enrolled courses.
  • Section 3: Handling of Survey Forms
    • A. Blank survey forms will be distributed to each faculty member by Institutional Research staff.
    • B. Institutional Research staff members will process completed forms.
    • C. Division summaries will be delivered to each appropriate Academic Director. Campus summaries will be delivered to the President, Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs and the Academic Director. Institutional Research will also maintain copies of the Division and campus summaries.
    • D. Individual summaries and comments, if any, will be delivered to appropriate Division offices for their use and for distribution to faculty.
    • E. Copies of individual summaries and comments, if any, will be delivered to the Dean of Instruction and will be kept on file in that office for three years.
    • F. Original survey forms will be stored by Institutional Research for one academic year.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted November 1, 1996 Dates Revised June 19, 2013; June 19, 2013; September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

SHE Board of Regents' Meeting Minutes: 1/14-15/99; 12/29/03
WNC Bylaws, Section 4.2.4; 4.4.3

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/2-2-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-1-1: Conflict of Interest Pertaining to Sponsored Projects

WNC Policy 3-1-1
Procedure: Conflict of Interest Pertaining to Sponsored Projects
Policy No.: 3-1-1
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs
Policy:

This policy sets forth procedures and guidelines that are to be followed in resolving actual and potential conflicts of interest and commitment pertaining to sponsored projects. This policy applies to all sponsored projects.

The teaching, research, and service mission of WNC must be conducted in an objective manner, free from undue influence arising from private or other special interests. The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for recognizing, disclosing, and managing conflicts of interest.

  • Section 1: General Information
    • A. WNC and its employees often benefit from the employee's participation in both public and private outside activities. WNC has no interest in setting forth detailed rules that may interfere with the employee's legitimate outside interests. Examples of activities which are clearly permissible include:
      • 1. acceptance of royalties for published works or of honoraria for papers and lectures;
      • 2. payments as a consultant to an outside entity, provided that the time commitment does not exceed WNC policy and that the arrangement does not alter the faculty member's commitments to WNC and;
      • 3. service on boards and committees of outside entities that does not distract from the faculty member's obligation to WNC.
    • B. Employees, in turn, must also ensure that their outside obligations, financial interests, and activities do not conflict or interfere with their commitment to WNC. This obligation pertains to both full-time and part-time employees.
    • C. This policy has been developed in response to specific federal agency requirements and is applicable to every investigator participating in sponsored project funding.
  • Section 2: Definitions
    • A. The definitions and examples listed below are intended to aid WNC's employees and appropriate review bodies in identifying conflicts of interest. Identifying conflict situations and documenting steps taken to manage these conflicts serves to protect the employee and the institution, as well as assures that WNC will remain eligible for Governmental-sponsored research.
      • 1. Sponsored Project - A research, training, service, or other type of project with identifiable objectives and/or deliverables for which external funding either is being requested or has been received.
      • 2. Investigator - The principal investigator and any other person at WNC who is responsible for the design, conduct, or reporting of research funded, or proposed for funding. For purposes of this disclosure requirement, the term "investigator" includes the investigator's spouse and/or dependent children.
      • 3. Financial Interest - Anything of monetary value, including but not limited to, salary, or other payments for services (e.g., consulting fees or honoraria); equity interests (e.g., stocks, stock options or other ownership interests); and intellectual property rights (e.g., patents, copyrights and royalties from such rights).
      • 4. Significant Financial Interest - The financial interest in business enterprises or entities where the value of such interest exceeds ten thousand dollars per anum in salary, fees, or other continuing payments or represents more than 5% ownership interest for any one enterprise or entity relevant to sponsored project activities when aggregated for the investigator and the investigator's spouse and dependent children.
      • 5. Conflict of Interest - A "conflict of interest" encompasses any situation in which an employee of WNC uses, or is in a position to use, his or her influence and authority within WNC to advance his or her own personal or financial interest, or the personal or financial interests of his or her immediate family. Examples of these types of conflicts may include, but are not limited to, the following:
        • a. personal gain or unauthorized use of privileged information acquired in connection with the employee's sponsored activities;
        • b. negotiations or influence upon the negotiation of an employees sponsored project agreement between WNC and organizations with which the employee has a consulting or other significant relationship;
        • c. acceptance of gratuities or special favors from agencies or organizations with which WNC does or may conduct business;
        • d. having a significant financial interest in an organization which funds the WNC employee's research work.
  • Section 3: Procedure
    • A. Each investigator covered by this policy will annually report all "significant financial interests" held by themselves, their spouse and/or dependent children that are relevant to proposed or funded sponsored projects.
    • B. Disclosures will be made on the Conflict of Interest Policy Disclosure form, Attachment I, to the appropriate Supervisor on an annual basis and/or when new significant financial interests are acquired. A disclosure form must be completed prior to the submission of an application for sponsored project funding.
    • C. Positive disclosures will be reviewed by a committee composed of the Vice President of Finance/Administrative Services, two or more of the Academic Division Chairs including the cognizant Academic Director, the appropriate department chairpersons, and the Vice President of Institutional Development. Ad Hoc reviewers may be consulted on a case-by-case basis.
    • D. In those cases where the committee determines that a real or apparent conflict exists, it will take one of the following actions:
      • 1. Accept the sponsored project.
      • 2. Not accept the sponsored project.
      • 3. Accept the sponsored project subject to certain conditions, e.g.:
        • a. monitoring of research by independent reviewers;
        • b. public disclosure of significant financial interest;
        • c. modification of the research plan;
        • d. disqualification from participation in all or part of the sponsored project;
        • e. divestiture of significant financial interest;
        • f. severance of relationships that create actual or potential conflicts
      • 4. Appeal of the decision may be made to the President of WNC, who will consult with the principal investigator and the review committee before making a final determination (within thirty days of the appeal) as to the action to be taken. In all cases, resolution of the actual or apparent conflict of interest will be achieved before WNC accepts a sponsored project.
  • Section 4: Compliance
    • A. Alleged violation of WNC's Conflict of Interest policy will be reviewed by means of an inquiry conducted by the review committee. Instances of deliberate breach of the policy, including failure to file a disclosure; knowingly filing incomplete, erroneous or misleading disclosure forms; or failure to comply with procedures prescribed in fulfillment of this policy, will be evaluated by the review committee.
    • B. The review committee will recommend to the President the appropriate sanction, in accordance with Chapter Six of the NSHE Code. Possible sanctions include: formal admonition letter to the faculty member's personnel file, suspension of privileges to apply for external funds, non-renewal of appointment, or dismissal.
  • Section 5: Records
    • A. Disclosure forms and records of all further actions related to such disclosures will be maintained in the Office of the appropriate Vice President for three years following termination of the relevant award, or any subsequent action relating to that award.
    • B. All disclosures and related documentation are considered confidential, and only those persons involved in the implementation of this policy will have access to such records.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted February 1, 1996 Dates Revised June 19, 2013; September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-1-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-1-2: Cell Phone and Pager Usage

WNC Policy 3-1-2
Procedure: Cell Phone and Pager Usage
Policy No.: 3-1-2
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs
Policy:

Cell phone and pager usage must be conducted outside Western Nevada College's classrooms, laboratories, testing areas, and Library and Media Services public areas.

  • Section 1: Usage
    • A. Please set your cell phone and/or pager on low or use a motion alarm when in classrooms, laboratories areas, testing areas, and Library and Media Services public areas.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted November 28, 2000 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-1-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-2-1: Instruction

WNC Policy 3-2-1
Procedure: Instruction
Policy No.: 3-2-1
Department: Instruction
Contact: Division Chair
Policy:

An articulation form must be submitted whenever a faculty member or administrator plans to create a new course, teach a course that is taught at another community college which is not articulated for WNC, or change an aspect of an articulated course - title, number of credits, etc. For a class with a varying title (Special Topics), articulation must be submitted with each title change.

  • Section 1: Approvals
    • A. A course can be offered for academic credit only if the appropriate form has been submitted to and approved by the Faculty Senate Articulation Committee. Community Services (non-credit) courses are exempt.
    • B. A course is put into the College Catalog only if it has been submitted to and approved by the College Curriculum Committee.
  • Section 2: Instructions for Submission
    • A. The appropriate articulation form is obtained from a Senate articulation member, the articulation officer, or an academic dean.
    • B. A faculty member (or administrator) completes and submits the appropriate form to his/her department chair (when applicable) and dean for approval and signature. The faculty member then submits the form to the Senate Articulation Chair.
    • C. The Senate Articulation chair proofs the form for errors, problems, etc. If necessary, the chair returns the form to the faculty member (administrator) for any needed corrections and/or revisions.
    • D. When the Articulation chair has a correct and approved copy, he/she will then forward forms for courses requesting transfer status to the Articulation Officer; copies of all forms will be kept by the Articulation Chair
    • E. The faculty member (or administrator) must also complete and submit SIS new course or change forms to enter the course or course changes in the student records system. The SIS form is submitted to the Articulation chair to verify the articulation has been approved, who then forwards it to the Admissions Office.
    • F. Approval for a title change for a class with a varying title (Special Topics) may be processed by submitting an Articulation form or by submitting the proposed title to the Articulation Chair through electronic mail.
    • G. It is the responsibility of the individual submitting the form to ensure any changes are submitted to the Curriculum Committee for submission in the college catalog. The individual responsible for bringing a program area to the Curriculum Committee must contact the chair of the Faculty Senate Articulation Committee at least four weeks prior to meeting with the Curriculum Committee.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted September 24, 1996 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004; March 23, 1999; September 25, 1996
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
NRS Code NRS 396.568

NSHE Board of Regents' Meeting Minutes: 5/92; 12/02; 8/03

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-2-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-2-2: Course Numbering System

WNC Policy 3-2-2
Procedure: Course Numbering System
Policy No.: 3-2-2
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs
Policy:

A common course numbering system for all institutions shall be maintained.

  • Section 1: Course Numbering System
    • A. To assist students identifying the types of courses available at WNC and their applicability toward specific degrees, the College maintains the following numbering system:
      • 1. Courses articulated for transfer within the University of Nevada System -- 100 - 299
      • 2. Courses not articulated for transfer within the University of Nevada System -- 100B - 299B
      • 3. Community Service Courses -- 100C - 299C
      • 4. Developmental Instruction -- 0 - 99
    • B. Developmental Course Numbering
      • 1. 001 - 020: Adult Basic Education (Reading, Math, Language, Writing)
      • 2. 021 - 050: English as a Second Language
      • 3. 051 - 060: GED Preparation
      • 4. 061 - 080: Lower Level Developmental Courses
      • 5. 081 - 099: College Preparation courses (i.e., ENG 95, ENG 98)
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted April 1, 1989 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004; March 1, 1989
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

NSHE Board of Regents' Meeting Minutes: May 1976

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-2-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-2-3: Academic Faculty Workload

WNC Policy 3-2-3
Procedure: Academic Faculty Workload
Policy No.: 3-2-3
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Vice-President and Academic Faculty Senate Chair

The purpose of an academic workload policy is to provide the following:

  • A guide that places students' educational and developmental needs as our highest priority while insuring the best use of institutional resources.
  • A measure of institutional efficiency to external audiences
  • Equitable treatment of all Academic Faculty
  • Impetus for institutional development
  • A measure of financial accountability
  • An equitable measure of workload
  • Section 1: Responsibilities of Full-Time Instructional Faculty
    • A. As stated in Board of Regents Handbook, Title 4, Chapter 3, Section 3, number 3, instructional faculty members are expected to teach; develop curriculum; conduct other instructional activities, including advising, grading, and preparing for classes; maintain currency in their academic discipline; and perform public and professional service, service to the institution, and similar academic activities.
    • B. An Instructional Faculty Member
      • 1. Reports to appropriate Academic Director.
      • 2. Works cooperatively within the learning community.
      • 3. Provides instruction:
        • a. Teaches students in assigned classes in accordance with official course outlines.
        • b. Responds to the needs of students as learners and consumers by providing high quality educational programs and services.
        • c. Prepares individual course syllabi before instruction begins and distributes them to students and to Academic Director on or before the first day of class.
        • d. Selects textbooks for classes.
        • e. Maintains scheduled office hours.
        • f. Identifies supplies, equipment, and other learning resources needed to support instruction and makes recommendations to Academic Director.
        • g. Maintains accurate class records of student grades and rosters.
      • 4. Availability to students:
        • a. Faculty Members are expected to be available to students and take an active role in student advising on all 171 contract days.
        • b. In general, Instructional Faculty will be present on campus following a schedule established with Academic Director.
        • c. Absences from campus, for activities such as conferences or professional development, must be approved by the Academic Director and the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs.
        • d. Should an emergency or illness require class cancellation, the Faculty Member will work collaboratively with the Academic Director to arrange for class make-up, faculty substitute, or alternate student assignment.
        • e. Faculty will maintain student advisement hours, which will be posted on office doors during the first week of classes and announced on all class syllabi.
        • f. Full-time Faculty must schedule student advisement hours totaling at least five hours per week.
      • 5. Service to the institution is a normal requirement of all full-time Faculty. Faculty Members are expected to identify service to the college in their annual self-evaluations. Service contributions may include:
        • a. Serving as the advisor of a student organization as approved by the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs
        • b. Serving as the chair of a college standing committee
        • c. Serving in a productive manner on a college standing committee as attested to by the chair of the committee
        • d. Representing the college in a significant NSHE project or national professional organization as approved by the Vice President or the President.
        • e. Participating in a division or curriculum activity that significantly enhances an academic program, such as a significant and extraordinary assessment or program review activity
        • f. Participating in any other productive work that supports the college and its students as negotiated and approved by the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs or the President.
        • g. Participating in peer-evaluation processes.
        • h. Serving on senate, college and/or system committees.
        • i. Participating in planning and budgeting processes.
        • j. Attending meetings and actively supporting college functions.
        • k. Participating in program review and academic program assessment.
      • 6. Professional development:
        • a. Engages in professional development activities, maintains currency in assigned teaching fields, and keeps informed on new approaches to instruction.
        • b. Maintains occupational/technical/professional credentials, if applicable, with the support of college resources.
      • 7. Prepares an annual self-evaluation in accordance with WNC bylaws.
      • 8. Promotes college educational programs and services to our communities.
      • 9. Performs other related duties as assigned.
  • Section 2: Institutional Responsibilities
    • A. Western Nevada College endorses academic freedom as defined by the American Association of University Professors 1940 Statement of Principles on Academic Freedom and Tenure.
    • B. Furthermore, the institution is committed to providing the following, within resources available:
      • 1. The establishment and maintenance of a learning environment in which faculty can practice their profession as college teachers to the maximum advantage of their students and themselves.
      • 2. As much opportunity for study, professional advancement, and attendance at professional conferences as is consistent with the needs of the College's mission.
      • 3. Adequate instructional support, resources, and office facilities.
      • 4. The provision of a clearly-stated set of board and institutional policies.
      • 5. Opportunity to participate in both the setting of policy and decision-making, particularly as related to instruction and matters directly concerned with faculty welfare.
      • 6. Open channels of communication which allow the faculty to express their views, make recommendations, air grievances, and see appropriate action individually or collectively through authorized representatives.
      • 7. A salary schedule which compares favorably with those of similar institutions, and is as high as possible while remaining consistent with sound budgeting, and an opportunity to qualify for movement on that salary schedule as determined by the Academic Faculty Senate Professional Advancement Committee.
      • 8. A program of benefits: leave-of-absence program; sick leave policy; surgical medical, and major medical benefits; dental benefits; group life insurance, and retirement.
      • 9. An administration which accepts as its primary responsibility the support of quality instruction and service to students.
      • 10. Opportunity for full time faculty to recommend part-time faculty.
  • Section 3: Full-Time Instructional Faculty Workload
    • A. Contracts/Schedules
      • 1. The instructional unit, defined below, is the basis for determining faculty workload.
      • 2. The contract period for instructional faculty coincides with the academic calendar, based on a five-day week, excluding holidays. It includes graduation and the period of time before the fall and spring semesters begin as reflected in the calendar recommended by the Academic Faculty Senate and approved by the college President. It also includes the time period needed to file student grades and other necessary reports at the end of each semester. Faculty will establish a schedule for campus presence during the contract period in consultation with their Academic Director. The Academic Director will forward all work schedules to the Dean of Instruction for approval.
      • 3. Faculty will complete all necessary reports by the deadlines established by the Office of Admissions and Records.
      • 4. Prior to each semester, supervisors and Faculty Members will complete a written semester workload agreement to be approved by the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs and forwarded to the president.
      • 5. A minimum of five student advisement hours must be scheduled over at least three days per week at an instructional site.
      • 6. By the end of the first week of each semester, Faculty Members shall submit a schedule of instruction and student advisement hours to the appropriate Academic Director for review and approval.
      • 7. Division Chairs will immediately forward approved faculty schedules to the Dean of Instruction and Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs.
      • 8. By the end of the first week of classes, Faculty will post the approved schedule outside their offices, and the Dean of Instruction will forward to the appropriate college offices.
    • B. Instructional Loads for Instructional Faculty
      • 1. Full-time Instructional Faculty will teach a minimum of 15 instructional units during the fall academic semester and a minimum of 30 instructional units for the academic year.
      • 2. Nursing Faculty will teach a minimum of 18 contact hours during the fall academic semester and a minimum of 36 contact units for the academic year (540 hours for the academic year).
      • 3. HIT, Welding, Machine Tool, and Automotive Faculty will teach on a 35 hour work week for the fall and spring academic semesters.
      • 4. There shall be a reduced class size of 8 students for clinical hours.
      • 5. Lecture hours are 50 minutes in duration. Practicum, lab, and clinical hours are 60 minutes in duration.
      • 6. The load definition formula is provided in section C below and is the same for all full-time faculty.
      • 7. In addition to the student advisement hours mentioned in the previous section, teaching faculty are expected to spend an average of 15 hours per week in institutional service, such as committee work, and instructional support, such as grading, preparation, or curriculum development. Instructional Faculty will spend 35 hours on their assigned duties per week. The terms of these 35 hours will be developed with Academic Director and documented in the semester workload agreement.
      • 8. Twenty direct instructional hours per week are required for self-paced contact-hour contracts; 15 hours per week are required for office, institutional service, and other student contacts.
      • 9. Faculty may be required to teach both days and evenings as well as in different campus/rural center locations.
      • 10. Class scheduling is driven by the needs of full-time, degree-seeking students. If a division offers a degree, the division undertakes an obligation to assure that students can complete the degree in a timely manner by attending college full time. Academic Director will consult with Lead Faculty, the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs, the Director of Institutional Research, and the Director of Counseling to develop schedules of class offerings that meet student needs. The Academic Director, in collaboration with Faculty Members, will then develop appropriate courses and loads so that Instructional Faculty meet student needs.
      • 11. Faculty may be given specific assignments according to their areas of expertise.
      • 12. The teaching load of a Faculty Member teaching less than the minimum expected load as stated in Section 3.B.1 will be adjusted, using one or more of the following options, in order of priority:
        • a. The assignment of a course previously scheduled to be taught by a part-time instructor.
        • b. Course or courses to be offered in the alternate semester schedule.
        • c. One or more short courses targeted for specific groups during the same semester.
        • d. Duties assigned by appropriate administrators, in consultation with the Academic Director, that relate to the Faculty Member's function at WNC.
        • e. In the event that option d (above) is exercised, prior, signed approval must be obtained from the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs, and a written agreement of the work to be completed with a timeline and a reporting mechanism for specific outcomes must be provided.
    • C. Load Definition Formula
      • 1. Instructional contact-hour definitions:
        • a. (LE) Lecture: A lecture requires regular preparation of instructional material and student assignments and includes regular written work assignments graded by the classroom Faculty Member.
        • b. (LA) Laboratory: A laboratory requires regular preparation of laboratory assignments and equipment or materials, continual faculty oversight and interaction with students, and regular written work assignments graded by the laboratory Faculty Member.
        • c. (S) Studio: A studio requires regular preparation of studio assignments and continual oversight and interaction with the students by the Faculty Member. Operation of one campus gallery is equivalent to one studio course.
        • d. (P) Occupational practice: An occupational practicum requires regular preparation of practice assignments and continual faculty oversight and interaction with students.
        • e. (C) Clinical: A clinical experience requires regular preparation and grading of clinical assignments, including written work, and continual oversight and interaction with the students.
        • f. Note: The Academic Director is charged with recommending to the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs the instructional units for any new class. This determination will be based on information provided in the course description and syllabus at the time of course approval.
      • 2. Load Calculation: The calculation below is based on a 15-week semester. Any deviations from normal semester lengths will be appropriately adjusted to assure that total instructional time per credit hour does not vary.
        • a. Full-time Faculty Instructional Load (in instructional units) = Total number of lecture hours per week + (15/18) x Total number of laboratory hours per week + (15/20) x Total number of practicum hours per week + (15/20) x Total number of clinical hours per week.
        • b. Full-time Instructional Faculty are required to teach a minimum of 15 instructional units (as defined above) per week in each semester of the academic year. The only deviation from this policy will be reassigned time for administrative responsibilities, as defined below, or special, written arrangements negotiated and approved by the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs, and forwarded to the President before the end of the first week of the semester.
        • c. The Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs may choose to place an Academic Faculty Member on an annual contract of longer than 171 days to accommodate certain administrative responsibilities. An agreement on the terms of these responsibilities, their specific duration, and mechanism for reporting outcomes will be signed by both parties and forwarded to the President for approval before a formal contract is issued.
  • Section 4: Activities That Qualify for Reassigned Time and/or Additional Compensation
    • A. Reassigned time is only permitted for administrative assignments. Permissible reassigned time will be defined by the following:
      • 1. Division Chairs will be reassigned 15 instructional units per year for divisional administrative responsibilities. In general, this means 6 units reassigned time in the fall semester and 9 units reassigned time in the spring. Any deviation from this policy will require a written approval by the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs and formal, written notification to the President, prior to the end of the first week of the semester (193-day contract).
      • 2. Lead Instructors will be reassigned 3 instructional units per semester for divisional administrative responsibilities. Any deviation from this policy will require written approval by the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs and formal, written, notification to the President prior to the end of the first week of the semester.
      • 3. The Faculty Senate Chair will be reassigned 6 instructional units per semester for collegial governance administrative responsibilities (177-day contract).
  • Section 5: Full Time Instructional Faculty Overloads
    • A. By the end of the first week of classes in each semester or prior to mid-semester for open-entry, open-exit classes, Division Chairs will submit to the Dean of Instruction any recommendations for teaching overloads. Full time instructional faculty will be limited to 6 units of overload per semester, in compliance with the terms defined below.
    • B. Instructional overloads are paid at the part-time rate of instruction.
    • C. In general, faculty loads will be 15 instructional units per semester. Occasionally the vice president of Academic and student affairs may approve an overload in excess of 15 instructional units in a given semester.
    • D. All overloads are based on the number of instructional units above 15 as computed by the above load formula (3.C.2).
    • E. Annual Instructional Faculty contracts are based on loads of 15 instructional units per semester.
    • F. Academic Director's are not permitted overloads.
    • G. All overload payments are paid on an annual basis before the end of the spring semester.
  • Section 6: Outside Professional or Scholarly Service
    • A. Outside professional or scholarly service by Faculty Members within their subject matter field and for compensation is recognized as a legitimate activity unless specifically prohibited by the employee's contract with the institution. Faculty Members engaged in providing compensated outside professional or scholarly service shall provide advance notification in writing to their immediate supervisor about the nature of the work to be performed, the company/organization for which the work will be performed, and the estimated time involved. The request must be approved in advance by the supervisor and the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs within 10 working days unless the supervisor believes that a conflict exists with obligations currently incurred or assumed by the college regarding a Faculty Member's consulting activities. Faculty Members engaged in providing outside professional or scholarly service shall comply with NSHE Board of Regents Handbook, Title 4, Chapter 3, Section 8 regarding Compensated Outside Professional Services.
  • Section 7: Stipends
    • A. Occasionally, the Academic Director may determine that a particular assignment to a full-time Faculty Member makes such an unusual demand of time and rises so far above the level of normal service that additional compensation is warranted. In that event, the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs may choose to provide a stipend for such service. The formal agreement, describing the nature and duration of the service, is signed by both parties and forwarded to the President prior to the beginning of the proposed activity. Stipends are provided on a semester-by-semester basis. The formal agreement does not imply a commitment by the administration to continue to provide such stipends for any activity. Funding of conference or professional development travel is not to be construed as a stipend. No written agreement is required for distance education, self-paced, independent studies, cooperative work experience, internships, or practicums.
    • B. Stipends will be calculated as follows:
      • 1. Distance Education (IAV/Online)
        • a. $100 stipend per course
        • b. $50 stipend for each student above a 30-student cap
      • 2. Self-Paced, Independent Studies, Cooperative Work Experience, Internships and Practicums
        • a. $70 per student
      • 3. Extraordinarily High Student Enrollment
        • a. Negotiated with the Academic Director
      • 4. Team Teaching
        • a. Credits will be divided between instructors after consultation with each Instructor and the Academic Director
      • 5. Additional Duties Deserving Compensation
        • a. Negotiated with the Academic Director
  • Section 8: Non-Instructional Faculty Workload
    • A. Contracts/Schedules
      • 1. The contract period for academic non-teaching faculty coincides with the academic calendar and includes that period of time necessary for the completion of duties specific to that position.
      • 2. Faculty will be notified by July each year of the required period of service.
      • 3. At the beginning of each semester, Faculty Members shall submit a schedule of work hours for approval.
    • B. Loads for Non-Instructional Faculty
      • 1. The normal workweek for full-time Academic Support Faculty, including Librarians and Counselors, is 35 hours. Mutually agreed-upon adjustments in support of students will be allowed.
      • 2. College committee work, college meetings, staff meetings, advising, and registration responsibilities are considered part of the regular workload for Non-Instructional Faculty.
      • 3. Faculty may be required to work both days and evenings as well as in different campus/rural center locations.
      • 4. Faculty may be given specific assignments by their appropriate administrator according to their areas of expertise.
      • 5. In establishing workload, the same mitigating factors listed earlier in this document apply.
    • C. Overload Compensation for Non-Instructional Faculty
      • 1. Overloads will be processed as early as February 1 but no later than June 30 of each year. The Vice President of Academic & Student Affairs must approve exceptions.
      • 2. Payment will be based upon the approved part-time/overload salary schedule
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted July 8, 2008 Dates Revised June 19, 2013; September 2, 2008; May 9, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-2-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-2-4: Full-Time Teaching Faculty Job Description

WNC Policy 3-2-4
Procedure: Full-Time Teaching Faculty Job Description
Policy No.: 3-2-4
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs
Policy:

Full-time teaching faculty shall abide by the standard outlined in the job description.

  • Section 1: Teaching and Advising
    • A. Teach 15 credits or 20 contact hours per week.
    • B. Meet each class as scheduled at the time, place and for length of time designated.
    • C. Maintain a minimum of five (5) posted student advisement office hours a week
    • D. Be available during regularly scheduled registration to serve as an advisor and assistant for students in the registration process.
  • Section 2: Meetings
    • A. Attend all WNC college-wide and divisional or departmental meetings, as scheduled and announced.
    • B. Attend appropriate curricular advisory committee meetings.
    • C. Attend professional developmental meetings and participate in professional development activities.
    • D. Serve on committees, college task forces, workshops, and other college improvement activities, as needed.
  • Section 3: Course Materials
    • A. Prepare course materials.
    • B. Provide each student at the beginning of each course with the following:
      • 1. goals and objectives/content for the course of study
      • 2. titles of required and supplementary textbooks to be used
      • 3. course attendance requirements
      • 4. planned schedule of examinations, field trips, and other special activities
      • 5. out-of-class assignment policy
      • 6. method of evaluating student progress toward and achievement of, course goals and objectives, including method by which the final grade is derived
      • 7. information about consultation/appointment availability procedures
      • 8. other information which informs students of requirements established by the instructor for meeting course objectives
    • C. Periodically review the progress of each student and inform each student of his/her progress toward achieving course objectives.
    • D. Work with division, department, administrative services, campus and other designated classified staff in the development of course materials, printed information, brochures, and other information which may be needed in the teaching or promotion of the college's curriculum.
  • Section 4: Grading
    • A. Plan and administer a fair and equitable grading policy.
    • B. Maintain attendance and grade records; keep copies of records for one year.
    • C. Return all class list and grade reports correctly completed at the time requested.
  • Section 5: Textbooks
    • A. Review proposed new textbooks as requested by department, division, or other appropriate chairpersons or administrators.
    • B. Order textbooks within the prescribed deadline requirements.
  • Section 6: Other Duties
    • A. Fulfill other responsibilities as described in the full-time teaching faculty member's annual prospectus; these must be accepted by the appropriate administrator.
    • B. Complete other duties as assigned.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-2-4.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-2-5: Students Taking Courses Taught By Immediate Family Members

WNC Policy 3-2-5
Procedure: Students Taking Courses Taught By Immediate Family Members
Policy No.: 3-2-5
Department: Instruction
Contact: Dean of Instruction
Policy:

To avoid the impression of conflict of interests, faculty should avoid teaching a member of his/her immediate family.

  • Section 1: Definition
    • A. Immediate family is defined as husband, wife, father, mother, son, daughter, brother, sister, father-in-law, mother-in-law, son-in-law, daughter-in-law, brother-in-law, sister-in-law, nephew, niece, granddaughter, grandson, grandfather, grandmother, aunt, or uncle.
  • Section 2: Approvals
    • A. Any student attempting to take a class taught by an immediate member should be advised to take a section taught by a non-related faculty member, if such a section exists.
    • B. Any student attempting to take a class that is taught by an immediate family member must have prior approval of the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs through the appropriate Dean.
    • C. If a student is approved to take a class taught by a member of his/her immediate family then the grade for that course must be determined independently. This independent method of grade determination must have the prior approval of the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs through the appropriate Dean.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted October 24, 2000 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-2-5.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-2-6: New Course/Program Development

WNC Policy 3-2-6
Procedure: New Course/Program Development
Policy No.: 3-2-6
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs
Policy:

It shall be the policy of Western Nevada College to consider individual awards to academic faculty for the purpose of new course development, restructuring an existing course, or developing a new program.

  • Section 1: Definition
    • A. Academic faculty may apply for course reassignment to develop a new course, restructure an existing course, or develop a new program. Faculty members will be given reassigned time from teaching to course/program development at a one-to-one instructional unit ratio.
    • B. To be eligible for reassigned time, the faculty member will provide evidence that the project will be beneficial to students and the college and that completion of the new course or program development would not be possible unless reassigned time is granted.
  • Section 2: Request
    • A. All academic full-time faculty are eligible to apply for this award.
    • B. Part-time faculty are not eligible for reassigned time. Part-time faculty members should contact their Academic Director about the possibility of compensation for the development of a new course, restructuring an existing course, or developing a new program.
    • C. Faculty members may apply every year.
    • D. There is a maximum of twelve instructional units available for reassigned time through this program each academic year.
    • E. A faculty member may apply for a maximum of six instructional units per year.
    • F. Faculty may not accumulate an overload during the semester that they receive a reassignment for new course/program development.
    • G. Faculty must notify the Academic Director before submitting the application. Evidence of division approval should be included in the application.
    • H. The Sabbatical Committee will accept applications each fall semester. The committee will notify academic faculty with the dates of submission and information on the application process no later than September 15.
    • I. Faculty will submit three copies of a written proposal to the committee by the date specified in the announcement for applications.
    • J. Reassigned time is given at a one-to-one ratio. The development of a new three-credit class would result in a one semester, three instructional unit reassignment.
  • Section 3: Process
    • A. Committee meetings and faculty interviews will be held each November.
    • B. Deliberations of the committee will be confidential. The committee will review all applications in detail. At the request of the committee, faculty may be invited to defend their proposals.
    • C. An alternate recipient will be selected in case a faculty member is unable to fulfill the approved proposal.
    • D. The committee chair will report the committee recommendations to the Academic Faculty Senate no later than the December senate meeting.
    • E. The committee will forward the final new course/program development recommendations to the Office of the President. The ultimate responsibility for awarding the reassigned time rests with the president.
  • Section 4: Standards
    • A. The committee will consider the merits of the proposal and its benefit to the applicant, the college, the student community, and the curricular needs of the academic program.
    • B. Faculty members receiving awards are required to submit a report to the Academic Director, the Sabbatical Committee, and the Office of the President on or before the completion of the semester the course reassignment was granted.
    • C. The committee will deposit a copy of the application, the committee recommendations, and the recipient's written report in the WNC Library archives.
    • D. The faculty member must offer the developed class within one year from the date the reassigned time is granted.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted January 23, 2007 Dates Revised June 19, 2013; September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-2-6.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-2-7: Sabbatical Leave

WNC Policy 3-2-7
Procedure: Sabbatical Leave
Policy No.: 3-2-7
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs
Policy:

It shall be the policy of WNC to award sabbatical leave to eligible academic faculty.

  • Section 1: Definition
    • A. Sabbatical leaves offer academic faculty the opportunity for professional growth and academic achievement through research, writing, curriculum or program development, work experience, artistic creation, or a project directly related to their responsibilities in the college. (Board of Regents Handbook, Title 4, Chapter 3, Section 15.)
  • Section 2: Request
    • A. Any faculty member who has served full-time for six or more years at WNC without a sabbatical leave is eligible to apply.
    • B. No later than September 15 of each year, the Academic Faculty Senate Sabbatical Committee shall notify eligible faculty of the application process. An eligibility list, provided by Human Resources, will be distributed with this notification.
    • C. It is recommended that all applicants meet with their chair or supervisor to discuss the proposal and its budgetary and staffing implications at least two weeks before submitting the proposal.
    • D. The faculty member will submit three copies of a written sabbatical leave proposal to the committee by the date specified in the announcement for applications.
    • E. Sabbaticals may be awarded for one semester at no reduction in salary, or for one academic year at 2/3 salary.
  • Section 3: Process
    • A. The committee will use three major criteria when considering sabbatical applications:
      • 1. The merits of the proposal. The proposal should include the following characteristics: supports the overall mission of the college; enhances the ability of the applicant to perform their duties at the college; and has a positive impact on the college and the student community.
      • 2. The proposal demonstrates commitment to professional development and growth.
      • 3. Service to the college, over and above the faculty member's primary educational or support function. A history of substantive contributions to the college, such as committee work, advisor positions, etc., where properly documented, will strengthen the application.
    • B. All deliberations shall remain confidential. The committee will review all applications in detail. At the discretion of the committee, faculty may be invited to defend their proposals.
    • C. An alternate recipient shall be selected in case a faculty member is unable to fulfill the proposed project.
    • D. The committee chair will report the committee recommendations to the Academic Faculty Senate no later than the December senate meeting.
    • E. The committee will forward the final sabbatical leave recommendations to the Office of the President. The ultimate responsibility for awarding sabbaticals rests with the president.
  • Section 4: Standards
    • A. The recipient is to make every effort to accomplish the tasks as defined in the proposal by the end of the sabbatical leave.
    • B. A written report shall be submitted to the Sabbatical Committee and the Office of the President within three months of return from leave. A copy of the report shall also be given to the recipient's Academic Director or supervisor.
    • C. The committee shall deposit a copy of the sabbatical leave applications, committee recommendations, and the recipient's written report in the WNC Library archives.
    • D. Recipients are encouraged to report the results of sabbaticals to the college community. Options may include, but are not limited to, a public lecture or presentation, a website devoted to the project, or a written summation.
    • E. Upon completion of the sabbatical leave, the recipient must return to college duties for a period of time at least equal to that of the last contract prior to sabbatical leave.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted January 23, 2007 Dates Revised June 19, 2013; September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-2-7.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-2-8: Use of Copyrighted Materials Policy

WNC Policy 3-2-8
Procedure: Use of Copyrighted Materials Policy
Policy No.: 3-2-8
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs
Policy:

It shall be the policy of Western Nevada College to observe and adhere to the provisions set forth in section 107 of the U.S. Copyright Act of 1976, and any subsequent revisions or additions, including the Digital Millennium Copyright Act and the Technology, Education, and Copyright Harmonization (TEACH )Act that impact the reproduction of copyrighted materials for educational purposes. . It shall also be the policy of Western Nevada College to observe and adhere to the provisions of the Higher Education Act of 2008 that prohibit the unauthorized distribution of copyrighted materials through illegal downloading or peer-to-peer distribution of intellectual property.

Western Nevada College is not legally liable for the activities of faculty, staff, students, or community members who violate this policy.

  • Section 1: Definition
    • A. Copyright is the legal protection of the work of an artist, author, musician, and other creators of intellectual works. Copyrighted material include audiovisual works, music, motion pictures, computer software, printed materials, material copied or downloaded from the Internet, and any other form of material that has been copyrighted under U.S. law. The reproduction of copyrighted material without the permission of the copyright holder is prohibited, unless the use or reproduction of that material falls under the guidelines of fair use.
    • B. Fair use is the copyright principle that allows limited reproduction of copyrighted materials without the permission of the copyright holder for educational, news gathering, research, scholarship, or teaching activities. Four factors determine whether or not the reproduction of the copyrighted material falls under the guidelines of fair use.
      • 1. The purpose and character of use.
      • 2. The nature of the copyrighted material.
      • 3. The amount of and the substantiality of the portion of material used.
      • 4. The effect of the use upon the potential market for, or value of, the copyrighted work.
    • C. Additional information on determining if material is free of copyright restrictions, or falls under the guidelines of fair use, can be found in the copyright procedures document.
  • Section 2: Procedures
    • A. All faculty, staff, and students of WNC shall comply with the provisions of the Copyright Law.
    • B. The faculty, staff, and students of WNC shall make a good faith effort to ensure that all materials used for courses, course related assignments, the college Web site, or college publications are copyright compliant.
    • C. WNC faculty or staff shall not require any individual in the college community to violate copyright law in order to fulfill a job duty or course related assignment.
    • D. All material put on the WNC Web site must be copyright compliant.
    • E. Any copyrighted material used in an official WNC publication must be copyright compliant.
    • F. Copyright warning notices must be prominently displayed on or near all copying equipment on WNC campuses and learning centers, college website, college class schedule, computer labs and libraries.
    • G. WNC computers or networks (including personal computers using the WNC computer network), photocopiers, DVD or video recorders, audio recorders, or any other copying equipment cannot be used to copy or download copyrighted material, unless at least one of the following conditions are met: the copyright holder has granted permission to use the material; the rights to use the copyrighted material have been purchased; or WNC has a copyright licensing agreement with the provider of the copyrighted material, such as a library database or an online periodical subscription.
    • H. Computer software cannot be downloaded, copied, or reproduced on WNC computers or networks, unless it is permitted in the software licensing agreement or is without any copyright restrictions.
    • I. Copyrighted digital media files (music, videos, television shows, etc.) cannot be downloaded, copied, or reproduced using WNC computers or networks, unless at least one of the following conditions are met: the permission of the copyright holder has been granted to use the material; the rights to use the material have been purchased from the copyright holder, a copyright licensing organization, or through a company that sells digital media files; or WNC has a licensing agreement with the provider of the copyrighted material.
    • J. Movies can be shown on campus if they fall under the fair use guidelines. If it does not fall under fair use, a copyright licensing agreement to show the movie must be purchased.
      • 1. Student clubs and organizations:
        • a. May show movies on campus without paying a copyright licensing fee if the movie has a specific educational purpose and the group has a discussion of the movie facilitated by a faculty or staff member with experience or expertise in the subject matter relevant to the movie.
        • b. Must pay a copyright licensing fee if the movie is primarily for entertainment purposes, the movie is open to the public, or an admittance fee is charged.
        • c. If student clubs or organizations have any questions about showing movies on campus, or need to obtain copyright licensing information to show a movie, the group should contact the Office of Student Life.
      • 2. Faculty and staff:
        • a. May show movies on campus for educational purposes without paying a copyright licensing fee under the guidelines of fair use if the following criteria are met:

          (1) The movie being shown must be relevant to the subject matter of the course.
          (2) The movie is being shown in a space that is routinely used for instruction.
          (3) The movie is only being shown to students officially registered for the class.
          (4) If a movie is not being shown as part of a regular course, a faculty or staff member with expertise relevant to the movie topic must hold an educational discussion about the movie. Only WNC students and employees could attend the movie presented under these circumstances without paying a licensing fee.
        • b. If the movie is advertised outside of WNC, or an admittance fee is charged, it will be considered a public presentation and a copyright licensing fee must be paid.
        • c. If a faculty or staff member has any questions about showing a movie on campus the faculty or staff member should contact the Inventions, Copyrightable Materials, and Intellectual Property Committee.
    • K. The performance and broadcast of music on campus is prohibited unless a
      musical composition has entered the public domain or rights to use the music has been obtain from its creators. U.S. Copyright law grants the owners of copyrighted music the exclusive right to perform their music publicly. Others must first obtain permission from the music owners or from their licensing agents before performing or broadcasting their music. Copyright licensing may be required to play or broadcast music at sporting events, fitness centers, fairs, festivals, other special events such as orientation or graduation, musical attractions, music-on-hold, and other live or recorded performances or broadcasts. If you are in doubt as to whether your event requires licensing, contact the college's Inventions, Copyrightable Materials, and Intellectual Property Committee.
    • L. Any material submitted to the WNC Library for addition to the book or audiovisual collections, the reserve collection, or the electronic reserves collection must be copyright compliant. The library staff will determine if the material submitted meet those requirements. If the material is not copyright compliant, the library staff will attempt to get copyright clearance for the material.
  • Section 3: Obtaining Copyright Clearance
    • A. Students who have concerns regarding copyright compliance on a class assignment should consult the faculty member who is teaching the course.
    • B. If faculty or staff are uncertain about the legality of reproducing copyrighted material, they should consult the Inventions, Copyrightable Materials, and Intellectual Property Committee.
    • C. The Inventions, Copyrightable Materials, and Intellectual Property Committee will, after reviewing the submitted material in question, determine if it is copyright compliant. If necessary, WNC will request the rights to use the copyrighted material from the copyright holder, the Copyright Clearance Center, or another copyright licensing organization.
    • D. Any fees charged to obtain the permission to use the copyrighted material will be paid by the department or division that requested permission for the use of the material.
    • E. Faculty or staff members who have questions about showing a movie on campus should consult the Inventions, Copyrightable Materials, and Intellectual Property Committee.
    • F. Student clubs and organizations that want to show a movie on campus should consult the Office of Student Life.
  • Section 4: Institutional Plan
    • A. Pursuant to 34 CFR 668.14(b)(30), WNC has adopted the use of one or more technology-based deterrents to combat the unauthorized distribution of copyrighted material by users of the institution's network without unduly interfering with the educational and research use of the network.
    • B. WNC has established mechanisms through this and other policies for educating and informing the campus community about appropriate versus inappropriate use of copyrighted material.
    • C. WNC has procedures for the handling of unauthorized distribution of copyrighted material, including disciplinary procedures.
    • D. WNC will periodically review the effectiveness of this plan to combat the unauthorized distribution of copyrighted material by users of the institution's network using relevant assessment criteria.
  • Section 5: Regulations and Resources
    • A. Final HEOA Regulations Issued October 29, 2009

      668.14 Program participation agreement.

      (b) By entering into a program participation agreement, an institution agrees that--

      (30) The institution--

      (i) Has developed and implemented written plans to effectively combat the unauthorized distribution of copyrighted material by users of the institution's network, without unduly interfering with educational and research use of the network, that include--

      (A) The use of one or more technology-based deterrents;

      (B) Mechanisms for educating and informing its community about appropriate versus inappropriate use of copyrighted material, including that described in 668.43(a)(10);

      (C) Procedures for handling unauthorized distribution of copyrighted material, including disciplinary procedures; and

      (D) Procedures for periodically reviewing the effectiveness of the plans to combat the unauthorized distribution of copyrighted materials by users of the institution's network using relevant assessment criteria. No particular technology measures are favored or required for inclusion in an institution's plans, and each institution retains the authority to determine what its particular plans for compliance with paragraph (b)(30) of this section will be, including those that prohibit content monitoring; and

      (ii) Will, in consultation with the chief technology officer or other designated officer of the institution--

      (A) Periodically review the legal alternatives for downloading or otherwise acquiring copyrighted material;

      (B) Make available the results of the review in paragraph (b)(30)(ii)(A) of this section to its students through a Web site or other means; and

      (C) To the extent practicable, offer legal alternatives for downloading or otherwise acquiring copyrighted material, as determined by the institution.

      668.43 Institutional information.

      (a) Institutional information that the institution must make readily available upon request to enrolled and prospective students under this subpart includes, but is not limited to--

      (10) Institutional policies and sanctions related to copyright infringement, including--

      (i) A statement that explicitly informs its students that unauthorized distribution of copyrighted material, including unauthorized peer-to-peer file sharing, may subject the students to civil and criminal liabilities;

      (ii) A summary of the penalties for violation of Federal copyright laws; and

      (iii) A description of the institution's policies with respect to unauthorized peer-to-peer file sharing, including disciplinary actions that are taken against students who engage in illegal downloading or unauthorized distribution of copyrighted materials using the institution's information technology system


      Selected Clarifying Text from NPRM Preamble Issued August 21, 2009

      "The Department believes that some institutions may be able to effectively combat the unauthorized distribution of copyrighted material using only one of the four types of technology-based deterrents (bandwidth shaping, traffic monitoring, accepting and responding to DMCA notices, or a commercial product designed to reduce or block illegal file sharing) while others may need to employ a combination of such deterrents." (74 FR 42393, emphasis added)

      "[T]he Department anticipates that individual institutions, national associations, and commercial entities will develop and maintain up-to-date lists that may be referenced for compliance with this provision [to offer legal alternatives]." (74 FR 42393)

      "The Department will work with representatives of copyright holders and institutions to develop a summary of the civil and criminal penalties for violation of Federal copyright laws to include as part of the Federal Student Aid Handbook that an institution may use to meet this requirement [to provide such information to students]." (74 FR 42392)


      Selected EDUCAUSE Resources

      http://www.educause.edu/HEOA

      http://www.educause.edu/Resources/Browse/LegalDownloading/33381

      http://www.educause.edu/blog/sworona/189008
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted September 2, 2008 Dates Revised January 18, 2011
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-2-8.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-2-9: Online and Web-enhanced Course Compliance with Section 508 Web Standards/Accessible Technology

WNC Policy 3-2-9
Procedure: Online and Web-enhanced Course Compliance with Section 508 Web Standards/Accessible Technology
Policy No.: 3-2-9
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs
Policy:

It shall be the policy of Western Nevada College to observe and adhere to the provisions of Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 and the standards established pursuant to Section 508. Western Nevada College hereby adopts these standards as WNC Policy 3-2-9.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted May 3, 2011 Dates Revised

Section 508 Standards Guide 1194.21, 1194.22, 1194.24, 1194.31

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-2-9.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-2-10: WNC Textbook Policy

WNC Policy 3-2-10
Procedure: WNC Textbook Policy
Policy No.: 3-2-10
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Vice President of Academic & Student Affairs
Policy:

According to the NSHE Board of Regents' Code Title 4, Chapter 14, Section 26, "each NSHE institution shall develop an approved statement of professional and ethical guidelines relative to the selection of textbooks or other instructional materials. Such guidelines shall address relationships with publishers or other providers, selection of one’s authored text for instructional use, and shall address the desirability of minimizing costs to students when this can be accomplished without compromising academic standards and academic freedom."

  • Section 1: Textbook Selection
    • A. Each full-time faculty member will select the title and number of required textbooks and supplements used in each of his/her course offerings within the time frame and procedures established by his/her department.
      • 1. Each department/discipline will have the option of determining the titles and number of required and supplementary textbooks for adjuncts, last-minute faculty hires, and for faculty who have not submitted an adoption by the deadline.
      • 2. Decisions related to standardization will be made at the department/discipline level with respect paid to faculty rights under academic freedom.
      • 3. If a department/discipline committee is designated to select standard textbooks and/or supplements faculty members who are authors of materials being considered or who are related to an author as defined by the WNC nepotism policy may not serve on the committee.
  • Section 2: Disputes
    • A. Any dispute between a faculty member and the department head over textbook adoption will be resolved by the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs.
  • Section 3: Procedure
    • A. Instructors
      • 1. Will select textbooks that are appropriate for the course of record.
      • 2. Instructors should:
        • a. Take student cost into consideration when selecting from among different textbook/supplement options.
        • b. Make an effort to use the same textbook/supplements for at least two years.
        • c. Consider using the approved learning management system to deliver material electronically in compliance with fair use and copyright laws.
        • d. Coordinate selections with the bookstore to ensure availability and options such as rental texts.
    • B. Departments
      • 1. Should attempt to provide copies of faculty textbooks/supplements to the campus library where each class is taught to be placed on reserve for student use.
      • 2. Should attempt to provide copies of Distance Education faculty textbooks/supplements to the campus library to be placed on reserve for student use.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted February 11, 2014 Dates Revised
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-2-10.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-3-1: Cooperative Work Experience

WNC Policy 3-3-1
Procedure: Cooperative Work Experience
Policy No.: 3-3-1
Department: Instruction
Contact: Division Chair
Policy:

Cooperative work experience (CWE) is available to students in certain program areas. A maximum of 6 credits may be applied toward a degree program as elective credits. These credits are not transferable to UNR and UNLV. Cooperative work experience courses must have a training agreement form with final rating scores in the college record system.

  • Section 1: Procedures
    • A. When a student enrolls in cooperative work experience, the cooperative work experience coordinator ensures the development of a training agreement for the student. The training agreement states competency based learning objectives. These objectives are developed with input from the work supervisor.
    • B. This agreement is filed in the CWE coordinator's office.
    • C. Upon completion of the course the CWE coordinator ensures completion of the final rating of the competency based learning objectives as well as a final evaluation form addressing work attitudes and behaviors. These written reports specify satisfactory completion of the obligation and activities in the student training agreement.
    • D. These reports are filed with the CWE coordinator.
    • E. Upon completion of the CWE course, a grade sheet is submitted to the appropriate dean's office.
    • F. The grade sheet is forwarded to the admissions office.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2005
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-3-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-3-2: Tech Prep

WNC Policy 3-3-2
Procedure: Tech Prep
Policy No.: 3-3-2
Department: Instruction
Contact: Academic Director
Policy:

The following policy outlines procedures for articulation and processing comparable course work between WNC and secondary institutions in WNC's service area. The type of articulation, 2+2 articulation, enables qualified high school students to earn college credit for successfully completing articulated high school classes.

  • Section 1: Articulation
    • A. The WNC administration, faculty, the Tech Prep Coordinator and Tech Prep Consortium will identify occupational, vocational and high technology areas of study for articulation.
    • B. The WNC faculty member and high school teacher will exchange curricula, course and competency requirements for any course to be articulated.
  • Section 2: Articulation Agreements
    The validation process for articulation agreements will be:
    • A. The high school instructor will submit the following:
      • 1. Course outline
      • 2. Course objectives/competencies/outcomes
      • 3. Methods of instruction/strategies
        • a. Student evaluation process - procedures for measuring competencies and outcomes
        • b. Instructional materials
    • B. The WNC faculty member will compare competencies from the high school curriculum to the college course competencies. If the WNC faculty member determines that the competencies are equivalent, the articulation agreement will be written.
    • C. Articulated courses must be reviewed and renewed or terminated every three years.
    • D. Articulation agreements will obtain the following signatures:
      • 1. WNC faculty member from the program area articulated
      • 2. High school teacher from the program area articulated
      • 3. Tech Prep Coordinator
      • 4. High school principal
      • 5. Academic Director from the program area articulated
      • 6. Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs or Dean of Instruction
  • Section 3: Recruitment of Students
    • A. The WNC Tech Prep Coordinator will actively recruit eligible students.
    • B. The Tech Prep Coordinator will function as the liaison between WNC faculty and staff, high school faculty and staff, and the Department of Education, State of Nevada.
    • C. WNC staff will assist interested students in the completion of required documents for admission to the Tech Prep Program and WNC.
    • D. The Tech Program will maintain records on each student and will provide copies of records to Admissions and Records when a student enrolls at WNC.
  • Section 4: Credit for Classes
    • A. In order for a student to receive credit for classes that have been formally articulated, the following process must be followed:
      • 1. The student must pass each articulated course/class with a grade of 'B' or higher.
      • 2. Tech Prep staff will collect high school transcripts at the end of each course/class for all registered Tech Prep students in each articulated class.
      • 3. Grades will be transcripted at WNC when the qualifying high school student successfully completes an articulated class.
    • B. Students may complete up to 21 WNC credits through the Tech Prep program, or no more than 50% of a WNC program (which ever number is lower).
    • C. Students will receive the same grade for the WNC course as they did for the articulated high school tech prep class.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised June 19, 2013; September 7, 2010; September 2, 2008; September 27, 2004; May 11, 2004; August 26, 2003
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

NSHE Board of Regents' Meeting Minutes: 12/03

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-3-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-3-3: Individualized Course

WNC Policy 3-3-3
Procedure: Individualized Course
Policy No.: 3-3-3
Department: Instruction
Contact: Dean of Instruction
Policy:

Individualized instruction and/or independent study is available to students in certain program areas. A maximum of 6 credits may be applied toward a degree program. These credits are not transferable. Individualized course must have a student completion document in the college record system.

  • Section 1: Enrollment Agreement
    • A. When a student enrolls in an individualized course, the instructor responsible for evaluation must develop a written agreement with the student, specifying course objectives and activities to be completed.
    • B. This agreement is to be filed with the appropriate Dean.
  • Section 2: Evaluation Report
    • A. Upon completion of the course, the instructor responsible for the evaluation, must complete a written report specifying satisfactory completion of the obligation and activities in the student course agreement.
    • B. This evaluation report is to filed with the appropriate Dean
    • C. Upon completion of the individualized study, a standard grade sheet is to be completed and submitted to the admissions office.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted January 15, 1993 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-3-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-3-4: Laboratory Protocol in the Sciences

WNC Policy 3-3-4
Procedure: Laboratory Protocol in the Sciences
Policy No.: 3-3-4
Department: Instruction
Contact: Academic Director of Science, Mathematics & Engineering
Policy:

The following is a list of protocols that faculty, both full-time and part-time, should exercise when teaching and working in laboratories at WNC. This list is developed by the current full-time faculty members of the division and includes all courses in biology, chemistry, clinical lab technician program, geology, and physics where labs are taught.

  • Section 1: Protocol Development
    • A. This list of protocols is developed by the current full-time faculty members of the Science Math and Engineering Division.
    • B. This list includes all courses in biology, chemistry, clinical lab technician program, geology, and physics where labs are taught.
  • Section 2: Laboratory Instructor Responsibilities
    • A. Students MUST be supervised at all times during laboratory by the instructor.
    • B. The responsibility of cleaning up after a laboratory exercise is ultimately the responsibility of the lab instructor whether or not students have been asked to clean up.
    • C. Biological materials, waste, and chemicals to be discarded from the laboratory require that the lab instructor make a written request (Work Order) of the Building and Grounds staff at the specific campus. These materials should be confined in an appropriate manner and properly identified with respect to contents such that they are suitable for pick-up by the WNC Building and Grounds staff for disposal under current local and federal guidelines.
    • D. It shall be a common courtesy that any equipment or materials removed from one lab and transported to another lab be done only after consulting with fellow faculty members in that area, and insuring that all materials and equipment are returned promptly to the lab from which they were taken.
    • E. An unencumbered phone line should be available to the lab instructor at all times during lab hours in case of an emergency with paramedic, fire and police numbers clearly posted by the phone.
    • F. The lab instructor should be sure that safety equipment is available and ready to use in an emergency in each lab. Contact the immediate supervisor (Dean on the Carson Campus, Executive Dean on the Fallon Campus) if the equipment is not present or properly working.
    • G. In the event of an accident, regardless of how minor, the lab instructor MUST file an accident report on appropriate form (see page -- State of Nevada Personal Injury and Property Loss/Damage Report) the same day and submit it to the line supervisor who is "in charge" at that particular moment.
    • H. The lab instructor of a particular course should, when purchasing items for use in the lab, consult with fellow faculty members in your subject area (eg., biology or chemistry) that may be using the same account to insure a fair share use of the funds available. All purchases are subject to PRIOR approval of the supervisor or individual who has signature authority over the account.
    • I. The lab instructor shall establish safety guidelines at the initial meeting with their students and will be responsible for insuring such guidelines are unambiguously enforced.
    • J. The lab instructor shall demonstrate the use of emergency equipment at the initial meeting.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised June 19, 2013; September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-3-4.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-3-5: Challenge Examinations

WNC Policy 3-3-5
Procedure: Challenge Examinations
Policy No.: 3-3-5
Department: Instruction
Contact: Division Chair
Policy:

The College recognizes that students accumulate a great deal of information outside the classroom without formal instruction. There are times when this information may be extensive enough to satisfy the requirements of courses offered by the College. For this reason, an enrolled student may take challenge examinations in certain courses.

  • Section 1: Rules Relating to the Challenges
    • A. A student interested in these examinations should consult the registrar on the Carson campus or the counselor on the Fallon and Douglas campus.
    • B. Courses cannot be challenged if a student has taken an advanced course in the same area. Students who are part of an advanced placement program cannot challenge lower-level courses.
    • C. Challenge examinations are not considered resident credit.
    • D. Challenge examinations do not count as part of a student's credit load for any given semester nor are they computed into the grade point average.
    • E. A student may not retake a challenge examination.
    • F. A student may not challenge a course that has been previously attempted in classroom instruction.
    • G. Challenge examinations are not transferable and, in many cases, will not count for licensing agencies.
  • Section 2: Transcript Grade
    • A. Successful challenge examinations are posted as a "pass" on the student's transcript.
  • Section 3: Denial
    • A. WNC reserves the right to deny any petition for credit by examination.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

NSHE Board of Regent' Meeting Minutes: 11/84; 8/86; 12/02

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-3-5.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-3-6: Grade Change

WNC Policy 3-3-6
Procedure: Grade Change
Policy No.: 3-3-6
Department: Instruction
Contact: Academic Director
Policy:

After final grades have been submitted to Admissions and Records, a grade may be changed only to correct a clerical or other instructor error (except to change an incomplete grade).

  • Section 1: Grade Change Form
    • A. Changes may be made by filing a grade change form, approved by the Academic Director. Changes to an incomplete grade do not require approval.
    • B. Grade change forms may not be used to change a passing grade to a "W."
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted September 1, 1992 Dates Revised June 19, 2013; April 8, 2010; September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-3-6.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-3-7: Instructor Approval on Late Student Registration

WNC Policy 3-3-7
Procedure: Instructor Approval on Late Student Registration
Policy No.: 3-3-7
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Dean of Instruction
Policy:

Instructor approval is required for class enrollment in a full term course after the first week of instruction for a course. A full term course is defined as any class that meets for 16 weeks during the spring and fall semesters or 8 weeks for the summer semester.

Instructor approval is also required after the first instructional day of a short-term course, and after the sixth week of the semester for an open-entry class.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted March 29, 2005 Dates Revised September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-3-7.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-3-8: Full-time Enrollment Equivalency for Students with Disabilities

WNC Policy 3-3-8
Procedure: Full-time Enrollment Equivalency for Students with Disabilities
Policy No.: 3-3-8
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Dean of Instruction
Policy:

All students with disabilities are eligible to apply for full-time enrollment equivalency status, which if approved, allows them to take a reduced course load while maintaining full-time status (no less than six (6) credits). The approval of a reduced course load with full-time status is not a permanent status; students are not automatically eligible for this accommodation each semester. The request must be submitted and evaluated each semester to determine the impact of the student's disability in terms of the demands of his/her proposed course schedule.

  • Section 1: Guidelines and Procedure
    • A. Requests for full-time enrollment equivalency are submitted to the coordinator for Disability Support Services along with supporting documentation. Documentation must include a diagnostic evaluation from an appropriate professional (i.e., medical doctor, psychiatrist, psychologist, audiologist, physiatrist, or other qualified professional), which is recent enough (no more than 3-5 years for learning disabilities, 3 years for ADD/ADHD and 6 months for psychiatric/psychological disorders) to evaluate the current impact of the disability.
    • B. The coordinator evaluates the documentation and the request in terms of the impact of the disability and the demands of the student's current or proposed schedule and any recommendations or concerns on the part of any department.
    • C. If the request is denied, the student may appeal the coordinator's decision through the standard accommodation grievance procedures.
    • D. If approved, the coordinator of Disability Support will submit a recommendation for full-time enrollment equivalency along with complete documentation to the dean of Student Services for final action.
    • E. Students awarded full-time enrollment equivalencies who have been awarded a scholarship may continue to receive funding with the approval of the donor.
    • F. Approval of full-time enrollment equivalency may result in adjusted Federal financial aid package in accordance with regulations. If aid has been disbursed prior to the reduced course load approval, consultation between the coordinator of Disability Support Services and the director of Financial Aid will determine whether or not a credit deficiency exists.
    • G. A decision to allow the student to be designated "full-time" with less than the standard full-time load shall allow the student all benefits and privileges assigned to "full-time" students at the institution, including but not limited to eligibility for Dean's List, participation in extracurricular activities, athletics (subject to approval of NJCAA or NIRA), and verification of student status for insurance purposes.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted November 15, 2005 Dates Revised September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-3-8.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-3-9: Community Education Program

WNC Policy 3-3-9
Procedure: Community Education Program
Policy No.: 3-3-9
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs
Policy:

In accordance with the funding structure for community colleges as determined by the Legislature and the NSHE Board of Regents, the community education program must be self-supporting, separate, and will not compete with state funded instruction.

  • Section 1: Background
    • A. The community education program is a component of the WNC mission as it is with most community colleges. It has been the experience here and at other colleges that a viable community education program actually has the effect of enhancing and encouraging enrollment in regular courses.
    • B. Since the WNC Community Education Program has rapidly expanded from limited offerings in 1985 to a major component of the college operation, these policies and procedures document the relationship between community education and state funded courses and programs.
    • C. The goal of life-long learning is essential to the development of our community and therefore a goal of the comprehensive community college.
  • Section 2: Program Purposes
    • A. Within the context of WNC as a comprehensive community college, the community education program provides:
      • 1. Courses and workshops that respond to community cultural and recreational needs.
      • 2. Courses and workshops that develop and improve personal and job skills and respond to life-long learning.
      • 3. Activities that enhance the quality of life.
    • B. This purpose can be served by a variety of program formats and is characterized by a quick response system to the needs of the community. They are as follows:
      • 1. Noncredit courses/community education credit courses
      • 2. Noncredit workshops/community education credit workshops
      • 3. Seminars
      • 4. Performances
      • 5. Exhibitions
      • 6. Tours
      • 7. Lectures
  • Section 3: Procedures
    • A. An annual estimated budget will be established for the community education program.
    • B. Instructors will be selected and compensated in accordance with the current personnel policy established for community education instructors.
    • C. Program services can be provided by contracting with public/private agencies and entities.
    • D. Only courses offered for community education credit require regular college registration.
    • E. Noncredit activities and courses will have a registration process that is separate from the regular college registration.
    • F. Community education course/workshop numbers and titles will not duplicate regular state course titles and numbers.
    • G. All revenues and expenditures are accounted for in accordance with Nevada System of Higher Education and WNC business office procedures.
    • H. All instructional activities that are less than 15 hours will be noncredit and classified as workshops.
    • I. Instructors for credit community education classes will be hired using the same criteria outlined in the Western Nevada College Staff Information Handbook.
    • J. Courses listed in the Master Course File take precedence over community education courses not only in number and title but also in content and description.
    • K. Information regarding proposed community education courses is to be sent to the appropriate dean and department chair(s).
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 7, 2010; September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
NRS Code NRS 277.080, NRS 277.280

NSHE Board of Regents' Meeting Minutes 11/82; 11/90; 6/85; 6/91; 9/94; 9/99; 10/02; 12/02
WNC Business Office Procedures
WNC Staff Information Handbook

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-3-9.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-3-10: Student Withdrawal Policy

WNC Policy 3-3-10
Procedure: Student Withdrawal Policy
Policy No.: 3-3-10
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs
Policy:

For classes that meet four weeks or longer, a student initiated withdrawal must be completed by the date that 60% of the instruction has occurred.

For classes that meet less than four weeks, a student initiated withdrawal must be completed by the day before the first class meeting

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted February 22, 2012 Dates Revised March 8, 2012; February 23, 2012
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-3-10.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-3-11: Distance Education Online Policy

WNC Policy 3-3-11
Procedure: Distance Education Online Policy
Policy No.: 3-3-11
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs
Policy:

Distance Education Online Policy

  • Section 1: Introduction
    • A. NSHE Code: Definition of Distance Education (Section 11)
      • 1. The term “distance education” means a formal educational process in which the majority of the instruction occurs when the student and instructor are separated by geographic distance or time. Instruction may be synchronous or asynchronous. Distance education may employ correspondence study, audio, or other electronically mediated technologies.
    • B. Western Nevada College offers online courses in a learning centered environment that fulfill the same objectives, meet the same outcomes, and are assessed with the same rigor as traditional courses. Just as traditional courses observe standards appropriate to that mode, online courses observe the guidelines and standards defined in this document.
    • C. All WNC courses will adhere to current WNC policies and bylaws, and to all NSHE requirements.
    • D. Definitions
      • 1. Online Course - An online course provides all instruction in an asynchronous manner and has limited or no regular on-campus schedule, with the exception of proctored assignments when applicable. Synchronous chat room activities may be used when appropriate.
      • 2. Web-Enhanced Course - A web-enhanced course shall have flexible learning formats to enhance student learning. It shall include an in-class component, but the format may differ from a traditional course by using flexible class meeting times, online components, and/or other delivery modalities (such as video, interactive video, cable media, other).
      • 3. Traditional Course - A traditional course conducts all class sessions on campus in a synchronous manner. Traditional courses may use Web resources such as class notes, quizzes, and other class resources. Web assignments for traditional courses may be asynchronous. Students enrolled in traditional courses with important or required web components may access any online course components through WNC computer labs.
  • Section 2: Faculty Training
    • A. All Faculty teaching web or web enhanced courses for the first time are required to attend training prior to teaching their first session of that class in the accepted LMS used by WNC. The Distance Education (DE) Coordinator will notify the Distance Education Committee and the Academic Director of instructors who have met the training requirements.
    • B. Academic Director will complete LMS training.
    • C. The institution provides appropriate training and the opportunity for exposure to new and innovative technologies, tools and software for enhancing access and learning.
    • D. The instructor ensures approval and/or copyright permissions and clearance for all multimedia that will be used in their courses.
    • E. Western Nevada copyright policy must be followed: (http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-2-8.php)
  • Section 3: Course Development
    • A. Approval for a new web course must be obtained from the Academic Director.
    • B. Refer to course development procedure (To Be Developed)
  • Section 4: Course Delivery
    • A. All online and web enhanced courses must be delivered in the accepted WNC LMS.
    • B. All web classes with content must be complete two weeks prior the semester in which it is to be taught.
    • C. All courses will be available by 8:00 AM on the first day of instruction.
    • D. Faculty will login to all web classes a minimum of three times weekly, evenly spaced to ensure proper student/instructor interaction.
    • E. Faculty will respond to student communications within 48 hours except during weekends and holidays (this should be stated in the syllabus).
    • F. Faculty will return graded assignments in a timely manner, consistent with the nature of the assignment and the general guidelines for reviewing the assignments posted in the course.
    • G. Online Course Proctoring
      • 1. Online course proctoring insures equal access for all students.
        • a. Students who are participating in an online course are allowed to complete proctored exams at any college-approved proctoring site.
        • b. Approved sites may include schools, libraries, colleges and organizations actively engaged in learning and proctoring capability.
        • c. Students have the responsibility of procuring an acceptable proctoring site and communicating this information to the course instructors.
        • d. Online course instructors will facilitate the completion of the proctored exam. This could include several process steps.
          1. Contacting the test proctor.
          2. Transmitting the testing materials to the proctoring site.
          3. Informing the proctor of any special handling instructions.
        • e. Students will be required to provide proper identification when they attend the proctoring session. This ID will in the form of a photo ID which could be a driver’s license, State-issued photo ID, military ID, or passport.
        • f. Online proctoring is available and can be set up through the course instructor. Students will be assessed an additional fee for this service.
  • Section 5: Online Peer Course Review
    • A. WNC is a Quality Matters (QM) college.
      • 1. All new on-line courses will be QM reviewed prior to being taught.
      • 2. All courses that are currently taught on-line will be brought up to QM standards as time allows; no longer than five (5) years from the date of this policy going into effect.
      • 3. All QM reviewers will have completed the QM reviewers’ course.
    • B. Online Course Review Process
      • 1. The Distance Education coordinator will facilitate the review process. The DE coordinator will not be a member of the review group.
      • 2. All reviews will be performed by a QM review group, formed from a pool of academic faculty who are certified QM reviewers.
      • 3. If the rating by the QM review group is below QM standard, the QM review group will work with the course instructor to bring the course up to QM standards.
      • 4. Upon completion of the review, the QM review group chair will provide the Academic Director and the DE coordinator with the results of the review.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted April 6, 2012 Dates Revised June 19, 2013
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-3-11.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-3-12: Faculty Assigned Ws

WNC Policy 3-3-12
Procedure: Faculty Assigned Ws
Policy No.: 3-3-12
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs
  • Section 1: Instructors may not issue a grade of W.
    • A. Under extenuating circumstances that occur after the student withdrawal deadline has passed, the student, with the approval of the instructor of record, may petition the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs or the Academic Director to be given a grade of W.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted April 6, 2012 Dates Revised June 19, 2013
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-3-12.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-4-1: Admission, Registration, Grades, and Examinations

WNC Policy 3-4-1
Procedure: Admission, Registration, Grades, and Examinations
Policy No.: 3-4-1
Department: Dean of Student Services Office
Contact: Dean of Student Services
Policy:

Discrimination Prohibited: There shall be no discrimination in the admission of students on account of sex, color, race or creed, or national origin.

  • Section 1: General Admission
    • A. Western Nevada College will admit to its general programs any U.S. citizen, immigrant, or qualified international student who meets the following requirements:
      • 1. is at least 18 years old; or
      • 2. is a high school graduate; or
      • 3. has completed the General Education Development (GED) Test with a 12th grade equivalency.
    • B. All applicants for admission shall complete such tests, furnish such information, and meet such deadlines as required by the regulations published in the admissions section of the catalog governing the semester of initial enrollment.
    • C. Admission to Western Nevada College implies general admission to the college only and does not constitute admission to a specific curriculum or courses which may require additional admission criteria as published in the college catalog governing the semester of initial enrollment.
    • D. Programs designated as limited entry require fulfillment of selective admissions criteria as contained in the institutional catalog and other appropriate college documents. Continuation in selective admissions programs is likewise contingent upon fulfillment of conditions specified by the institution and contained in official institutional documents.
  • Section 2: Admission to Advanced Standing
    • A. The college will accept a maximum of 45 semester credits toward an approved associate degree, with the following limitations:
      • 1. A maximum of 45 semester credits may be accepted from other colleges and universities.
      • 2. A maximum of 30 semester credits may be accepted from credit by examination.
      • 3. A maximum of 15 semester credits may be accepted from non-traditional sources.
    • B. The college may accept a maximum of 15 semester credits of previous training, education, or credit by examination toward a Certificate of Achievement.
    • C. Acceptance of various types of credit will be governed by the College's Transfer Credit Policy.
  • Section 3: Registration
    • A. Registration procedures shall be developed in conjunction with the Instructional Divisions and shall be published by the Office of Student Services.
    • B. Registration is not complete until all fees are paid and all registration materials are filed with the registrar.
    • C. A student whose record indicates a delinquent indebtedness to the college for registration fees will be placed on financial hold for future registration, transcript, or diploma or certificate privileges.
    • D. A student who wishes to enroll for more than 18 semester credits must obtain the approval of a college counselor or instruction center coordinator.
    • E. The college shall have the right to define prerequisites or concurrent enrollment for registration for specific classes.
    • F. Definition of student enrollment status:
      • 1. Full-time student: 12 semester credits or more
      • 2. Three-quarter-time student: 9 - 11 semester credits
      • 3. Half-time student: 6 - 8 semester credits
    • G. A student may drop a course anytime prior to the last day of instruction.
    • H. The registration of a student who is ineligible to attend the college is subject to immediate cancellation.
  • Section 4: Classification of Students
    • A. Freshman: Less than 30 Credit Hours Earned
    • B. Sophomore: 30 or more credit hours earned
  • Section 5: Grades and Examination
    • A. The NSHE grading policy is identified in section titled Grading Policy
    • B. Pass/W - Students may elect to be graded on a Pass/W basis for developmental, community service, and physical education courses.
    • C. Repeat - Students may repeat any course. Only the highest grade is counted as part of their total grade point average. Students may repeat certain courses for additional credit as defined in the college catalog.
    • D. Audit - Students may elect to take any course for an audit grade. No credit and no grade points are earned if an audit grade is elected.
    • E. Final Examinations - The instructor is responsible for the proper evaluation of each enrolled student throughout the instructional period.
    • F. Grade Point Average - The student's grade point average is determined by dividing the total number of grade points earned by the total of semester credit hours attempted, excluding repeated courses and courses in which a grade of P, W, AD, or I was recorded.
    • G. Students must maintain a minimum cumulative grade point average of 2.0 in order to be considered as progressing in a normal fashion toward a degree or certificate.
  • Section 6: Requirements for Graduation
    • A. Each Associate Degree or Certificate of Achievement student is required to satisfy his/her program requirements. In addition, the United States and Nevada Constitution requirements must be fulfilled for the Associate Degree.
    • B. A student may select either the catalog year under which he/she initially enrolls or the year under which he/she will complete the curriculum requirements for an Associate Degree or a Certificate of Achievement. If a degree is offered for the first time after a student has enrolled, the student may choose the catalog year in which the degree or major was first offered. In no case may students use a catalog which is more than six years old at the time of graduation.
    • C. A student must have a minimum cumulative grade point average of 2.0.
    • D. A student must complete a minimum of 15 semester credit hours within the college.
    • E. The required minimum number of semester hours for the Associate in Arts, Associate in Applied Science, and the Associate in General Studies degrees is 60, and for the Certificate of Achievement is 30.
    • F. A student must not have a financial or library obligation toward Western Nevada College.
    • G. A student must formally apply for graduation according to the procedures publicized in the college catalog.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted January 24, 1995 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004

NSHE Board of Regents' Meeting Minutes: 1980; 1981; 1982; 1983; 1984; 1986; 1993

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-4-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-4-2: Campus Plan For Admission, Recruitment, and Retention of Minority Students

WNC Policy 3-4-2
Procedure: Campus Plan For Admission, Recruitment, and Retention of Minority Students
Policy No.: 3-4-2
Department: Dean of Student Services Office
Contact: Dean of Student Services
Policy:

Western Nevada College will continue to offer an open door to all students, regardless of race or color, while reaffirming to minority students the promise of social integration, empowerment, and increased quality of life through education.

  • Section 1: Background Information
    • A. As a part of the Nevada System of Higher Education, Western Nevada College provides access to quality comprehensive educational opportunities to residents in its service area. Based on this premise, and in response to the charge by the Board of Regents, the president, faculty and staff are prepared to make a commitment to a campus plan on minority admissions, recruitment, and retention on behalf of Western Nevada College. This plan, comprehensive in nature, will be supported by the college at large.
    • B. The college recognizes the urgent need to increase the participation of minority populations in higher education to serve the current and future needs of our state and nation. Inherent in this need is the necessity of the college to do more than just enroll more minority students. It is imperative to assure that students can successfully complete their course of study. Western Nevada College will view this task as a continually evolving process.
    • C. It would be unrealistic for the college to strive to recruit and admit large number of minorities, as its service area has limited numbers of minority residents. Therefore, the plan will focus on the advocacy of affirmative action.
  • Section 2: Campus Minority Plan
    • A. The Campus Minority Plan will be directed toward three areas:
      • 1. the students served, in relation to recruitment, admission, and retention;
      • 2. the currently employed faculty, administration, and staff; and
      • 3. recruitment of minority faculty and staff.
    • B. Recruitment, Admission, and Retention
      • 1. Although the college is cognizant of the needs of all minority groups, the bulk of minorities residing within its service area are Hispanics and Native Americans. Therefore, strategies for recruitment of students will be directed toward Hispanics and Native Americans.
        • a. The predominant vehicle for increasing the enrollment of Hispanics is English as a second language.
        • b. A top priority in the use of state funding is the creation of a staff position to serve as a liaison between the college and representatives from Native American tribes in the local communities.
        • c. The college counseling staff will continue to work closely with Native American organizations.
      • 2. Further efforts to enhance minority outreach include increasing awareness of the college in the community through current working relationships with high schools and four-year institutions, as outlined in the college's goals.
        • a. Marketing efforts will continue to be expanded throughout the college's service area.
        • b. The JOIN and Single Parent programs currently enroll many minority students in the college. This trend is anticipated to continue.
      • 3. Recognizing that the most critical barrier to minorities is higher education is lack of preparation, Western Nevada College will seek additional resources for tutorial assistance and special instruction materials to assist minority students.
        • a. Carson campus and the Fallon campus, providing tutorial assistance in math, English, study skills, etc.
        • b. The college assessment program is presently being revised and currently the college operates academic skills centers at the expanded to ensure student success by placing students in courses that are appropriate for their abilities.
      • 4. Plans for a minority student scholarship are presently in progress. Grants, scholarships and college work-study will be strongly encouraged, while loans will be discouraged.
        • a. Further support services include orientation sessions and the establishment of a Spanish language registration form.
        • b. The college is considering hiring bilingual aids during registration to provide an early positive experience for Hispanic Students.
    • C. Faculty, Administration, and Staff
      • 1. A critical element in the retention of minority students is the attitude of the faculty, staff and administration toward minorities. These individuals have a predominant role in providing a positive academic experience for students.
      • 2. Each employee of the college will be expected to assume a wider, more intense role in adding minority students' adjustment to college. All will have the responsibility of becoming familiar with the campus minority plan, and will be asked to evaluate their attitudes toward minority students.
      • 3. A workshop will address these issues and will strive to increase awareness and sensitivity to the diverse cultures, values, and needs of minority students.
    • D. Minority Faculty and Staff
      • 1. To further enrich the minority student experience, the college is prepared to actively recruit, employ and retain qualified minority faculty and staff. The affirmative action officer will increase efforts to attract qualified minority candidates. Minority faculty and staff will provide role models and mentors for minority students, thereby increasing the existing campus support systems. This would visually reaffirm the college's commitment and support for minority participation in higher education at Western Nevada College.
      • 2. A committee will be established to implement and evaluate the campus minority plan. The committee will include the affirmative action officer, the current WNC members of the NSHE Minority Task Force, and a representative from the faculty, staff, administration, students, campus development program, and the community. A strong effort will be made to locate a minority student to serve on this committee.
  • Section 3: Evaluation and Reporting
    • A. Several methods will be used to evaluate the college's endeavors in implementing this campus plan.
      • 1. Periodic comparisons will be made between the college's and the community's minority populations, and between the college's minority and total student population. This information will determine any gains in minority matriculation
      • 2. An ongoing dialogue will occur between representatives from other NSHE colleges through the existing NSHE Minority Task Force.
      • 3. The WNC minority committee will periodically review the strengths and weaknesses of the campus plan, and will assess the college's progress toward minority admissions, recruitment, and retention.
      • 4. The committee will provide annual feedback and propose recommendations regarding the plan to the college president.
    • B. The report from the Commission on the Future of Community Colleges stresses the obligation of community colleges to serve a diversity of students and increase efforts to serve minority groups.
    • C. Western Nevada College declares and reaffirms with pride and conviction its commitment to a goal of equality of opportunity and in serving all racial and ethnic groups.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted March 26, 1990 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-4-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-4-3: Even Exchange of Courses

WNC Policy 3-4-3
Procedure: Even Exchange of Courses
Policy No.: 3-4-3
Department: Dean of Student Services Office
Contact: Dean of Student Services
Policy:

It is the policy of WNC to allow for even exchanges of courses under certain conditions.

  • Section 1: Drop a Course
    • A. Students who drop a course or courses with less than a 100 percent refund, may, upon their request, be allowed to apply the total amount of all courses dropped to the courses added without late fees.
  • Section 2: Drop/Add Periods
    • A. This exchange of refund is only applicable during the advertised drop/add periods.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted April 1, 1998 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

NSHE Board of Regents' Meeting Minutes: 3/86; 2/92; 5/93; 12/93; 12/95; 1/00; 6/02;

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-4-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-4-4: Student Conduct

WNC Policy 3-4-4
Procedure: Student Conduct
Policy No.: 3-4-4
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Dean of Student Services

Rationale

Human beings grow and mature in communities. Living in a community requires depending upon the knowledge, integrity, and decency of others. In turn, the best communities help individuals form habits and values that enable them to achieve the highest personal satisfaction, including the satisfaction associated with helping to make a better world. Western Nevada College, a community comprised of students, faculty, staff and administrators, recognizes the need to establish policies and procedures to guide student actions and defines the penalties that are imposed when these rules and regulations are violated. The rules enforced by the college are designed to protect individual liberties, and other values stated in the college's Mission and Goals, especially the commitment to "personal growth and development, achieving their educational goals, advancing in their careers, and coping with the technical and social changes in our global society."

It is the policy of Western Nevada College to ensure that the rights of an individual guaranteed by state laws and the U.S. Constitution are protected for all members of the community regardless of their gender, race, color, ethnicity, sexual preference, or religion. When such rights are infringed upon by violence, threats, or other harassment, the college will use every necessary resource to rapidly and decisively identify perpetrators for criminal and/or administrative prosecution in accordance with the WNC polices and the Board of Regents' policies.

  • Section 1: Authority for Student Discipline
    • A. Ultimate authority for student discipline is vested in the NSHE Board of Regents that charges the president of WNC with responsibility of establishing and enforcing rules and regulations outlined in the NSHE Policies. At WNC, disciplinary authority is delegated to the dean of student services as set forth in these policies and procedures, and in other appropriate policies, rules, or regulations adopted by the Board. The president appoints the dean of student services to serve as an administrative officer, and delegates other duties by the president as set forth herein.
    • B. The college reserves the right to take necessary and appropriate action to protect the safety and well being of the campus community. Such action may include pursuing disciplinary action for any act prohibited by local, state or federal law that occurs on system premises or at a system sponsored on or off such premises. In addition, misconduct, as defined and established in the NSHE Code, title 2, chapter 6 (6.2.2), is as follows:
      • 1. Commission of any act interfering with academic freedom
      • 2. Use of, or threat to use, force or violence against any member or guest of the system community, except when lawfully permitted
      • 3. Interference by force, threat or duress with the lawful freedom of movement of persons or vehicles on the premises of the system
      • 4. Intentional disruption or unauthorized interruption of the functions of the system, including but not limited to classes, convocations, lectures, meetings, recruiting interviews and social events, on or off premises of the system
      • 5. Willful damage, destruction, defacement, theft, or misappropriation of equipment or property belonging to, in the possession of or on premises occupied by the system
      • 6. Knowing possession on any premises of the system of any firearms, explosives, dangerous chemicals or other dangerous weapons as defined by the laws of the State of Nevada, without the written authorization of the president of any system institution or the president's authorized agent, unless such possession reasonably relates to duly recognized system functions by appropriate members of the faculty, other employees or students
      • 7. Continued occupation of buildings, structures, grounds or premises belonging to, or occupied by, the system after having been ordered to leave by the president of a System institution or the president's designee
      • 8. Forgery, alteration, falsification or destruction of system documents or furnishing false information in documents submitted to the system
      • 9. Making an accusation, which is intentionally false or is made with reckless disregard for the truth against any member of the system community by filing a complaint or charges under this code or under any applicable established grievance procedures in the system
      • 10. Repeated use of obscene or abusive language in a classroom or public meeting of the system where such usage is beyond the bounds of generally accepted good taste and which, if occurring in a class, is not significantly related to the teaching of the subject matter
      • 11. Willful incitement of persons to commit any of the acts herein prohibited
      • 12. Disorderly, lewd, or indecent conduct occurring on system premises or at a system sponsored function on or off such premises
      • 13. Any act prohibited by local, state, or federal law that occurs on system premises or at a system sponsored function on or off such premises
      • 14. Use of threats of violence against a faculty member or the faculty member's family in order to secure preferential treatment for grades, loans, employment or other service or privilege accorded by the system
      • 15. Any act of unlawful discrimination based on race, creed, color, sex, age, handicap or national origin. (referred to affirmative action officer)
      • 16. Any act of sexual harassment when submission to a request or demand of a sexual nature is either an explicit or implicit term or condition of employment or of academic grading, or where verbal or physical conduct of sexual nature has the effect of creating an intimidating, offensive or hostile work or classroom environment. (referred to the affirmative action officer)
      • 17. Acts of academic dishonesty, including but not limited to cheating, plagiarism, falsifying research data or results, or assisting others to do the same
      • 18. Willfully destroying, damaging, tampering with, altering stealing, misappropriating or using without permission any system program or file of the Nevada System of Higher Education.
      • 19. Acts of hazing, which are defined as any method of initiation into or affiliation with the university or community college community, a student organization, a sports team, an academic association, or other group engaged in by an individual that intentionally or recklessly endangers another individual
      • 20. Any conduct, which violates applicable stated prohibitions, policies, procedures, rules, regulations, or bylaws of the Board of Regents or a system institution
    • C. Students will be informed of the Student Conduct Policies and Procedures through a variety of communication vehicles including the College's website, student handbook, and/or electronic and written media as appropriate.
  • Section 2: Standards Governing the Conduct of Students
    • A. The college expects its students to act with integrity. Dishonesty, fraud, and failure to respect the rights of others will not be tolerated in a community that is dedicated to the development of responsible individuals.
    • B. The Student Conduct Policies and Procedures prescribe standards for the conduct of students on and off the campus. Many of these regulations are similar to federal and state statutes; therefore, a violation of these student conduct policies may concurrently represent a violation of a civil statute. The college and civil/criminal jurisdictions are considered independent, each based on its separate, distinct needs. Thus, both civil/criminal and college proceedings could result from the same violation. Civil or criminal action before or after college action shall in no way alter the college proceedings or findings, nor provide any right to immunity from college jurisdiction. College authorities shall expedite disciplinary proceedings, recognizing the advantage of a prompt hearing in the event of alleged infractions, while guaranteeing due process.
    • C. The above policy recognizes that college disciplinary jurisdictions may not extend to off-campus activities unless the college sponsors such activities (e.g., athletic event, concerts, etc.) or the off-campus incident or activity has a direct or indirect adverse affect on the college. Alleged infractions taking place off the college campus are left to the courts or other authorities, although college action shall be initiated in cases where individuals are representing the college or where the alleged actions give cause for concern that the presence of certain individuals on campus may endanger the college community. Behavior causing serious personal endangerment, may subject a student to immediately being placed on administrative leave prior to a disciplinary hearing in accordance with Board of Regent's Code, title 2, chapter 6 (6.5.1), and as outlined in the Section III of this Code "Extraordinary Action Pending Judicial Process." A student of another NSHE institution against whom the institution has imposed the disciplinary sanction of suspension or expulsion may not apply for admission to the college and may not enroll in college courses until such time as the student is eligible to take courses at the institution imposing the sanction.
  • Section 3: Extraordinary Action Pending Disciplinary Process/Administrative Leave
    • A. Pending a formal hearing, the President may place a student on administrative leave temporarily from the college if there is a determination that the administrative leave is required to:
      • 1. Protect life, limb or property;
      • 2. Ensure the maintenance of order; or
      • 3. Remove a person from the of Nevada System of Higher Education community when an act of sexual harassment has been alleged against such person and the accuser or the accused person cannot be assigned other duties or classes or placed else in the system institution apart fro each other pending the completion of an investigation and/or disciplinary hearing into the allegation.
    • B. The dean of student services, if acting as an administrative officer, will inform the student in writing, by personal delivery or, if this is not possible, by registered mail to the student's identified place of residence.
    • C. The notice of administrative leave will include charges specifying the violation(s). The matter will be referred in writing to a general hearing officer. The student charged will be provided a copy of the written referral. A student placed on administrative leave shall be given the opportunity to appear personally before the dean of student services, or a designee, in order to discuss the following issues only:
      • 1. the reliability of the information concerning the student's conduct, including the matter of his or her identity;
      • 2. whether the conduct and surrounding circumstances reasonably indicate that the continued presence of the student on College premises poses a substantial and immediate threat to himself or herself or to others or the stability and continuance of normal college functions.
    • D. There is no appeal to the President's decision of an interim suspension pending a hearing. Unless the person placed on leave agrees to delay the hearing to a later time, the hearing committee will convene within ten (10) days considering the circumstances of each case including but not limited to:
      • 1. time of academic year;
      • 2. availability of witnesses (especially any injured party);
      • 3. whether criminal charges are pending.
  • Section 4: Due Process Procedural Protections
    • A. As provided for by the NSHE Code, students accused of disciplinary violations are entitled to the following procedural protections, which are general described as the following:
      • 1. To be informed of the charge and alleged misconduct upon which the charge is based;
      • 2. To request that the dean of student services, as administrative officer, to resolve the case in an informal disciplinary conference;
      • 3. To be allowed reasonable time to prepare a defense.
      • 4. To be informed of the evidence upon which a charge is based and accorded an opportunity to offer a relevant response;
      • 5. To call and confront relevant witnesses;
      • 6. To be assured of confidentiality, in accordance with the terms of the federal Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act.
      • 7. To request that any person conducting a disciplinary conference or serving as a hearing board member or hearing officer be disqualified on the ground of personal bias.
      • 8. To be considered innocent of the charges until proven responsible by a preponderance of the evidence.
      • 9. To be advised by a person of their choice.
  • Section 5: Interpretation of Regulations
    • A. The purpose of publishing disciplinary regulations is to give students general notice of prohibited behavior. These policies and procedures are a summary of the grounds, process and forms of discipline that are governed by the NSHE Code, title 2, chapter 6. Reference is made to this document for specific and detailed information on the NSHE and Western Nevada College disciplinary process.
  • Section 6: Disciplinary Action while Criminal Charges Are Pending
    • A. Students may be accountable both to civil/criminal authorities and to the college for acts that constitute violations of law and of these policies. Disciplinary action at the college will normally proceed during the pendency of criminal or other proceedings, and will not be subject to challenge on the ground that criminal or other charges involving the same incident are dismissed or reduced.
  • Section 7: Standards of Classroom Behavior
    • A. The primary responsibility for managing the classroom environment rests with the academic faculty. Students who engage in any prohibited or unlawful acts that result in disruption of a class may be directed by the faculty member to leave the class for the remainder of the class period. Longer suspensions from a class, or dismissal on disciplinary grounds, must be preceded by disciplinary proceedings in accordance with the WNC policies and the Board of Regents Code.
  • Section 8: Prohibited Conduct
    • A. Unacceptable misconduct includes, but is not limited to any of the activities or behaviors outlined in Section I of this document and the NSHE Code, title 2, chapter 6 (6.2.2).
  • Section 9: Sanctions
    • A. Consistent with the NSHE Code, title 2, chapter 6 (6.3), possible sanctions associated with violations of these WNC policies may include:
      • 1. Warning: notice, orally or in writing, that continuation or repetition of prohibited conduct may be cause for additional disciplinary action.
      • 2. Reprimand: a written warning that continuation or repetition of prohibited conduct may be cause for additional disciplinary action. Notice of this action may appear on the student's academic transcript for up to one year.
      • 3. Disciplinary Probation: exclusion from participation in privileged or extra-curricular institutional activities for a specified period of time not to exceed one year. Additional restrictions or conditions may also be imposed. Violations of the terms of disciplinary probation, or any other violation during the period of probation, will normally result in suspension or expulsion from the college. Notice of this action may appear on the student's academic transcript for up to two years.
      • 4. Restitution: repayment to the college or to an affected party for damages resulting from a violation of these Policies.
      • 5. Suspension: exclusion from college premises, and other privileges or activities for a defined time period as set forth in the suspension notice. Notice of this action may appear on the student's academic transcript as Disciplinary suspension effective (date) to (date). Parents or legal guardians of minor students shall be notified of this action.

        A student who is not currently enrolled in the system and who was not registered during the previous semester, or who graduated at the end of the previous semester may request that the notation of the disciplinary suspension be removed from the official transcript when two years have elapsed since the expiration of the student's suspension. Such a request must be submitted in writing to the president. If the request is not granted, the student at yearly intervals thereafter may submit a request for removal of the notation.

        No student suspended shall be refunded or credited any fees paid by and/or for the student.
      • 6. Expulsion: termination of student status for an indefinite period of time, and exclusion from college premises, privileges and activities. Permission of the president shall be required for readmission. This action will be recorded on the student's academic transcript as Disciplinary Expulsion Effective (date). The parents or legal guardians of minor students shall be notified of this action. No expelled student shall be refunded or credited any fees paid by and/or for the student.
      • 7. Other Sanctions: other sanctions, if agreed to in writing by the student, may be imposed instead of, or in addition to, those specified in sections (1) through (6) of this part. Service activities, fines or research projects may also be assigned.
    • B. Violations may result in expulsion or suspension from the college unless specific and significant mitigating factors. Factors to be considered in mitigation shall be the present demeanor and past disciplinary record of the offender, as well as the nature of the offense and the severity of any damage, injury, or harm resulting from it.
    • C. Repeated or aggravated violations of any section of these Policies may also result in expulsion or suspension or in the imposition of such lesser penalties as may be appropriate. Attempts to commit acts prohibited by these Policies may be punished to the same extent as completed violations.
  • Section 10: Case Referrals
    • A. Any person may refer a student or a student group or organization suspected of violating these policies to the dean of student services. This referral must be done in writing using a standard form available from the college's public safety, dean of student services, coordinator of student activities, or academic director's offices.
    • B. Those referring cases are normally expected to serve as the complainant, and to present relevant evidence in hearings or conferences. The complainant may request the assistance of an advocate.[1]
  • Section 11: Conference and Hearing Committee Referrals
    • A. The dean of student services or a designee will conduct a preliminary review to determine whether the alleged misconduct might result in expulsion or suspension from the college. Students not subject to suspension or expulsion will be entitled to a disciplinary conference to attempt an informal resolution of the matter, in accordance with Sec. 6.8.2(c) of the Regents' Code, with the dean of student services, or a designee, as set forth in section XIII of this Code of Student Conduct. Students who are subject to suspension or expulsion will be entitled a hearing before the Campus Hearing Committee as set forth in section XIV.
    • B. Students referred for a hearing by the dean of student services, or a designee, may elect to have their cases resolved in accordance with section XIII of these policies. Such an election must be in writing, affirming that the student is aware a hearing is being waived.
    • C. The dean of student services, or a designee, may defer proceedings for alleged minor violations of these Policies for a period not to exceed ninety days.
  • Section 12: Disciplinary Conferences
    • A. As permitted by NSHE Code, title 2, chapter 6 (6.8.2), students accused of non-academic offenses that may result in penalties less than expulsion or suspension may be subject to an informal resolution or recommendation for a disciplinary conference with the dean of student services or designee. The following procedural protections are provided to accused students in disciplinary conferences:
      • 1. Written notice of the information specified in subsection 6.8.1 of the NSHE Code at least three business days prior to the scheduled conference.
      • 2. Reasonable access to the case file prior to and during the conference. The case file consists of materials which would be considered "educational records,'' pursuant to the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act of 1974; personal notes of college staff members or complainants are not included.
      • 3. An opportunity to respond to the evidence and to call relevant and necessary witnesses.
      • 4. A right to be accompanied by an advisor as provided in item XV of these policies.
  • Section 13: Campus Hearing Committee
    • A. There shall be a Campus Hearing Committee appointed in accordance with procedures established by the college and approved by the President, and in accordance with Sec. 6.11.2 of the Regents' Code. Each hearing committee shall consist of at least five participants and not more than three from both the student or faculty/staff constituencies, and a faculty or staff member appointed as chair. The dean of student services shall be responsible for training and providing administrative support to the Campus Hearing Committee.
    • B. Both the findings and the sanctions determined by the Campus Hearing Committee shall be regarded as recommendations to the college president.
    • C. Members of the Campus Hearing Committee charged with a violation of these policies or with a criminal offense may be suspended from their positions by the dean of student services during the pendency of the charges against them. Appointments of members found responsible of any such violation or offense will be terminated immediately upon determination of a case.
    • D. Hearing Committee procedures include the following procedural guidelines and will be implemented in accordance with the procedural requirements of the Board of Regents' Code, Title 2, Ch. 6:
      • 1. The college president will appoint a committee chair from the faculty or staff members of the committee. The chair shall conduct the hearing, participate in board deliberations and discussions, but shall vote only in cases of a tie vote by the committee.
      • 2. The dean of student services, or a designee, shall provide an accused student notice of the hearing date and the specific charges against him/her at least five business days in advance. Notice shall be by personal delivery or by certified mail to the last address provided by the student to the college. An accused student shall be accorded reasonable access to the case file which will be retained in the office of the dean of student services.
      • 3. The committee chair may call relevant witnesses in consultation with the dean of student services. Notice of the hearing will be personally delivered or sent by certified mail. College students and employees are expected to comply with such requests issued pursuant to this procedure, unless compliance would result in significant and unavoidable personal hardship, or substantial interference with normal college activities, as determined by the president of the college.
      • 4. Accused students who fail to appear after proper notice will be deemed to have pled "innocent'' to the charges pending against them. A hearing will be conducted in their absence.
      • 5. Unless requested otherwise by the individual charged, hearings will be closed to the public except for accused, an advisor for the accused, and if appropriate, the victim and relevant witnesses.
      • 6. The chair shall exercise control over the proceedings to avoid needless consumption of time and to achieve orderly completion of the hearing. Any person, including the accused student, who disrupts a hearing, may be excluded by the chair.
      • 7. Hearings shall be tape recorded or transcribed. These records are maintained for a seven-year time-period.
      • 8. Any party may challenge a hearing board member or the hearing officer on the grounds of personal bias. Board members may be disqualified by the chair, or upon majority vote of the voting members, conducted by secret ballot. The chair may be disqualified by the dean of student services and a pro tem chair appointed by the college president for a specific hearing.
      • 9. Witnesses shall be asked to affirm that their testimony is truthful, and may be subject to charges of violating these policies by intentionally providing false information to the college.
      • 10. Witnesses, other than the complainant and the respondent, may be excluded from the hearing during the testimony of other witnesses. All parties, the witnesses, and the public shall be excluded during board deliberations, which shall not be recorded or transcribed.
      • 11. The charges against the respondent must be established by a preponderance of the evidence.
      • 12. Formal rules of evidence shall not be applicable in disciplinary proceedings conducted pursuant to these policies. The chair shall give effect to the rules of confidentiality and privilege, but shall otherwise admit all matters into evidence that reasonable persons would accept as having probative value, materiality and relevancy. Unduly repetitious or irrelevant evidence may be excluded.
      • 13. Complainants and accused students (not their advisors), will be accorded an opportunity to ask relevant questions of those witnesses who testify at the hearing.
      • 14. Board members may ask questions of the parties and all witnesses. They may also take judicial notice of matters which would be within the general experience of college students and faculty members. The past disciplinary record of the accused student, if any, will be supplied to the board during the proceeding.
      • 15. A determination of responsibility and recommendations on the appropriate sanction(s) to be imposed shall be made to the president.
      • 16. Any determination of responsibility and recommendations will be supported by written findings completed by the chair. This document will be provided to the president.
  • Section 14: Advisors
    • A. Complainants and accused students may be assisted by an advisor, who may be an attorney. The role of an advisor will be limited to providing confidential advice to the complainant or accused student. Even if accompanied by an advisor, an accused student must respond to inquiries from the chair and the hearing board. In consideration of the limited role of an advisor, and acknowledging the compelling interest of the college to conclude the matter expeditiously, the work of the hearing board will not, as an expeditiously general practice, be delayed due to the unavailability of an advisor. If an attorney accompanies a student, the name, address, and telephone number of the attorney must provided to the dean of student services at least five working days prior to a hearing.
  • Section 15: Student Groups and Organizations
    • A. Student groups and organizations may be charged with violations of these policies.
    • B. A student group or organization and its officers may be held collectively and individually responsible when violations of these policies by those associated with the group or organization have received the consent or encouragement of the group or organization or of the group's or organization's leaders or officers.
    • C. The officers, leaders, or any identifiable spokesperson for a student group or organization may be directed by the dean of student services to take appropriate action designed to prevent or end violations of these policies by the group or organization. Failure to make reasonable efforts to comply with the dean's order shall be considered a violation of these policies, both by the officers, leaders or spokesperson for the group or organization and by the group or organization itself.
    • D. Sanctions for group or organization misconduct may include revocation or denial of registration or recognition, as well as other appropriate sanctions.
  • Section 16: Decisions on Appeal
    • A. Consistent with the NSHE Code, title 2, chapter 6 (6.14.2), an accused student will be provided with a copy of the president's decision by personal delivery or by certified mail to the last address provided by the student to the college.
    • B. For a suspension or lesser sanction, the student has ten business days to submit a written request for reconsideration of the decision to the president. In the event of a decision for expulsion, the accused will have ten business days to provide a written appeal to the Board of Regents for action.
    • C. As outlined in the NSHE Code, title 2, chapter 6 (6.14.1), the basis for such an appeal must establish that:
      • 1. The procedures under which the person was charged are invalid or were not followed;
      • 2. The person charged did not have adequate opportunity to prepare and present a defense to the charges;
      • 3. The evidence presented at the hearing was not substantial enough to justify the decision; or
      • 4. The sanction imposed was not in keeping with the gravity of the violation.
  • Section 17: Transcript Encumbrances
    • A. In pending cases that could result in suspension or expulsion, a temporary encumbrance will normally be placed on a student's records by the dean of student services.
  • Section 18: Disciplinary Files and Records
    • A. Case referrals will result in the development of a disciplinary file in the name of the accused student. Disciplinary files will be retained as a disciplinary record for seven years from the date of the letter providing notice of final disciplinary action.
  • Section 19: Revocation of Degrees
    • A. The college reserves the right to revoke an awarded degree for fraud in receipt of the degree. The process outlined in the NSHE Code, title 2, chapter 6 (6.2.8) is utilized to determine this as a recommendation to the president.
  • Section 20: Definitions
    • A. When used in this document, the term(s):
      • 1. aggravated violation means a violation which resulted or foreseeably could have resulted in significant damage to persons or property or which otherwise posed a substantial threat to the stability and continuance of normal college or college-sponsored activities;
      • 2. group means a number of persons who are associated with each other, but who have not complied with college requirements for registration as an organization;
      • 3. institution and college mean the college and all of its undergraduate divisions and programs;
      • 4. organization means a number of persons who have complied with college requirements for registration;
      • 5. reckless means conduct which one should reasonably be expected to know would create a substantial risk of harm to persons or property or which would otherwise be likely to result in interference with normal college or college-sponsored activities;
      • 6. student means any person who is taking or auditing classes at the college, or is matriculated in any college program;
      • 7. College premises means buildings or grounds owned, leased, operated, controlled or supervised by the college;
      • 8. weapon is defined in accordance with state law, and includes any object or substance designed to inflict a wound or cause injury;
      • 9. College-sponsored activity means any activity on or off college premises that is directly initiated or supervised by the college;
      • 10. will or shall are used in the imperative sense.

[1] An individual, usually an employee of WNC, who could assist the victim during the hearing and advocate for the individual in relation to issues related to the case.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted March 29, 2005 Dates Revised June 19, 2013; October 13, 2011; September 2, 2008
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

WNC Bylaws

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-4-4.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-4-5: Academic Integrity

WNC Policy 3-4-5
Procedure: Academic Integrity
Policy No.: 3-4-5
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs
Policy:

Western Nevada College is committed to providing a high quality educational experience for all students who attend the college. Academic integrity and honesty in all educational classrooms and programs are critical in providing this high level of education attainment. Students at Western Nevada College are expected to be honest and forthright in their academic endeavors because academic dishonesty disrupts the learning process and threatens the educational environment for all students.

  • Section 1: Guidelines for Academic Integrity
    • A. Students assume full responsibility for the content and integrity of the coursework they submit. The following are guidelines to assist students in ensuring academic integrity:
      • 1. Students must complete and submit only their own work on examinations, reports, and projects, unless otherwise permitted by the instructor. Students are encouraged to contact their instructor about appropriate citation guidelines.
      • 2. Students may benefit from working in groups. They may collaborate or cooperate with other students on graded assignments or examinations as directed by the instructor.
      • 3. Students must follow all written and/or verbal instructions given by instructors or designated college representatives prior to taking examinations, placement assessments, tests, quizzes, and evaluations.
      • 4. Students are responsible for adhering to course requirements as specified by the instructor in the course syllabus.
  • Section 2: Academic Dishonesty
    • A. The College places a high expectation on all students to act honestly in all situations. The College does recognize that some students will choose to commit acts of academic dishonesty, which places an expectation on all faculty and staff to confront these acts of dishonesty.
  • Section 3: What is "Academic Dishonesty?"
    • A. Academic dishonesty is any form of cheating and plagiarism which results in students giving or receiving unauthorized assistance in an academic exercise or receiving credit for work which is not their own. Academic dishonesty is a behavioral issue, not an issue of academic performance. As such, it is considered an act of misconduct and is subject to the College disciplinary process as defined in the Nevada System of Higher Education Code.
  • Section 4: What are Specific Acts of Academic Dishonesty?
    • A. Cheating
      Cheating is an act of deception by which a student misrepresents that he or she has mastered information on an academic exercise, which in fact has not been mastered. Examples include:
      • 1. Copying from another student's test or assignment.
      • 2. Allowing another student to copy from a test or assignment.
      • 3. Collaborating during a test with any other person without instructor permission.
      • 4. Using the course textbook or other course materials during a test without instructor permission.
      • 5. Using prepared materials during a test (e.g., notes, formula lists, notes written on the student's clothing, etc.) without instructor permission
      • 6. Stealing, buying, or otherwise obtaining all or part of a test before it is administered.
      • 7. Selling or giving away all or part of an unadministered test, including answers.
      • 8. Bribing any person to obtain an unadministered test or any information about the test.
      • 9. Taking a test for someone else or permitting someone to take a test for the student.
    • B. Plagiarism
      Plagiarism is presenting someone else's words, ideas or data as one's own. When a student submits work that includes the words, ideas or data of others, the source of that information must be acknowledged through complete, accurate and specific references, and if verbatim statements are included, through quotation marks as well.
      • 1. In academically honest writing or speaking, the student will acknowledge the source whenever:
        • a. Another person's actual words are quoted.
        • b. Another person's idea, opinion or theory is used, even if it is completely paraphrased in the student's own words.
        • c. Facts, statistics, or other illustrative materials are borrowed, unless the information is common knowledge.
      • 2. Some pitfalls that lead to plagiarism:
        • a. Procrastination
        • b. Failure to follow instructions for the assignment
        • c. Inadequate writing skills to accomplish the assignment
      • 3. How you can avoid these problems:
        • a. Have someone you trust review your work and/or sources.
        • b. Talk with your faculty members, Academic Director, or counselor about your writing skills.
        • c. Complete drafts before due dates.
        • d. Use the Academic Skills Center.
    • C. Multiple Submission
      Submitting, without prior permission, any work submitted to fulfill another academic requirement.
    • D. Fabrication
      Fabrication is the intentional use of invented information or the falsification of research or other findings with the intent to deceive. Examples include:
      • 1. Submitting as the student's own work any academic exercise (e.g., written work, lab work, computer work, art work, etc.) prepared totally or in part by another. (The typing of a student paper by another person is permissible, but all corrections and rephrasing must be the student's own.)
      • 2. Inventing data or source information for research or other academic exercises.
      • 3. Citing of information not taken from the source indicated.
      • 4. Listing sources in a bibliography not actually used in the academic exercise.
    • E. Grade Tampering
      Grade tampering involves changing, altering, or being an accessory to the changing and/or altering of a grade in a grade book, on a test, on an assignment, on a grade change form, or on any other official academic record.
    • F. Failure to Report a Violation
      The conscious failure to report any student who has committed a breach of the Code and may result in action against the student involved.
    • G. This is not meant to be an exhaustive list of all acts of academic dishonesty, but is a guide to help student and faculty understand what constitutes academic dishonesty.
  • Section 5: Academic Dishonesty Complaint and Hearing Procedures
    • A. The faculty member observing or investigating the apparent act of academic dishonesty documents the commission of the act, usually by writing down the time, date, place, and a description of the act.
    • B. The faculty member collects evidence, often by photocopying the plagiarized assignment and creating a paper trail of all that occurs after the alleged act of academic dishonesty. Often the evidence will include various samples of the student's work showing a radical disparity in style or ability.
    • C. The faculty member provides the student with an opportunity to explain the incident.
    • D. The faculty member explains to the student the procedures and penalties for academic dishonesty and gives the student a copy of the Western Nevada College Academic Integrity Statement.
    • E. The faculty member may resolve the matter informally by determining an appropriate course of action, which may include a verbal or written warning, or a failing grade on an assignment, project, or examination, or no further action. If the accused student contests the faculty member's decision, a hearing with the Academic Director may be requested. The faculty member's policy, with regard to dishonesty, should be included in the course syllabus.
    • F. If the faculty member wishes to initiate further action (e.g., assign a lower grade or a grade of "F" for the course), the student is entitled to a hearing with the Academic Director. The faculty member submits a copy of the Academic Dishonesty Report form and any additional evidence to the Academic Director within 10 days of the alleged act of academic dishonesty, which initiates the hearing process.
    • G. Within 10 business days of receiving an Academic Dishonesty Report form, the Academic Director notifies all parties in writing of the date, time and location of the hearing. At the hearing, the student meets with the faculty member, Academic Director, and two student representatives appointed by the USA President, to hear the charges and present information related to the case. The student may bring an advisor, who may advise the student but not present the case. If the student fails to attend the hearing, the faculty member and Academic Director may proceed with the process to completion. The Academic Director will consider any evidence submitted and interview persons as warranted. The Academic Director determines if the action recommended by the faculty member is appropriate.
    • H. Within 10 business days of the hearing, the Academic Director sends written notification of the results to the student and faculty member.
    • I. Within 10 business days of the notification, the student may submit a written appeal to the Academic Director.
    • J. The Academic Director sends a final report to the Vice President of Academic Student Affairs. The Dean of Student Services may also issue disciplinary sanctions in accordance with NSHE Code, Title 2, Chapter 6, Section 3. These may include:
      • 1. Disciplinary admonition and warning.
      • 2. Disciplinary probation with or without the loss of privileges for a definite period of time. The violation of the terms of the disciplinary probation or the breaking of any college rule during the probation period may be grounds for suspension or expulsion from the college.
      • 3. Suspension from Western Nevada College for a definite period of time (i.e., suspension of the privilege to attend Western Nevada College).
      • 4. Expulsion from Western Nevada College (i.e., removal of the privilege to attend Western Nevada College).
    • K. NOTE: A student may not withdraw from a course in order to avoid possible academic and disciplinary sanctions. If a student is suspected of committing an act of academic dishonesty, then the case must be resolved before the student can initiate a withdrawal. Once a student receives an "F" in any course as an academic sanction, the student cannot withdraw from the course. If a student appeals the determination or sanction, the student may not withdraw from the course until after the appeal is resolved. If the appeal process results in the sanction being upheld, then the grade of "F" for that course will be upheld.
  • Section 6: Final Level of Appeal
    • A. If the student chooses to appeal the determination of the Academic Director, the student must file a petition for review with the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs within ten business days of notification of the decision. The Vice President reviews the written records and issues a written decision.
  • Section 7: Timelines
    • A. The Academic Director and the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs may for good cause, extend the scheduling timelines described above.
  • Section 8: Suspected Academic Dishonesty Outside of the Classroom
    • A. The College requires that standards of academic integrity and academic honesty be upheld outside the classroom as well as inside the classroom. Examples of academic dishonesty outside a classroom could include cheating, photocopying papers and tests, plagiarism, and illegal access to web courses and tests, etc. If a student is suspected of committing an act of academic dishonesty outside of the classroom (in a lab, the library, the learning center, etc.) the student will be subject to the following:
      • 1. The person who believes that academic dishonesty took place will gather all available evidence and forward it to the instructor of record for the class in question. The instructor will then confront the student with the evidence and follow the steps as outlined above.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted November 15, 2005 Dates Revised June 19, 2013; September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-4-5.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-4-6: Athletic Fee Waiver Policy

WNC Policy 3-4-6
Procedure: Athletic Fee Waiver Policy
Policy No.: 3-4-6
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Vice President
Policy:

It is the policy of the Western Nevada College Athletic Department that all sports operate within their established budget. Consistent with college and state policy, deficit spending is not allowed.

Within their respective budgets, coaches may authorize funds according to their best professional judgment, distributing athletic fee waivers in amounts suitable for each individual player. Under no circumstances, however, may the total budget be exceeded.

WNC prohibits any conduct that would violate NJCAA guidelines.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted October 2, 2006 Dates Revised September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-4-6.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-5-1: Grade Appeal

WNC Policy 3-5-1
Procedure: Grade Appeal
Policy No.: 3-5-1
Department: Dean of Student Services Office
Contact: Dean of Student Services
Policy:

A student has the right to activate the grade appeal process for students when they believe that the grade they have received for a course is incorrect.

  • Section 1: Activation
    • A. Prior to activation of the formal grade appeal process it is recommended that the student discuss his/her complaint with the instructor who issued the grade.
    • B. If the student cannot reach the instructor or if the grade is not resolved by the instructor then the student must file a written intent to appeal the grade with the instructor's division office within 2 weeks of the grade's posting.
  • Section 2: Written Notice
    • A. Once the written notice is filed, the student has until 5 p.m. on February 1st or 5 p.m. on September 1st (whichever occurs immediately after the grading period in which the grade was issued) to contact the Academic Director who will set up a meeting between the student, instructor and division chair (or student and instructor if they had not met before).
  • Section 3: Unresolved Grade Appeal
    • A. If the grade appeal is still unresolved, the student must submit details in writing to the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs within 10 days of the meeting with the Academic Director and instructor.
    • B. The vice president in return will notify the instructor, student and Academic Director by certified mail of the formal grade appeal.
  • Section 4: Hearing Committee
    • A. Within 15 days of the receipt of the written certified letter, a hearing committee made up of the Academic Director, two faculty members of the same division chosen by the Academic Director, and two students chosen by the ASWN President will meet to hear the grade appeal.
    • B. The instructor and the student who is appealing his/her grade will be invited to be present when this committee meets.
  • Section 5: Final Action on Grade Appeal
    • A. The written recommendation of this hearing committee will be forwarded to the Vice President for Academic and Student Affairs who will act on the grade appeal within15 days of being notified.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted December 6, 1994 Dates Revised June 19, 2013; September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004; April 4, 2000; February 23, 1999
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-5-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-5-2: Student Grievance

WNC Policy 3-5-2
Procedure: Student Grievance
Policy No.: 3-5-2
Department: Dean of Student Services Office
Contact: Dean of Student Services
Policy:

A student has the right to initiate a formal grievance in the case of a possible alleged infraction.

  • Section 1: Initiation of Grievance
    • A. Formal grievance procedures are initiated only after informal attempts have been found unsatisfactory in reaching a just solution.
    • B. A grievance must be filed in writing to the appropriate dean within 30 instructional days of the alleged infraction.
  • Section 2: Committee Membership
    • A. Members of a grievance committee will be selected by the appropriate dean.
    • B. This committee will consist of the appropriate dean, two faculty members, one student, one representative from the Associated Students of Western Nevada, and may also include a classified employee.
  • Section 3: Presentation of Case
    • A. The student and involved parties will be given the opportunity to present their case in a formal hearing to the selected grievance committee.
  • Section 4: Recommended Course of Action
    • A. The committee will then recommend a course of action to the vice president for academic and student affairs.
  • Section 5: Final Decision
    • A. The student will receive a written notification from the Vice President for Academic and Student Affairs of the final decision.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted February 23, 1999 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004; April 4, 2000
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

NSHE Board of Regents' Meeting Minutes: 4/87; 11/88; 5/92

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-5-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-5-3: Academic Renewal Policy

WNC Policy 3-5-3
Procedure: Academic Renewal Policy
Policy No.: 3-5-3
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Vice President
Policy:

Students may petition to have an entire semester of course work disregarded in all calculations regarding academic standing and grade point average.

  • Section 1: Eligibility
    • A. Eligibility for academic renewal is subject to the following conditions:
      • 1. At the time the petition is filed, at least one year must have elapsed since the most recent course work to be disregarded was completed.
      • 2. In the interval between the completion of the most recent course work to be disregarded and the filing of the petition, students shall have completed at least 12 acceptable credits of course work at a regionally accredited institution of higher education with a grade-point average of at least 2.5 on all work completed during that interval. Courses taken during the interval may be repeats of previously attempted college work.
  • Section 2: Procedure
    • A. The student's filed petition must specify the semester to be disregarded. A semester with only W grades may not be considered for academic renewal.
    • B. If the petition is approved under this policy, the student's permanent academic record will be suitably marked to indicate that no work taken during the disregarded semester, even if satisfactory, may apply toward graduation requirements and the grades will not be calculated into the student's grade point average. However, all course work will remain on the academic record, ensuring a true and accurate academic history. The original grades earned will be calculated toward satisfactory academic progress for financial aid.
    • C. Academic renewal can only occur once during a student's academic career. Academic renewal can only be applied prior to graduation from the first degree or certificate. Once a student graduates, academic renewal cannot be retroactively applied.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted January 23, 2007 Dates Revised September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-5-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-5-4: Repeat Adjustment Request

WNC Policy 3-5-4
Procedure: Repeat Adjustment Request
Policy No.: 3-5-4
Department: Academic & Student Affairs
Contact: Vice President

A student may repeat a course and have only the highest grade counted as part of his/her total grade point average; all grades will remain on the student transcript. Students will not receive duplicate credit for repeated courses unless the course is designated as repeatable for credits.

Students may repeat courses provided they have fulfilled current course prerequisites and met criteria established for courses with selective admissions criteria.

Students may petition to repeat up to 12 credits with an adjustment to the previous grade(s). If approved, the original grade will be reflected as an "R" for repeat. The "R" will only be used as a replacement if the repeated course earns a grade higher than the grade originally earned. Repeat adjustment may not be applied to W or AD grades.

A repeat adjustment request must be submitted to Admissions and Records no later than four weeks after the end of the semester in which the course was repeated. If a student requests a repeat adjustment for a course that is designated as repeatable for credit, he/she will not receive additional credits for the repeated course.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted January 23, 2007 Dates Revised September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/3-5-4.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 3-6-1: Club Advisor Compensation

WNC Policy 3-6-1
Procedure: Club Advisor Compensation
Policy No.: 3-6-1

This policy is has been rescinded and is no longer active.

If you wish to view an archive of this policy, please visit the WNC library.

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-1-1: Credentials for Community College Faculty

WNC Policy 4-1-1
Procedure: Credentials for Community College Faculty
Policy No.: 4-1-1
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

The required credentials for community college faculty are outlined in the Policy Codification Section, Title 4, Chapter 3, Section 5 of the NSHE Board of Regents Handbook.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted July 9, 2008 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-1-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-1-2: New Hire Mentors

WNC Policy 4-1-2
Procedure: New Hire Mentors
Policy No.: 4-1-2
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

Every new .50 FTE or more employee will be assigned a mentor for a minimum of one year.

  • Section 1: Purpose
    • A. The purpose of the mentor is to give the new hire collegial support; to instill values of the college's culture; and to help him or her learn college procedures, practices and policies.
  • Section 2: Notification
    • A. When the WNC Human Resources Office notifies the college community of a new staff member by e-mail, an additional e-mail, requesting that a mentor be assigned, will be sent to the specific Vice President and to one of the following:
      • 1. For academic faculty, to the appropriate Academic Director;
      • 2. For administrative faculty or classified staff, to the appropriate governance senate/council chair.
  • Section 3: Procedure
    • A. At the point when notification is made, the Academic Director or supervisor and the governance chair of the new hire will confer and select a mentor to be recommended for the newly hired individual. The Academic Director or supervisor will submit the mentor recommendation(s) to the appropriate vice president. If the recommendation is approved by the vice president, the recommendation will be forwarded to the president for final approval.
    • B. The president's office will notify the Academic Director or supervisor and the governance chair of approval of the mentor recommendation. The Academic Director and the governance chair or supervisor will notify the mentor. The President's Office will keep a master list. The mentor should contact the new hire as soon as possible, but no later than two weeks after being appointed.
    • C. When possible, the mentor and new hire should be on the same campus, but not generally employed in the same division/department.
    • D. A mentor relationship may be dissolved at any time at the request of either party and a new mentor may be assigned.
    • E. No mentor plays a role in a peer review process for the new hire, unless requested by the new hire
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted February 25, 2003 Dates Revised June 19, 2013; September 2, 2008; November 15, 2005; January 25, 2005; May 11, 2004
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-1-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-1-3: Nepotism

WNC Policy 4-1-3
Procedure: Nepotism
Policy No.: 4-1-3
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

It is the policy of Western Nevada College that no employee may hire or cause to hire, nor supervise, any relative within the third degree of consanguinity or affinity, except with written approval of the appointing authority. Employees or officers shall keep in mind that any appearance of impropriety or conflict of interest must be avoided.

  • Section 1: Background
    • A. WNC seeks to employ on a competitive basis the most qualified candidate for every position.
    • B. It is the policy of the Nevada System of Higher Education and Western Nevada College that no employees or officers shall engage in any activities that place them in a conflict of interest between their official activities and any other interest or obligation. Conflict of interest requires all employees and officers to disqualify themselves from participating in a decision when a financial or personal interest is present.
    • C. The Nevada Revised Statutes 281.210, Nevada Administrative Code 284.375, and 285.377 and Title 4, Chapter 3, Section 7 in the Board of Regents Handbook, prohibit the employment of relatives under certain circumstances. Except for relationships allowed therein, no employing authority of WNC may appoint a person to an employment position if, upon the appointment, the person will be the immediate supervisor or will be in the direct line of authority of any relative of a WNC employee within the third degree of consanguinity or affinity.
    • D. Exceptions to this policy must have the prior written approval of the employing authority, along with a written agreement detailing the manner in which conflicts of interest will be ameliorated.
  • Section 2: Definitions
    • A. "Consanguinity" is a blood relationship within a family.
    • B. "Affinity" is a marriage or other legal relationship (such as adoption) formally recognized by the State of Nevada.
    • C. "Relationships within the third degree of consanguinity" include the employee's spouse, child, parent, sibling, half-sibling, or step-relatives of the person; the spouse of the employee's child, parent, sibling, half-sibling, or step-relative; or the employee’s in-laws, aunt, uncle, niece, nephew, grandparent, grandchild, or first cousin.
  • Section 3: Procedures
    • A. The following procedures apply to all WNC employees including academic and administrative faculty, members of the state classified system, and all student employees, regardless of the funding source or budget account.
      • 1. The appointing authority for WNC is the President or Chancellor, as the case may be.
      • 2. A person serving in a supervisory position may not participate in decisions regarding the hiring, reappointment, placement, evaluation, rate of pay, salary increases, promotion, tenure, monetary awards, or other personal interest for a relative employed by the NSHE, even when the supervisor is not in the direct line of authority.
      • 3. Department heads and supervisors -- at any level -- who recommend the hiring of a relative of any employee must provide written notification of the proposed hire to the appointing authority which addresses whether the proposed hire will create a conflict of interest within the unit and, if so, how the conflict of interest will be ameliorated. Recommended hires which would create a conflict of interest require an exception to the general rule recited above and the approval of the appointing authority. All hires must be approved in writing by the appointing authority.
      • 4. If a supervisor becomes related to an employee in the direct line of supervision, the supervisor will notify the appointing authority in writing within 10 working days. The appointing authority shall make the final determination of what action shall be taken.
      • 5. Any deviation from the above policy could result in disciplinary action as well as sanctions stipulated in the NRS and NAC.
  • Section 4: Exceptions
    • A. Exceptions to this policy require written approval from the appointing authority.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised October 12, 2012; September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004; April 29, 2003; January 30, 2001
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
NAC Code NAC 284.375, NAC 285.377
NRS Code NRS 281.210
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-1-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-1-4: Nevada's Whistleblower Law

WNC Policy 4-1-4
Procedure: Nevada's Whistleblower Law
Policy No.: 4-1-4
Department: Finance & Administrative Services
Contact: Vice President of Finance and Administrative Services
Policy:

Whistleblower, NRS 281.611 though 281.671, encourages State officers and employees to disclose improper governmental action, and it is the intent of the Legislature to protect the rights of employees who make such a disclosure.

The Legislature has declared to be the public policy of this state that a state officer or employee is encouraged to disclose, to the extent not expressly prohibited by law, "improper governmental action," and it is the intent of the Legislature to protect the rights of a state officer or employee who makes such a disclosure.

"Improper governmental action" means any action taken by a state officer or employee in the performance of his official duties, whether or not the action is within the scope of his employment, which is (1) in violation of any state law or regulation; (2) an abuse of authority; (3) of substantial and specific danger to the public health or safety; or (4) a gross waste of public money.

The Nevada Revised Statutes prohibit a state officer or employee from using his or her official authority or influence to intimidate, threaten, coerce, command, influence or attempt to intimidate, threaten, coerce, command or influence another state officer or employee in an effort to interfere with or prevent disclosure of information concerning "improper governmental action."

The use of "official authority or influence" includes taking, directing others to take, recommending, processing or approving any personnel action such as an appointment, promotion, transfer, assignment, reassignment, reinstatement, restoration, reemployment, evaluation or other disciplinary action.

Western Nevada College encourages employees or other members of the WNC campus community to report suspected incidents of "improper governmental action" to the vice president of finance and administrative services. This individual is charged with investigating and issuing a report detailing the outcome of the investigation. The vice president provides the report to the college president or other appropriate NSHE representative. The vice president also informs the reporting individual of the outcome of the investigation.

If requested by the individual reporting such a possible violation, the vice president will preserve anonymity of the reporting individual.

In situations possibly involving the vice president of finance and administrative services, another college vice president may initiate a similar process.

The Nevada Revised Statutes prohibit any reprisal or retaliatory action against a state officer or employee who discloses information concerning "improper governmental action." A claim of reprisal retaliatory action must be submitted on the NPD-53 form, Request for Hearing under the provisions of NRS 281.641 (Whistleblower Law) within the 10 working day filing pursuant to NAC 281.305. This form is obtained from the Nevada Department of Personnel at 775.684.0141 or from the WNC Human Resources office.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted May 11, 2004 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; February 20, 2007

NRS 281.611 through NRS 281.671

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-1-4.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-1-5: Jury Duty

WNC Policy 4-1-5
Procedure: Jury Duty
Policy No.: 4-1-5
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

Judicial leave will be granted to serve on a jury or when summoned to be a witness.

  • Section 1: Regulations
    • A. Regulations concerning civil leave including jury duty, witness summons and other judicial leave are covered for the following:
      • 1. Classified Personnel - Rules for State Personnel Administration NAC 284-582
      • 2. Professional Staff - NSHE Board of Regents Handbook, Title 4, Codification of Board Policy Statements, Chapter 3, Section 18, Judicial Leave
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
NAC Code NAC 284.582
NRS Code NRS 284.175, NRS 284.345
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-1-5.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-1-6: Intellectual Property Policy

WNC Policy 4-1-6
Procedure: Intellectual Property Policy
Policy No.: 4-1-6
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President for Human Resources and General Counsel
  • Section 1: Preamble
    • A. The Nevada System of Higher Education is dedicated to teaching, research, and the extension of knowledge to the public. The personnel at its institutions recognize as two of their major objectives the production of new knowledge and the dissemination of both old and new knowledge. A byproduct of these objectives is the development of new and useful products and processes and the publication of scholarly works. Such activities (1) contribute to the professional development of the individuals involved, (2) enhance the reputation of the institutions concerned, (3) provide additional educational opportunities for participating students, and (4) promote the general welfare of the public at large. (B/R 6/07)
    • B. Inventions and copyrightable works often come about because of activities of NSHE personnel who have been aided wholly or in part through the use of funds and/or facilities of the System. It becomes significant, therefore, to ensure the utilization of such inventions for the public good and to expedite their development and marketing. The rights and privileges, as well as the incentive, of the inventor or author/creator must be preserved so that the abilities of the inventor or author/creator and those of other personnel of the NSHE may be further encouraged and stimulated. (B/R 6/07)
    • C. The Board of Regents acknowledges that faculty, staff, and students who are employees of the Board regularly prepare for publication, usually through individual effort and initiative, articles, pamphlets, books, and other scholarly works that may be subject to copyright and that may generate income. Publication may also result from work supported either partially or completely by the institution. With the advent of innovative techniques and procedures, the variety and number of materials that might be created in a higher education community have increased significantly, causing the ownership of such copyrightable works to become increasingly complex. (B/R 6/03)
    • D. The foregoing considered, the Board of Regents of the Nevada System of Higher Education does hereby establish the following policy with respect to inventions, intellectual property, and restricted access research from which NSHE faculties, staff and students are contributing participants. (B/R 6/07)
  • Section 2: Definitions
    • A. "Intellectual property" is a category of intangible property, which includes patents and copyrights. (B/R 6/91)
    • B. The term "inventions" shall refer to all inventions, discoveries, computer programs, processes, methods, uses, products, or combinations whether or not patented or patentable at any time under the Federal Patent Act as now existing or hereafter amended or supplemented. (B/R 2/90)
    • C. "Copyrightable works" shall include the following: (1) books, journal articles, texts, glossaries, bibliographies, study guides, laboratory manuals, syllabi, tests, and proposals; (2) lectures, musical or dramatic compositions, unpublished scripts; (3) films, filmstrips, charts, transparencies, and other video or audio broadcasts; (4) distance education courses or programmed instructional materials; (5) computer programs and documentation; and (6) other materials or works which qualify for protection under the copyright laws of the United States or other protective statutes whether or not copyrightable there under. (B/R 6/03)
    • D. "Net income" is defined as income received by the NSHE from a NSHE owned invention or copyrightable work, less all payments or obligations directly attributable to patenting, copyrighting, marketing, licensing, protecting, or administering the invention or work. (B/R 6/03)
    • E. "Personnel" refers to part-time and full-time members of the faculty, staff, all other agents and employees, and undergraduate and graduate students and postdoctoral fellows of the NSHE. (B/R 6/03)
    • F. "Work for Hire" is defined by the copyright laws of the United States, and is used herein, as a work prepared by an employee within the scope of his or her employment. (B/R 6/91)
  • Section 3: Significant Use
    • A. When an invention or a copyrightable work is developed by NSHE personnel or others participating in NSHE programs using significant System resources such as facilities, materials, equipment, personnel, funds or other resources under the control of or administered by the NSHE, the NSHE will own the invention or copyrightable work in accordance with the provisions of this policy. (B/R 6/03)
      • 1. For the purposes of developing inventions or copyrightable works, the NSHE does not construe the provision of office or library facilities or traditional desktop personal computers as constituting significant use of NSHE space or facilities, nor does it construe the payment of salary from unrestricted accounts as constituting the significant use of NSHE funds, except in those situations where the funds were specifically paid to support the development of inventions or copyrightable works. (B/R 6/03)
      • 2. Textbooks developed in conjunction with class teaching are also excluded from the "significant use" category, unless such textbooks were developed using NSHE administered funds paid specifically to support textbook development. (B/R 6/03)
      • 3. Generally, an invention or a copyrightable work will not be considered to have been developed using NSHE funds or facilities if:
        • a. only a minimal amount of unrestricted funds have been used; and
        • b. the invention or copyrightable work has been created outside of the assigned duties of the inventor or author/creator; and
        • c. only a minimal amount of time has been spent using significant NSHE facilities or only insignificant facilities and equipment have been used; and
        • d. the development of the invention or copyrightable work has been made on the personal, unpaid time of the inventor or author/creator. (B/R 6/03)
      • 4. This section shall not be interpreted as preventing member institutions of the Nevada System of Higher Education from adopting stricter criteria on what constitutes the significant use of NSHE resources. (B/R 6/03)
  • Section 4: Inventions
    • A. An invention disclosure should be submitted when something new and useful has been conceived or developed, or when unusual, unexpected, or unobvious research results have been achieved or used. (B/R 6/91)
    • B. Determination of rights and equities in inventions (patentable or not) shall be as follows:
      • 1. Except as otherwise specified by the NSHE in writing, inventions shall belong to the NSHE if conceived or reduced to practice: (1) by an employee of the NSHE as a result of the employee's duties, (2) by agreement with a non-NSHE sponsor, or (3) through the significant use, by any person, of the NSHE's resources such as facilities, materials, equipment, personnel, funds, or other resources under the control of or administered by the NSHE. (B/R 6/03)
      • 2. Inventors acquire ownership in inventions which are: (1) not the result of a NSHE employee's duties or subject to the terms of agreements with research sponsors or other third parties, and (2) do not involve the significant use of resources administered by the NSHE. (B/R 6/03)
      • 3. In the event there is a question about an invention as to whether the NSHE has an ownership claim, the invention should be disclosed to the NSHE. Such disclosure is without prejudice to the inventor's ownership claim. In determining ownership interest in an invention, a designated official may determine that the NSHE has no property interest in the invention because its conception and reduction to practice was unrelated to the inventor's NSHE duties, involved only insignificant use of institutional resources, or for such other reasons as may be set forth in the guidelines. (B/R 6/03)
      • 4. Sponsor-Supported Efforts. Prior to signing any agreement with a non-NSHE sponsor that may result in or that deals with patent rights or the like, where NSHE time, facilities, materials, equipment, personnel, funds, or other resources are involved, NSHE personnel must bring the proposed agreement to the attention of the appropriate administrators of the constituent institution in accordance with its invention procedures and either obtain a written waiver of NSHE rights or otherwise modify the agreement to conform with these policies, as is determined by the institution in its discretion. Research agreements with private sponsors shall define ownership of inventions. The agreement under which inventions may be produced may contain specific provisions with respect to disposition of rights to these materials. The sponsor may receive an option to license such inventions on terms to be negotiated. In those cases where all rights are vested in the NSHE, where income is shared between the sponsor and the constituent institution, the inventor may appropriately share in the income. The nature and extent of inventor participation in income, however, shall be subject to sponsor and NSHE regulations as well as the agreement. (B/R 6/03)
  • Section 5: Copyrightable Works
    • A. Copyright is the ownership and control of the intellectual property in original works of authorship, which is subject to copyright law. In contrast to a patent which protects the "idea," copyright covers the "artistic expression" in the particular literary work, musical work, computer program, video or motion picture or sound recording, photograph, sculpture and so forth, in which the "expression" is embodied, illustrated, or explained, but does not protect any idea, process, concept, discovery, or the like. It is the policy of the NSHE that all rights in copyright shall remain with the author/creator unless the work is a work for hire (and copyright vests in the NSHE under copyright law), is supported by a direct allocation of funds through the NSHE for the pursuit of a specific project, is commissioned by the NSHE, is created with the significant use of NSHE administered resources, or is otherwise subject to contractual obligations. (B/R 6/03)
    • B. Except as may be provided otherwise in this policy, the NSHE does not claim ownership of books, articles, and similar works, the intended purpose of which is to disseminate the results of academic research or scholarly study. Such works include those of students created in the course of their education, such as dissertations, papers, and articles. Similarly, the NSHE claims no ownership of popular nonfiction, novels, poems, musical compositions, or other works of artistic imagination that are not institutionally commissioned works or that were not created with the significant use of NSHE administered resources. If title to copyright in works defined within this paragraph vests in the NSHE by law, the NSHE will, upon request and to the extent consistent with its legal obligations, convey copyright to the creators of such works. (B/R 6/03)
    • C. The NSHE shall retain ownership of works created as institutional rather than personal efforts -- that is, works created for NSHE purposes in the course of the author/creator's employment. For instance, work assigned to staff programmers is "work for hire" as defined by law (regardless of whether the work is in the course of sponsored research, un-sponsored research, or non-research activities), as is software developed for NSHE purposes, and the NSHE owns all rights, intellectual and financial, in such works. (B/R 6/03)
    • D. Except as excluded under Section 3, the NSHE owns all rights, intellectual and financial, in copyrightable works created in the course of scholarly projects specifically funded by NSHE sponsored agreements or other NSHE funds. Prior to signing any agreement with a non-NSHE sponsor that may result in or which deals with copyrightable works, where any NSHE time, facilities, materials, personnel, or resources are involved, NSHE personnel and students must bring the proposed agreement to the attention of the appropriate administrators of the constituent institution in accordance with its copyright procedures and either obtain a written waiver of NSHE rights or otherwise modify the agreement to conform with these policies as is determined by the institution at its direction. (B/R 6/03)
    • E. Under the copyright laws of the United States, commissioned works of nonemployees are owned by the author/creator and not by the commissioning party, unless there is a written agreement to the contrary. NSHE personnel must, therefore, generally require NSHE commissioned contractors to agree in writing that ownership to copyrightable materials is assigned to the NSHE. Examples of copyrightable works which the NSHE may commission non-employees to prepare are:
      • 1. Illustrations or designs
      • 2. Artistic works
      • 3. Architectural or engineering drawings
      • 4. Forwards and introductions
      • 5. Computer software
      • 6. Reports by consultants or subcontractors. (B/R 6/03)
    • F. Any videotaping, broadcasting, or televising of classroom, laboratory, or other instruction, and any associated use of computers, must be approved in advance by the appropriate institutional administrators, who shall determine the conditions under which such activity may occur and resolve questions of ownership, distribution, and policy. (B/R 6/91)
    • G. The NSHE in all events shall have the right to perform its obligations with respect to copyrightable works, data, prototypes, and other intellectual property under any contract, grant, or other arrangements with third parties, including sponsored research agreements, license agreements, and the like.
    • H. Except as provided in Section 3, NSHE resources are to be used solely for NSHE purposes and not for personal gain or personal commercial advantage, or for any other non-NSHE purposes. (B/R 6/03)
  • Section 6: Administration
    • A. Institutional procedures for the development of inventions, copyrightable works, and intellectual property are as follows:
      • 1. Each institution of the NSHE is required to develop policies and procedures for handling inventions, copyrightable works, and intellectual property. Each President shall appoint an Intellectual Property Committee consisting of no fewer than three or more than nine members, one of whom shall be designated by the President to serve as chair. In each case the committee shall include a representative of the office of fiscal affairs of that institution. This committee shall make recommendations to the President regarding procedures, guidelines, and responsibilities for the administration and development of inventions, copyrightable works, intellectual property, and such other matters as the President shall determine. The Committee shall report annually to the President and to the Chancellor on inventions and copyrightable works disclosed and the disposition thereof. (B/R 6/03)
      • 2. Each President shall appoint one institutional officer who is responsible for the administration and disposition of inventions, copyrightable works and intellectual property. It will be the duty of this Intellectual Property Administrator to determine ownership of inventions and copyrightable works, develop terms of agreements with non-NSHE sponsors, inventors and authors/creators, and to resolve disputes among co-inventors and co-authors/co-creators. Detailed operational guidelines and procedures for the administration of these responsibilities shall be established by each institution. (B/R 6/03)
      • 3. When income is to be shared, all net income received by the constituent institution on inventions and copyrightable works subject to this policy shall be divided with the inventor(s) or the author(s)/creator(s) on the basis stated in Section 7, it being understood that if there should be a plurality of inventors, the portion accruing to the inventors or authors/creators will be distributed on an equal share basis unless specifically agreed otherwise in writing by all the inventors or authors/creators. The inventor(s) or author(s)/creator(s) at or before the time of filing a patent application or copyright must agree in writing to any other terms and conditions negotiated with the institution. In the case of a plurality of inventors or authors/creators, all individual inventors or authors/creators must sign the same agreement. (B/R 6/91)
      • 4. In the implementation of its policies and procedures with respect to inventions, each institution may elect, through the recommendation of its Intellectual Property Administrator and with approval of the President, any of the following courses:
        • a. To develop and manage its licensing program through an independent patent assistance organization so as to secure competent evaluation of inventions or discoveries, expeditious filing of applications for patents, and aggressive licensing and administration of patents; or
        • b. To develop and manage its licensing program through an affiliated nonprofit corporation; or
        • c. To develop and manage independently its own licensing program; or
        • d. To release an invention to which the institution has title or an interest to the inventor for management and development as a private venture after the execution of an agreement providing for the division of income. (B/R 6/91)
      • 5. In the implementation of its policies and procedures with regard to distance education courses, each institution shall require compliance with all federal copyright laws, including the provisions of the TEACH Act, 17 U.S.C. Sec. 110(2). In accordance with the TEACH Act, the institution's policies on distance education should include, among other things, provisions regarding: (1) limitations on use of copyrighted materials; (2) limiting access to materials to enrolled students; (3) use of copyrighted materials as part of mediated instructional activities; (4) providing informational materials to students, faculty and staff members regarding copyright laws; (5) providing notice to students that course materials may be subject to copyright laws; (6) limitations on digitizing of analog works; (7) limiting retention of copies of materials; (8) preventing unauthorized further transmission of digital materials; and (9) non-interference with technological measures taken by copyright owners to prevent retention and distribution.
      • 6. Each institution's policies shall provide for an appeal procedure, with final decision by the President, in the event of a disagreement as to the ownership and use of an invention or intellectual property. (B/R 6/03)
  • Section 7: Distribution of Income
    • A. The inventor of the author/creator shall receive not less than 60 percent of the net income from each invention or copyrightable work. The inventor's or the author/creator's academic unit or department shall receive not less than 25 percent of the net income, and any remaining income shall go to the institution. (B/R 6/91)
  • Section 8: Institutional Policies
    • A. The intellectual property policy of each institution shall be consistent with these guidelines and shall be submitted to the Chancellor for review and subsequent approval by the Board of Regents. (B/R 6/03)
  • Section 9: Periodic Reporting
    • A. Periodically or upon request, each NSHE President or his or her designee shall report to the Research and Economic Development Committee of the Board on the status and outcomes of institutional research endeavors. (B/R 6/07)
  • Section 10: Restricted Access Research
    • A. The Board of Regents through NSHE institutions is committed to the creation and dissemination of knowledge. Further, the Board recognizes the importance of open intellectual communication within a research group, within an NSHE institution, and within the community at large. Recognizing that NSHE institutions are dedicated to academic freedom and to the public documentation and dissemination of the knowledge that they create, a free and open academic environment is an essential element in fulfilling research and educational missions. Policies or practices that inhibit the free exchange of ideas, by limiting scholarly interchange, can markedly restrain both the advancement of knowledge and its productive use.

      In meeting this commitment, NSHE faculty may find it important to engage in research in the national interest where restrictions may be imposed on access to, documentation, and dissemination of information. In these cases, the specific research may be characterized as "classified" or "restricted access." Restrictions on these projects create potential conflicts with the academic values of NSHE institutions. Reorganization (2008) Title 4, Chapter 12, Page 9

      This policy does not attempt to anticipate all possible concerns about restricted access research. In some cases, decisions will need to be made about specific research projects to which the application of particular policy guidelines are not clear. In choosing to accept or decline such projects, an institution must weigh the potential of a project for generating and disseminating new knowledge for the benefit of society, against the project's potential for adversely affecting the climate for research conducted in a free and open environment. While this policy sets no explicit limits on the extent of classified research permitted by an NSHE institution, it is not the intent of the policy to encourage an institution to engage in classified research as a primary ongoing activity.
      • 1. Restricted access research includes proprietary, sensitive but not classified, and classified research, unless otherwise provided.
      • 2. The President shall develop policies and procedures for all restricted access research that include provisions for oversight of research projects by the President or his or her designee, appropriate project controls, and guidelines for the release and dissemination of project results, including preliminary results. These procedures must be reviewed by the Chancellor and published by the institution. Copies of the policies and procedures must be lodged with the Secretary of the Board upon adoption by the institution, and whenever modified thereafter.
      • 3. The President or his or her designee may enter into contracts with confidentiality clauses where such clauses protect from public disclosure only that information defined as restricted access by Board policy and in accordance with the guidelines of the Board and institution for accountability and dissemination of research results.
      • 4. NSHE auditors and legal staff shall have access to materials related to restricted access research, excluding classified research, as is appropriate and germane to the performance of their jobs.
      • 5. The President or his or her designee must have the appropriate security clearance for the oversight of classified research.

(B/R 6/07)
(B/R 12/04 - reorganization)

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted May 8, 2007 Dates Revised November 3, 2009; September 2, 2008
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-1-6.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-1-7: Intellectual Property Rights

WNC Policy 4-1-7
Procedure: Intellectual Property Rights
Policy No.: 4-1-7
Department: Human Resources/General Counsel
Contact: Vice President for Human Resources and General Counsel
  • Section 1: Intent of Policy
    • A. This policy is created to preserve an atmosphere of respect, creativity, and innovation for faculty, staff, and students who are employed by or attend Western Nevada College and will:
      • 1. Agree with existing, traditional and legal protections of copyright for scholars, artists, and creators of original works
      • 2. Expand upon and agree with existing NSHE policy (Title 4, Chapter 12) in order to clarify and specify protections for intellectual property
      • 3. Support a spirit of collaboration and sharing for the purpose of institutional effectiveness and excellence
      • 4. Guide in the commercial use of intellectual property not defined as traditional scholarly or otherwise traditionally protected creative work
      • 5. Inform faculty, staff, and the college of rights to creative work produced in the course of employment or sabbatical.
  • Section 2: This Policy May Be Superseded When:
    • A. Agreements through federal, state, or local government grants alter the legal ownership of intellectual property
    • B. Agreements through non-profit, non-government, or private entities alter the legal ownership of intellectual property
    • C. This policy is amended by the specific terms of a contract that clearly designate particular intellectual property as work for hire, or that otherwise alter the ownership of intellectual property.
  • Section 3: Clarification of Intellectual Property Rights to Specific Works
    • A. Rights that Remain Solely with their Creator
      • 1. The intellectual property rights of original scholarly, pedagogical, and creative works, whether created by faculty, professional staff, or students, shall belong to their creator(s).
      • 2. Scholarly, pedagogical, and creative works will hereby include, but not be limited to instructional materials (such as course syllabi, textbooks, instructional multimedia materials, recorded lectures, instructional web files, quizzes, and exams), journal articles, research bulletins, monographs, literary works (plays, poems, stories, etc.), works of art (pictorial, graphic, sculptural, etc.), computer software, sound recordings, and musical compositions.
      • 3. These works will also include:
        • a. Scholarly, pedagogical, or creative works produced with usual facilitative resources available for the purpose of supporting normal instruction, creative efforts, scholarly activities, or course development, including library resources, instructional technology (such as recording tools, computer networks and storage), and support staff
        • b. Scholarly, pedagogical, or creative works that make use of a desktop computer and/or software purchased to support general instructional and scholarly activity.
      • 4. Additional rights retained by the creator or author of the work:
        • a. The individual has exclusive right to allow or disallow the use of their intellectual property in part or in whole by others
          i. This will not prevent instructors from requiring students to share their original work in peer groups, as part of a performance, or in the course of other classroom activities
          ii. This will not prevent copies of student work from being retained anonymously, or in a confidential file, for comparative purposes among faculty and staff.
        • b. The individual retains the exclusive rights to market or otherwise release or use the work outside of Western Nevada College, in whole or in part, in a manner that does not interfere with the individual's current employment or duties at the college.
      • 5. Portability (applicable only to works owned by the creator, as stipulated above):
        • a. Upon the individual's departure from employment by the college, the college forfeits all rights to use the work or any components of intellectual property of the individual unless permission is otherwise granted in writing by the individual.
    • B. Rights that Remain Solely with the Institution
      • 1. The intellectual property rights of institutional works shall belong to Western Nevada College and include:
        • a. Works produced by a student as assigned duty during the course of student employment and created during designated work hours
        • b. Works produced by professional staff as assigned duty during the course of employment and created during designated work hours (excluding works specified in section 3-A)
        • c. Policies or procedures produced as institutional documents by faculty, staff, or student employees
        • d. Works produced under the terms of a contract that specify institutional ownership rights.
        • e. Works that are produced by any person with significant use of college resources
          i. Not otherwise defined in section 3-A as "usual facilitative resources"
          ii. See section 3-C for details about rights pertaining to sabbatical, overload pay, and release time.
      • 2. Portability (applicable only to works owned by the institution, as stipulated above):
        • a. Upon the departure of the individual from employment at the college, the individual forfeits all rights to use or market the work or any components of the intellectual property unless permission is otherwise granted in writing by the college. The college retains exclusive right to use and revise the work and to market it outside the college.
    • C. Rights that are Shared
      • 1. Exclusive intellectual property rights to works completed for assigned duties by student and professional employees, but developed using a majority of personal resources (using any 65% of personal time), will remain with the author/creator. The institution will retain rights to continue using the work, but all future rights (commercial or otherwise) return to the author/creator. Student and professional employees who want to protect the intellectual property rights of said works, will be responsible for maintaining records of personal time committed to the work, along with normally assigned work hours devoted to the work. The student or professional employee will then submit a claim for those rights to the Intellectual Property Committee, providing clear evidence of a majority of personal time devoted to the work.
      • 2. Additionally, joint rights if any, will be specified in a contract between the institution and the creator of a specific work. The contract will be agreed upon and signed by both parties before work begins. Joint rights may apply, as specified in contracts for work:
        • a. developed during release time that has been allocated specifically for said work
        • b. developed during a sabbatical that has been allocated specifically for said work
        • c. developed specifically in exchange for overload pay.
      • 3. If no joint rights are specified, then the author or creator of the work (who has received overload pay, release time, or sabbatical) will retain all rights over the work, as detailed in section 3-A.
      • 4. With joint ownership, the creator or author:
        • a. Has the exclusive right to market the course outside the college in a manner that does not conflict or interfere with the individual's current employment or duties at the college;
        • b. Has the right to be informed in advance of any uses, reproductions, distributions, and dispositions of the work by the college.
      • 5. With joint ownership, the college
        • a. Has the right to borrow portions of the work for use in compilations or other composite works
        • b. Has the right to make derivative works if the author or authors assign copyright ownership to a third party.
      • 6. Portability (applicable only to shared works as stipulated above):
        • a. Rights of the individual following the individual's departure from the college: Exclusive right to market or use the work provided the college's name or image is not used in connection with the work, except as may be otherwise provided in a contract between the institution and the creator
        • b. Rights of the college following the individual's departure from the college: Non-exclusive right to use the work without the creator's consent. This right will remain completely within the college and shall not be transferred to any other institution or entity. No other party will have the right to use the work, in part or whole, outside of the college.
  • Section 4: Procedure for Appeal of Ownership
    • A. In the event that an author or creator disputes the ownership or rights of a work, that author or creator will submit a written appeal.
      • 1. Written Notice
        • a. The author or creator will submit a written appeal to his or her Academic Director or direct supervisor and to the Intellectual Property Committee.
      • 2. Recommendation of Ownership
        • a. The Intellectual Property Committee will make its recommendation about ownership of the disputed work to the College President within 60 days of receiving the written appeal.
      • 3. President's Determination
        • a. The College President will decide ownership of the disputed work within 30 days of receiving the recommendation of the Intellectual Property Committee.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted November 3, 2009 Dates Revised June 19, 2013
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-1-7.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-1-8: Background Check Policy for Academic and Administrative Faculty

WNC Policy 4-1-8
Procedure: Background Check Policy for Academic and Administrative Faculty
Policy No.: 4-1-8
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President for Human Resources/General Counsel
Policy:

It shall be the policy of WNC to conduct background checks on all new employees hired into faculty positions. This policy shall not apply to non-instructional staff hired on a Letter of Appointment and does not supersede Policy 10-1-5.

  • Section 1: Purpose
    • A. WNC is committed to providing a safe and secure environment for students, faculty, staff and all other constituents. WNC performs due diligence by requiring background checks for all new employees hired into faculty positions. This policy outlines the details of pre-employment post-offer background verification for academic faculty and administrative faculty.
  • Section 2: Application of Policy
    • A. This policy applies to all academic faculty and administrative faculty. This policy does not apply to non-instructional staff hired on a Letter of Appointment and does not supersede Policy 10-1-5. NRS 293B.010 authorizes agencies of the State of Nevada, including the Nevada System of Higher Education, to obtain information on the background and personal history of persons with whom it intends to enter into an employment relationship.
    • B. Definitions
      • 1. "Credit history check" means checking the credit history of the selected applicant or employee. (Federal laws prohibit discrimination against an applicant or employee as a result of bankruptcy.)
      • 2. "Criminal history check" means verifying that the selected applicant or employee does not have any undisclosed criminal history in every jurisdiction where the applicant or employee currently or has formerly resided.
      • 3. "Educational verification" means ensuring the selected applicant or employee possesses all valid educational credentials beyond high school listed on the application, resume or cover letter or otherwise cited by the candidate that qualifies the individual for the position sought.
      • 4. "Employee" is defined as any person hired into an academic faculty and administrative faculty position by Western Nevada College, whether full- or part-time.
      • 5. "License verification" means ensuring the selected applicant or employee possesses all the currently valid licenses listed on the application, resume or cover letter or otherwise cited by the candidate that qualifies the individual for the position sought and verification of any license required for the position, including verification of the disposition of such licenses. This includes any motor vehicle driver licenses required for the associated position.
      • 6. "Limited criminal history check" means verifying that the selected applicant or employee does not have any undisclosed criminal history in the jurisdiction where the applicant or employee currently resides, or where the applicant or employee last resided, if the applicant or employee only recently moved to a location near the college.
      • 7. "Sex and violent offender registry check" means verifying the selected applicant or employee does not have undisclosed convictions of certain sex and violent crimes in every jurisdiction where the applicant or employee currently or has formerly resided.
      • 8. "Adverse information" means facts which are discovered as part of the background check which are unfavorable to the candidate.
  • Section 3: Policy Provisions
    • A. A background check must be completed on all new academic faculty and administrative faculty positions as a condition of employment. Current academic faculty and administrative faculty with no previous background check moving into a new position must complete a background check. A background check will be required of a classified employee converting to a faculty position or a faculty member converting to a classified position. If a background check was conducted within the last calendar year from the new appointment, another background check will not be required. A background check will not be required for internal searches or promotions.
      Human Resources will coordinate the background check with a third party vendor. Depending on the nature of the position, the department may request background information on any of the following information.
      • 1. Educational verification.
      • 2. License verification (Hiring department will verify)
      • 3. Criminal history check
      • 4. Sex and violent offender registry
      • 5. Credit check for certain positions (Appointing authority to determine)
    • B. Foreign nationals who are offered employment into appointed faculty positions will be subject to the following provisions:
      • 1. The verification of education the candidate has cited that qualifies the individual for the position.
      • 2. A criminal history check covering time in the United States if the period of time that the individual has worked in the United States exceeds one year.
      • 3. A criminal history check in the individual's prior countries of residence only if the individual's visa and/or authorization to work in the United States was issued before implementation of the Patriot Act on October 24, 2001. The college will not require that a criminal history check be conducted in the individual's prior countries of residence if the visa or authorization to work was issued or renewed under the provisions of the Patriot Act.
  • Section 4: Use of Background Check Information
    • A. The third party vendor that conducts the background check will provide the results of the check to the Human Resources Office. If the background check reveals adverse information, the Vice President for Human Resources or designee will conduct the initial review of any adverse information. If the adverse information is job related, the Vice President for Human Resources will consult with the hiring authority. The final decision for disqualification/termination from consideration for a position lies with the appointing authority.
  • Section 5: Process and Procedures
    • A. An offer letter of employment must include the following statement: "This offer is contingent on the completion of appropriate background verification which may include criminal history, credit history, sex and violent offender registry, education verification, licensure and employment history to be administered by the Western Nevada College Human Resources Office.”
    • B. A notice on the WNC Human Resources Positions Available web page will inform all applicants that they are subject to a background check which may include: criminal history, credit history, sex and violent offender registry, education verification, licensure and employment history.
    • C. After signed acceptance of the conditional offer of employment, the department will notify Human Resources to initiate a background check. The appointing authority will determine if any additional components (credit history, education verification, licensure, and employment history) of the background check will be performed.
    • D. If the background check indicates adverse information, the vendor will inform Human Resources.
    • E. If circumstances warrant, the faculty member may be allowed to start working before the results are known. If the background check reveals adverse information, the standard review of this information to determine job applicability would occur. The faculty member could be terminated if the conviction was deemed job related.
    • F. Any decision to accept or reject an individual with a conviction is solely at the discretion of Western Nevada College. (All related information will be treated as confidential, and protected as such.)
    • G. All results of criminal and sex and violent offenders' convictions or issues are considered confidential and will be maintained in confidential files within Human Resources.
    • H. The hiring department is responsible for any fees associated with any of the components of the background check process. Human Resources will coordinate payment to the vendor.
    • I. Decisions regarding the withdrawal of an employment offer as a result of a background check may not be appealed by the applicant.
  • Section 6: If Adverse Information Is Reported
    • A. If the background check indicates adverse information regarding criminal background, credit history, licensure or employment verification, the vendor will inform Human Resources. Human Resources will provide a copy of the report to the applicant. (All related information will be treated as confidential, and protected as such.) The applicant will have an opportunity to explain the adverse information or provide additional information.
    • B. The Vice President for Human Resources or designee will evaluate the adverse information to determine if it is job related and has a possible impact on the position.
    • C. Certain types of convictions will automatically preclude hiring individuals into certain positions. For example, individuals with convictions for theft, embezzlement, identity theft or fraud should not be hired with fiduciary responsibilities. Individuals with workplace or domestic violence convictions, crimes of a sexual nature or other behaviors that would be inappropriate in an environment with children and young adults. This list is not inclusive, but illustrative. Other information revealed in background checks, apart from criminal convictions may affect campus employment decisions.
    • D. If the criminal history check reveals convictions which the individual disclosed on the Pre-Employment Certification, Human Resources will review the report with the hiring department and jointly, they will evaluate each conviction, including any additional information the individual provides, before the offer of employment is confirmed or withdrawn. The existence of a conviction does not automatically disqualify an individual from employment. Relevant considerations may include, but are not limited to, the nature and number of the convictions, the amount of time elapsed since conviction, and the relationship a conviction has to the duties and responsibilities of the position.
    • E. If convictions are revealed in the criminal history check which the applicant did not disclose on the Pre-Employment Certification, the offer of employment will be withdrawn and, if employed, the individual will be separated from employment, unless the individual shows that the report is in error. In the event that the results of the background check influences a decision to withdraw an employment offer or terminate employment, Human Resources will consult with the hiring authority for the unit. The final decision lies with the appointing authority. Either the hiring authority or the Vice President for Human Resources can request the decision be referred to the President or designee for final consideration.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted September 10, 2013 Dates Revised
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-1-8.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-1-9: Procedures for the Protection of Children

WNC Policy 4-1-9
Procedure: Procedures for the Protection of Children
Policy No.: 4-1-9
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
  • Section 1: Introduction
    • A. WNC is committed to maintaining a supportive and safe educational environment, one which seeks to enhance the well-being of all members of the WNC community, which includes creating a secure environment for children who may participate in WNC programs or activities, or be present at WNC facilities or events. The WNC procedures for the protection of children are intended for the protection of all children who participate in WNC events or activities for children or who are WNC students.
  • Section 2: Public Events and Venues
    • A. Children are permitted at events and venues open to the public on WNC property. WNC reserves the right to determine whether selected events or venues are appropriate for unescorted or unsupervised children.
  • Section 3: Definitions
    • A. Child - A "child" is anyone under 18 years of age or, if in school, until graduation from high school, and includes children under the age of 18 years who are registered as WNC students. The terms "child", "minor", and "children" are used synonymously in this policy.
    • B. Volunteer - The term "voluntee" means individuals who are working at WNC pursuant to a volunteer agreement approved by WNC's general counsel. For the purposes of this policy, the term "volunteer" does not include a parent or guardian of a child. Parents and guardians, however, should be supervised by appropriate WNC or non-WNC personnel during their participation in WNC sponsored or approved programs and activities.
    • C. Child abuse or Neglect - Child abuse or neglect is defined in accordance with the provisions of NRS 432B.020-NRS 432B.150.
    • D. Program or Activity Involving Children - "Program or activity involving children" applies to programs or activities established by WNC that are specifically created for and intended to involve children, and programs or activities for children sponsored by outside persons or entities which are permitted to take place at WNC facilities. "Program or activity involving children" does not include events (such as concerts, plays, sporting events) or facilities (such as the WNC café or bookstore) that are open to the public. "Program or activity involving children" does not include WNC students who are under the age of 18 who are taking regular classes.
  • Section 4: Policy for the Protection of Children
    • A. Reports of Child Abuse or Neglect by All WNC Personnel - All WNC employees and volunteers who have reasonable cause to believe that child abuse or neglect has occurred at a WNC facility or during WNC programs or activities, must report the suspected abuse or neglect to law enforcement or a child welfare agency as soon as possible and within 24 hours. Retaliation against any individual who makes a report of child abuse or neglect is prohibited.
    • B. Supervision and Protection of Children - All children who participate in WNC programs and activities involving children must be appropriately supervised at all times. A child must be immediately removed from a dangerous situation involving suspected child abuse or neglect or other inappropriate conduct, or conduct which presents a threat to the child's health and safety.
    • C. Policy and Procedure - In order to implement this child protection policy, WNC will take the following steps:
      • 1. In January of every year, the Dean of Student Services shall inventory all children's programs intended to be held in the calendar year and provide the President, Vice President for Academic and Student Affairs (VPASA), the Vice President for Administration/General Counsel (VPA/GC), the Vice President for Finance (VPF), and the Director of Public Safety a list of all children's programs.
      • 2. In January of every year, the vice presidents, the Dean of Student Services, and the Director of Public Safety shall meet to review the security of all children's programs, including considering measures that may be appropriate for the protection of students from sex offenders who are registered with WNC. Such measures may include reviewing class schedules of registered sex offenders to determine whether they relate to or are in close proximity to children's programs and restricting sex offenders’ access to courses and/or the internet.
      • 3. Before WNC approves the use of a WNC facility by any outside person or entity ("applicant"), the applicant shall state, in writing, whether or not the program or activity is a children's program, as defined in this policy. If it is a children's program, WNC shall provide a copy of this procedure and the NSHE policy regarding the protection of children and the applicant shall state in writing the person or entity's procedures for the protection of children. The vice presidents and the Director of Public Safety shall review the information provided and may deny the applicant the use of a WNC facility if the policies or procedures are inadequate.
      • 4. WNC shall identify all WNC mandatory reporters of child abuse pursuant to NRS 432B.220-NRS 432B.250 and shall provide training materials regarding the mandatory reporter requirements upon initial hiring and at least every two years.
      • 5. WNC shall provide a copy of the NSHE Child Protection Polices and the WNC procedure to all employees who supervise or work in programs or activities involving children upon initial hiring and at least every two years.
      • 6. The NSHE Child Protection Polices and WNC's procedures shall be posted on the WNC website with the Division of Child and Family Services toll-free number and/or other law enforcement telephone numbers to receive reports of child abuse or neglect.
      • 7. In the event of a report or complaint of alleged child abuse or neglect, WNC shall conduct an appropriate investigation of the incident(s) giving rise to the report or complaint and provide a confidential notice of such incident(s) to the chancellor and Chair of the Board of Regents. Such investigation may be postponed by the President if such investigation would interfere with any investigation by law enforcement or child protection agency.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted January 14, 2014 Dates Revised
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-1-9.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-2-1: Affirmative Action/Equal Opportunity

WNC Policy 4-2-1
Procedure: Affirmative Action/Equal Opportunity
Policy No.: 4-2-1
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

Western Nevada College, in conformity with the Affirmative Action Policy of the Nevada System of Higher Education and federal law, is guided by the principles that there shall be no difference in the treatment of persons because of race, creed, color, sex, physical challenge, age, national origin, political affiliation, religion, or Vietnam-era or disabled veteran status, gender orientation, and that equal opportunity and access to facilities shall be available to all. This principle is applicable to every member of the Western Nevada College community at every level. This policy applies to, and must be an integral part of, every aspect of personnel policy and practice in the employment, development, advancement, and treatment of all employees and applicants for employment.

Western Nevada College recognizes that as a public agency it has a further commitment: the college is obligated to support federal and state policies which seek to achieve equal opportunity in employment for members of minority groups, women, the physically challenged, or Vietnam-era or disabled veteran. As used in this document, minority groups will be the groups defined in HEW guidelines.

The important concepts are embodied in Equal Employment Opportunity:

1. Nondiscrimination
2. Affirmative Action

Affirmative action requires more than employment neutrality. It requires Western Nevada College to make additional efforts to recruit, employ, retain, and promote qualified women, minorities and physically challenged. The affirmative action concept requires positive action to insure against the perpetuation of benign neutrality in employment practices.

  • Section 1: Policy Compliance
    • A. Western Nevada College declares and reaffirms a policy of equal employment opportunity, equal educational opportunity, and nondiscrimination in the provision of educational and other public services.
      • 1. Equal Employment Opportunity

        The college will make all decisions regarding recruitment, hiring, promotions and all other terms and conditions of employment without discrimination on the basis of race, color, creed or religion, sex, national origin, age, physical challenge, political affiliation, or other factors which cannot be a lawful basis for employment decisions.
      • 2. Affirmative Action in Employment

        The college undertakes a program of affirmative action to which good faith efforts will be directed for achievement of equal opportunity through affirmative action programs.
      • 3. Compliance with Laws

        Western Nevada College undertakes to comply fully with all federal, state, and local laws relating to equal educational opportunity, equal employment opportunity, and affirmative action.
  • Section 2: Responsibility for Implementation
    • A. Ultimate responsibility for equal employment and its full achievement through this affirmative action plan rests with the president of Western Nevada College.
    • B. It is the responsibility of the executive and administrative faculty members at WNC to implement affirmative action and equal opportunity within his or her respective area. Overall programmatic responsibilities shall assure that all employment practices of the college are conducted in a manner, which does not discriminate unlawfully.
    • C. Every member of the Western Nevada College community has the responsibility to become familiar with Affirmative Action and Equal Opportunity.
    • D. Western Nevada College employees, who serve on committee, especially peer review, recruitment, and other personnel committees, shall inform themselves about affirmative action/equal opportunity principles and regulations and apply them in all such deliberations and decisions in which they are involved.
    • E. The part-time position of affirmative action officer will be maintained and its incumbent shall report directly to the president.
      • 1. The affirmative action officer shall have immediate responsibility for implementation of the affirmative action plan; participate in all required governmental reports concerning equal opportunity and affirmative action; collect and present all statistical and other information on reports for the college President and NSHE Board of Regents.
      • 2. Technical and administrative assistance to personnel needing help to meet their responsibilities under the plan.
      • 3. Periodic review of documents relating to the employment process at WNC, e.g., job descriptions, application forms, job announcements, advertisements -- to assure that the impact of their use is not discriminatory against persons protected by law.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted March 1, 1989 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004; March 21, 1995; July 30, 1993
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

NSHE Board of Regents' Meeting Minutes: 11/88; 3/93

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-2-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-3-1: Classified Staff of WNC

WNC Policy 4-3-1
Procedure: Classified Staff of WNC
Policy No.: 4-3-1
Department: Human Resources/General Counsel
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

The classified staff at Western Nevada College (WNC) is governed in accordance with policies and regulations established by the Chapter 284 of the Nevada Administrative Code (NAC), rules for Personnel Administration. The Board of Regents and WNC may establish supplemental policies from time to time.

  • Section 1: Access to NAC
    • A. Access to NAC is available as follows:
      • 1. On-line web access is available via:
        • a. State Personnel at http://dop.nv.gov/
        • b. WNC website, Human Resources section, click on Policies, and then clicking on NAC.
      • 2. Hard copies are available for review in the Human Resources Office, Library Services at Carson and Fallon.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
NAC Code NAC 284

State Administrative Manual

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-3-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-3-2: Recruitment Guidelines for Classified Staff

WNC Policy 4-3-2
Procedure: Recruitment Guidelines for Classified Staff
Policy No.: 4-3-2
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

Classified personnel are State of Nevada employees and recruitment is governed by State Personnel under the Nevada Administrative Code (NAC).

  • Section 1: Introduction
    • A. Requests for classified recruitment are processed by Business Center North (BCN) Human Resources in the order received.
    • B. The timeline for completion may be very lengthy. Therefore, the hiring department will need to plan accordingly.
    • C. The following guidelines are a general overview for classified recruitment and do not include temporary or casual labor, registration, 160 hour and emergency appointments.
  • Section 2: New Positions
    • A. When a new classified position is budgeted, the hiring department should contact the WNC Human Resources (HR) Office as to how to proceed.
      • 1. A memo requesting approval to fill this position also needs to be completed and submitted to the Vice President and President. These written approvals must be received before proceeding.
      • 2. In addition, the hiring department must obtain, from WNC Finance, the correct account, position number and FTE and make sure the budget has been established for this position.
      • 3. A NPD-19 (long or short form) will need to be completed.
      • 4. After all approvals have been received, the memo and NPD-19 should then be forwarded to the WNC HR Office for processing.
    • B. The NPD-19 and supporting forms will be forwarded to BCN Personnel Services, when completed.
      • 1. A study will be conducted which will include comparison with other similar positions; this may include a desk audit and/or interview with the supervisor and others to place that position in the correct classification.
      • 2. When this process is complete, the position then begins the recruitment process.
  • Section 3: Existing Position Vacancy
    • A. When an existing classified position becomes vacant, the department needs to contact the WNC HR Office as to how to proceed.
      • 1. A memo requesting approval to fill this position must be submitted to the Vice President and President for approval. Human Resources must receive these written approvals before proceeding.
      • 2. After the WNC HR Office receives these written approvals, the necessary forms will be forwarded to BCN Personnel Services to begin the recruitment process.
  • Section 4: Recruitment Process
    • A. For some classifications, applications are accepted and kept on file at the WNC HR Office. The hiring department will screen and interview from these applications.
    • B. For most other vacancies, the State will certify an existing list of applicants or a new recruitment will be initiated depending on the type of recruitment, (i.e. open competitive, NSHE or WNC promotional). This process can be very time consuming. The WNC Human Resources Office will try to keep the hiring department updated on where the process is.
    • C. Positions at Grade 23 or above will be announced in accordance with Policy 4-3-5.
    • D. When the recruitment is completed, the hiring department will be provided with a list of certified interviewees.
      • 1. If five or fewer applicants are certified, all applicants are interviewed.
      • 2. If more than five applicants are listed, they will be ranked by a predetermined testing device to determine the five to be interviewed.
      • 3. If the list is unranked, the department may choose to interview any of the applicants off the list.
    • E. The hiring department will contact and schedule all interviews with candidates.
      • 1. Interviewees should be given a reasonable amount of time to come for the interview.
      • 2. The applicant will need to bring a completed State of Nevada application to the interview, as BCN or State Personnel does not provide a copy of the application to the hiring department.
      • 3. No travel expenses are paid.
      • 4. Interview questions should be prepared in writing ahead of interviews. All applicants should be asked the same questions. For assistance, the WNC HR Office and/or Affirmative Action Officer should be contacted.
    • F. After the interviews are completed, a memorandum must be forwarded to the appropriate Vice President and President to request approval for hiring.
      • 1. The rationale for hiring and the application of the candidate should be attached to this request.
      • 2. No offer of employment is to be made without the President's written approval.
    • G. After the approval is received, the department may make an employment offer, and upon acceptance, the hiring department will notify those persons interviewed of the final decision by telephone.
    • H. The hiring department will forward the approved memorandum along with the appointee's completed application and the start date to the WNC HR Office. For each interviewee, the Interview Record for Classified must be completed in detail by the interviewer, along with a list of those on the interview committee, and a copy of the questions asked.
    • I. The WNC HR Office will begin working on the hiring paperwork, once all the necessary materials have been received from the hiring department.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
NAC Code NAC 284
NRS Code NRS 284.150-172

State Administrative Manual

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-3-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-3-3: Reclassifying an Existing Classified Position Guidelines

WNC Policy 4-3-3
Procedure: Reclassifying an Existing Classified Position Guidelines
Policy No.: 4-3-3
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

Reclassifications of existing classified positions are completed upon the written request of the appointing authority, supervisor, or the position incumbent. Please note: An employee has the right to submit an NPD-19 for reclassification without the written approval of the supervisor.

  • Section 1: Procedure
    • A. In order to upgrade or reclassify a classified position, the following is required:
      • 1. The employee and/or supervisor must complete an NPD-19 form along with an updated State of Nevada application. It should then be forwarded through to the supervisor for review and approval. If the position is vacant, the supervisor completes the form. The employee, supervisor, and up the department's chain of command up to the vice president should review and sign off on the NPD-19. The form then is forwarded to the WNC Human Resources Office for review.
      • 2. Human Resources completes a Form 202 (Classified Position Action Form), Reclassification Checklist and any other necessary paperwork. The HR Office reviews and approves as appointing authority. The Budget Office reviews and approves the request.
      • 3. The approved NPD-19 and accompanying paperwork is then forwarded to BCN Human Resources. The position is then reviewed and compared to other positions within the system and state and within the class specifications. If needed, arrangements are made for a desk audit either in-person or by telephone. The audit can consist of an interview with the incumbent, supervisor, and others to gather the necessary information. Once all the information is reviewed, a classification recommendation will be made. This process can sometimes be lengthy and time consuming.
      • 4. When the written notification is received, the necessary paperwork will be done to implement the reclassification, unless the employee plans to appeal. The effective date of the reclassification is the date the NPD-19 is stamped in at BCN Human Resources.
  • Section 2: Appeal Process
    • A. If the employee disagrees with the recommendation, it may be appealed. The employee must file an appeal in writing. The appeal must be filed within 20 working days after the date of receipt of the written notice of action or in compliance with the letter that is sent to employee. The appeal must address the points outlined in the recommendation regarding the proper classification for the position, indicate the points with which the appellant disagrees, and express the reasons why they disagree and is forwarded to the Director of BCN Human Resources. The Director will issue a decision on the appeal.
    • B. If the employee still disagrees with the decision, the appellant or the agency affected by the decision may appeal to the State of Nevada Personnel Commission.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
NRS Code NRS 284.126, NRS 284.130, NRS 284.134, NRS 284.140, NRS 284.152

State Administrative Manual

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-3-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-3-4: Classified Casual Labor Positions

WNC Policy 4-3-4
Procedure: Classified Casual Labor Positions
Policy No.: 4-3-4
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

Classified casual labor positions are intended to meet short-term needs for departments such as registration, summer employment, or temporary replacement for an employee on leave. These appointments are limited to 6 months in any 12-month period.

  • Section 1: Casual Labor
    • A. The following types of casual labor are available:
      • 1. Regular Casual Labor - Limited to 120 working days (approximately six months) in any 12-month pay period regardless of FTE. Regular casual labor positions are filled the same as regular classified positions, requiring recruitment and certification.
      • 2. 160 Hour Special Casual Labor - Limited to 160 cumulative hours or less in a calendar year.
      • 3. Emergency Appointments - Limited to 60 consecutive working days or less regardless of FTE.
      • 4. 1000-Hour Appointment - Limited to 1000 hours in a calendar year and is limited to registration workers and college students carrying one to six credits per semester.
  • Section 2: Procedures
    • A. To establish a casual labor position, the hiring department must complete a Request for Temporary Position form.
      • 1. This form must include the account number and blanket position number and all required signatures
      • 2. The form should be returned to the WNC Human Resources (HR) Office for processing.
      • 3. For questions and assistance, contact the WNC HR office.
    • B. The form is then forwarded to Business Center North (BCN) Personnel Services for final approval.
    • C. After receiving notification, the WNC HR Office will contact the hiring department with the approval and effective date.
    • D. No appointment can be made prior to the effective date.
    • E. The hiring department may appoint any qualified person.
    • F. For regular casual labor positions, refer to Recruitment Guidelines for Classified Positions.
  • Section 3: Benefits
    • A. All casual labor and emergency appointments are eligible to accrue sick leave and annual leave based upon the hours worked.
    • B. When an appointment exceeds six calendar months (such as 160 and 1000 hour appointments), the employee will be eligible either to use or be paid for annual leave hours accrued when terminating.
    • C. Employees working under six months are not eligible to use or be paid for annual leave.
    • D. Casual labor employees are not eligible for retirement benefits, but may be subject to social security and Medicare contributions.
    • E. Any employee who works more than 90 consecutive days at .50 FTE or more may become eligible for health insurance and other benefits at the department's expense.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
NAC Code NAC 284.414
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-3-4.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-3-5: In-House Announcement of Classified Positions

WNC Policy 4-3-5
Procedure: In-House Announcement of Classified Positions
Policy No.: 4-3-5
Department: Human Resources/General Counsel
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

It shall be the policy of WNC to announce all full-time and part-time (.50 FTE or more, grade 23 and above) permanent classified positions open at WNC in a prescribed manner. This policy is in addition to any requirements of posting required by State Personnel.

  • Section 1: Announcement Methods
    • A. The following shall be the minimum announcement methods:
      • 1. WNC e-mail.
      • 2. WNC Job Opportunities web page (www.wnc.edu/jobs) and at other locations designated by the Human Resources Office.
  • Section 2: Announcement
    • A. Each position announcement shall include the minimum information:
      • 1. Position title and grade.
      • 2. Position status, such as full-time, part-time, permanent, grant funded, non-layoff eligible, etc.
      • 3. FTE and/or number of hours per week.
      • 4. Hiring department.
      • 5. Closing date.
      • 6. Where to apply or get further information.
  • Section 3: Length of Announcement
    • A. Each position shall be open for a minimum of fourteen (14) calendar days, if at all possible.
    • B. The fourteen days will be from the date the announcement is placed on ccmail.
    • C. Exceptions shall be noted in the announcement.
  • Section 4: Policy Conflict
    • A. When the WNC recruitment policy is in conflict with State of Nevada recruitment policy, the State of Nevada policy will supersede the WNC policy.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted January 1, 1996 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004; October 1, 1998
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-3-5.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-3-6: Classified to Administrative Faculty Position Change

WNC Policy 4-3-6
Procedure: Classified to Administrative Faculty Position Change
Policy No.: 4-3-6
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

It shall be the policy of WNC to change a position from classified to administrative faculty only with written approval of the college president.

  • Section 1: Request for Change
    • A. A position must perform a variety of professional and administrative duties for a department or unit.
      • 1. A request for a position to change from classified to administrative faculty should be made in writing, and should have approval through the appropriate departmental channels to the college president.
      • 2. The request should include written rationale including reason for change from classified to administrative faculty and the financial impact of such a change.
      • 3. The college president may request additional information in reviewing the proposal.
  • Section 2: Presidential Review
    • A. After reviewing the submitted documentation, the college president shall make the final decision on the request. Should the change be granted:
      • 1. the effective date of the change will begin on the first working day of the month following approval;
      • 2. the existing classified position shall be eliminated on the effective date of the change to administrative faculty.
    • B. Written approval will then be forwarded to the WNC Human Resources Office for processing.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted April 29, 1997 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004; October 28, 1999; October 21, 1997
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-3-6.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-3-7: Overtime for Classified Staff

WNC Policy 4-3-7
Procedure: Overtime for Classified Staff
Policy No.: 4-3-7
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

The federal Fair Labor Standards Act requires that time worked in excess of 40 hours in a week shall be paid or granted compensatory time at the rate of time and one-half for positions designated as non-exempt. NRS 284.180 and NAC 284.242 through 284.254 govern overtime for classified employees.

  • Section 1: Procedures
    • A. Overtime must be kept to an absolute minimum. All overtime must be approved in advance by the appointing authority or his/her designee, unless an unpredictable emergency prevents prior approval or communication.
    • B. The preferred method of compensating overtime is cash payment. Departments must have the funds budgeted in order for the overtime to be paid.
    • C. The method of compensating overtime for classified employees for either cash payment or compensatory time must be agreed to before working the overtime. This agreement is recorded on the Report of Earned Overtime Form.
    • D. Compensatory time shall be scheduled by the appropriate supervisor and should be within a reasonable amount of time. An employee must exhaust any compensatory time before using available annual leave.
    • E. Classified staff may not accrue compensatory time in excess of 80 hours. Overtime liability in excess of the 80 hours must be paid in cash.
    • F. Compensatory time below 80 hours may be paid at the discretion of the appointing authority.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted February 23, 2003 Dates Revised September 2, 2008
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
NAC Code NAC 284.242, NAC 284.254
NRS Code NRS 284.180

Fair Labor Standards Act

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-3-7.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-3-8: Classified Tuition Reimbursement

WNC Policy 4-3-8
Procedure: Classified Tuition Reimbursement
Policy No.: 4-3-8
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

A maximum of six credits per semester will be reimbursed through this policy. A maximum of four credits per semester can be taken as job required. The remaining two credits or all six credits may be taken as job related or career/personal development courses. Reimbursement will be made after the courses are successfully completed with a grade of "C" or above (or "pass" in the case of pass/fail courses). Courses taken for audit are not eligible for tuition reimbursement. If the employee does not pass the class with a "C" or above, he/she will be responsible for all costs associated with the class.

  • Section 1: Tuition Reimbursement
    • A. All classified staff members are encouraged to take courses that are both job required, job related or for their own enrichment.
      • 1. Courses taken by classified employees are subject to the provision of NRS 284.343 and NAC 284.482 through 284.522.
      • 2. Classified employees must be .50 FTE or more and have been employed as a classified staff member at least six months before the start of the semester.
    • B. Job required classes are to be taken only at Western Nevada College. Job related and career/personal development classes may be taken at any NSHE institution.
    • C. The completed "Request for Tuition Reimbursement" form must be approved by the immediate supervisor, the appropriate dean or director, and the division vice president.
      • 1. This form is then forwarded to the WNC Human Resources Office.
      • 2. The form should be approved and submitted before the first class meeting in order to receive reimbursement.
    • D. WNC, Other NSHE institution courses:
      • 1. All NSHE institution courses: After HR receives the approved tuition reimbursement and it is approved by the HR Office, HR will give a copy of the form to the Business Office to defer the tuition of the course at WNC until the end of the semester or to process tuition payment at other NSHE institutions.
      • 2. Courses must be successfully completed with a "C" or above and the employee has up to two weeks following the end of the semester to provided the WNC Human Resources Office with proof of completion. If the course is not passed with a "C" or better, the employee must reimburse the full amount for the course following the repayment agreement listed on the tuition reimbursement form.
    • E. If payment for books is approved, the employee will be responsible for paying for the books and providing the WNC Human Resources Office with the receipt. Book fees will be reimbursed along with the course fees after successful completion.
  • Section 2: Job Required Courses at WNC
    • A. Tuition will be reimbursed up to four credits per semester, providing the course is required to complete the current job.
    • B. Job required courses include those courses needed to enable the employee to meet the standards of performance for the current position; and those that would be required to update the employee's skills, knowledge and techniques in the current position.
    • C. The immediate supervisor, the dean or director, and the division vice president must approve the taking of any job-required courses by employees under their jurisdiction.
    • D. Time off for the approved classes will be on "other paid leave" status and will not require that the time taken from work be made up.
    • E. Registration and related fees (i.e. per-credit-hour fees, lab fees and required books) will be paid.
  • Section 3: Job Related Courses at any NSHE Institution
    • A. Courses may be taken at any NSHE institution.
      • 1. Tuition will be reimbursed up to six credits per semester for courses that relate to the responsibilities of the current position and would be beneficial to the operation of the department, but are not necessarily required to meet the standards of performance.
      • 2. The immediate supervisor, the dean or director and the division vice president must approve the taking of any courses by employees under their jurisdiction. Registration and related fees (i.e. per credit hour fees, lab fees, and required books) will be paid.
  • Section 4: Career/Personal Development Courses
    • A. Courses may be taken at any NSHE Institution.
      • 1. Tuition will be reimbursed up to six (6) credits per semester for other credit courses that a classified employee may be interested in taking that would not qualify as job required or job related.
      • 2. These classes may include courses toward completion of a degree, career development, or personal enrichment.
      • 3. Community Services classes are not eligible for reimbursement.
      • 4. The immediate supervisor, the dean or director, and the division vice president must approve the course(s) for reimbursement.
      • 5. Registration and related fees (i.e. per credit hour fees and lab fees) will be paid.
      • 6. Fees for books and other expenses will not be reimbursed.
  • Section 5: Time Off Guidelines
    • A. When registering for job related or career/personal development classes, these guidelines are to be followed:
      • 1. Any release time to take classes during the work period must be charged to annual leave or compensatory time. Alternatively, the employee's supervisor may approve a variable work schedule to allow the employee to make up the time through rescheduling of the workday.
      • 2. A one-half to one-hour meal break must be allotted to each employee.
      • 3. Breaks are not cumulative and cannot be combined with the lunch hour and/or beginning or end of the workday.
  • Section 6: Exceptions
    • A. Any exceptions to this education policy will be made only with the advance written recommendation of the appropriate dean/director and with the approval of the division vice president.
    • B. An individual department may elect to pay for additional courses, seminars, workshops, etc. for their employees. These fees are to be paid by each department.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted February 1, 1994 Dates Revised January 18, 2011; November 4, 2008; September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004; April 20, 1999; March 26, 1996
NSHE and NRS Codes
NRS Code NRS 284.343, NRS 284.482, NRS 284.522
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-3-8.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-4-1: Part-Time Faculty Fee Waiver

WNC Policy 4-4-1
Procedure: Part-Time Faculty Fee Waiver
Policy No.: 4-4-1
Policy:

Guidelines for fee waivers for WNC part-time professional faculty are outlined in the Codification of Board Policy, Title 4, Chapter 18, Section 6 of the NSHE Board of Regents Handbook.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-4-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-4-2: Workload for Part-Time Faculty

WNC Policy 4-4-2
Procedure: Workload for Part-Time Faculty
Policy No.: 4-4-2
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

The purpose of an academic workload policy is to provide the following:

  • A guide that places students' educational and developmental needs as our highest priority while insuring the best use of institutional resources.
  • A measure of institutional efficiency to external audiences
  • Equitable treatment of all academic faculty
  • Impetus for institutional development
  • A measure of financial accountability
  • An equitable measure of workload
  • Section 1: Responsibilities of Part-Time Instructional Faculty
    • A. As stated in Board of Regents Handbook, Title 4, Chapter 3, Section 3, number 3, instructional faculty members are expected to teach; develop curriculum; conduct other instructional activities, including advising, grading, and preparing for classes; maintain currency in their academic discipline;...
    • B. A part-time academic faculty member
      • 1. Reports to appropriate Academic Director.
      • 2. Works cooperatively within the learning community.
      • 3. Provides instruction:
        • a. Teaches students in assigned classes in accordance with official course outlines.
        • b. Responds to the needs of students as learners and consumers by providing high quality educational programs and services.
        • c. Prepares individual course syllabi before instruction begins and distributing them to students and to Academic Director on or before the first day of class.
        • d. May be asked to select textbooks for classes.
        • e. Identifies supplies, equipment, and other learning resources needed to support instruction and makes recommendations to Academic Director.
        • f. Maintains accurate class records of student grades and rosters.
      • 4. Availability to students:
        • a. Provides students with a way to contact them for help through e-mail, telephone, or by holding scheduled office hours.
        • b. Should an emergency or illness require class cancellation, then the faculty member and the Academic Director shall work collaboratively to arrange for class make up, faculty substitute, or alternate student assignments.
      • 5. Professional development:
        • a. Engages in professional development activities, maintains currency in assigned teaching fields, and keeps informed on new approaches to instruction.
        • b. Maintains occupational/technical/professional credentials, if applicable, with the support of college resources.
      • 6. Promotes college educational programs and services to our communities.
      • 7. The rights, duties, obligations, and privileges of part-time faculty members contained in the Part-time Faculty Manual are incorporated herein by this reference.
  • Section 2: Part-Time Instructional Faculty Workload
    • A. Contracts/Schedules
      • 1. Part-time academic faculty are hired through Letters of Appointment (LOA) on a per semester basis.
    • B. Instructional Loads for Part-time Faculty
      • 1. Part-time academic faculty are restricted by the Board of Regents to less than 10 credits of instruction or 19.5 contact hours per semester.
      • 2. Faculty teaching more than 9.9 credit hours or 19.5 contact hours per semester but less than full time will be assigned a workload proportional to a full-time contract.
      • 3. Part-time faculty teaching one-credit science labs, or other one-credit courses where the contact hours equal that of a 3-credit lecture class are compensated by the formulas given in Section 2,C,3, not credits. This should not impact the maximum of 9.9 credit hour/ 19.5 contact hour load as stated above.
      • 4. There shall be a reduced class size of 8 students for nursing clinical hours.
      • 5. Lecture hours are 50 minutes in duration. Practicum, lab, and clinical hours are 60 minutes in duration.
      • 6. Faculty may be asked to teach both days, evenings and weekends as well as in different campus/rural center locations.
      • 7. Class scheduling is driven by the needs of full-time, degree-seeking students. If a division offers a degree, the division undertakes an obligation to assure that students can complete the degree in a timely manner by attending college full time. Academic Director's will consult with lead faculty, full-time faculty members in the discipline, the academic vice president, the director of institutional research, and the director of admissions and records to develop schedules of class offerings that meet student needs. Academic Director's, in collaboration with faculty members, will then develop appropriate courses and loads so that teaching faculty meet student needs.
      • 8. Any arrangement accepted by the instructor, recommended by the Academic Director, and approved by the academic vice president in consultation with the dean shall be a part of this workload policy if the agreement is written and enacted prior to the service being rendered.
      • 9. Part-time faculty may be released from their appointment at the discretion of the Academic Director for any of the following reasons:
        • a. The teaching load of a full time faculty member not teaching the minimum expected load as stated in Section II.B.1 of the Academic Faculty Workload Policy needs to be adjusted by the addition of this class.
        • b. Enrollment in the class is not high enough.
        • c. Other reasons as determined by the Academic Director to be in the interest of the college.
    • C. Reimbursement Formulas
      • 1. Instructional contact-hour definitions:
        • a. (LE) Lecture: A lecture requires regular preparation of instructional material and student assignments and includes regular written work assignments graded by the classroom faculty member.
        • b. (LA) Laboratory: A laboratory requires regular preparation of laboratory assignments and equipment or materials, continual faculty oversight and interaction with students, and regular written work assignments graded by the laboratory faculty member.
        • c. (S) Studio: A studio requires regular preparation of studio assignments and continual oversight and interaction with the students by the faculty member.
        • d. (P) Occupational Practice: An occupational practicum requires regular preparation of practice assignments and continual faculty oversight and interaction with students.
        • e. (C) Clinical: A clinical experience requires regular preparation and grading of clinical assignments, including written work, and continual oversight and interaction with the students.
        • f. Note: The Academic Director is charged with recommending to the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs the instructional units for any new class. This determination will be based on information provided in the course description and syllabus at the time of course approval.
      • 2. Part-time faculty pay rate will equal the full time faculty overload rate.
      • 3. LOA Reimbursement Formulas for part-time Faculty:
        The calculation below is based on a 15-week semester.
        • a. Part-time faculty reimbursement for lecture classes: Number of credits X per credit rate
        • b. Part-time faculty reimbursement for courses that are lecture + lab (3+3 as defined in the catalog): (Lecture contact hours X per credit rate) + (Number of contact hours for lab X 15/18 per credit rate): Note that 15/18 is 83.3%.
        • c. Part-time faculty reimbursement for lab, studio, and practicum classes with no formal lecture as defined in the catalog: (Contact hours) X (15/18 per credit rate)
        • d. Part-time faculty reimbursement for physical activity classes: (Contact hours) X (15/18 per credit rate)
        • e. Part-time faculty in professional programs such as nursing may be reimbursed on a per hour basis by agreement with the Academic Director and the Vice President of Academic Affairs.
        • f. Part-time faculty are reimbursed for serving on Academic Faculty Senate at the rate of $70 per meeting based on attendance.
  • Section 3: Stipends
    • A. Any instructional stipend normally paid to full time faculty will also be paid to part-time faculty with the same assignment. This includes distance education, extraordinarily high enrollment, as well as others that may be defined.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised June 19, 2013; December 1, 2009; September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-4-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-4-3: Unauthorized Letters of Appointment

WNC Policy 4-4-3
Procedure: Unauthorized Letters of Appointment
Policy No.: 4-4-3
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

All letters of appointment must be approved by the WNC President or duly appointed designee.

  • Section 1: Guidelines
    • A. All offers of employment must:
      • 1. Be cleared with the appropriate Academic Director, Dean, and/or Vice President.
      • 2. Be offered only by the president or his duly appointed designee.
    • B. No promise of an employment term or condition should be made that will not subsequently be stated in the professional employment contract.
    • C. No one is authorized to promise continued employment.
    • D. No one is authorized to make any promises concerning tenure.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised June 20, 2013; September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NRS Code NRS 396

NSHE memo from Donald Klasic, General Counsel to all NSHE Presidents

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-4-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-4-4: Part Time Faculty Evaluation Guidelines

WNC Policy 4-4-4
Procedure: Part Time Faculty Evaluation Guidelines
Policy No.: 4-4-4
Department: Instruction
Contact: Academic Director
Policy:

Consistent with the WNC Part-time Faculty Information Guide, all part-time faculty members will be evaluated in the areas of course organization, classroom management, communication skills, facilitating learning, and technical skills.

Role of Administrator
Evaluations will be conducted by the dean of instruction or designee, and should include classroom observation, written evaluation based upon previously determined criteria, discussion with the faculty member, and response and signature of the faculty member verifying knowledge of the evaluation's contents. The signature does not confer a faculty member's agreement with its contents.

Role of Students
Students in each class taught by part-time faculty members will have the opportunity to complete evaluation forms.

Timeline
The first evaluation for new part time faculty will take place on or about the middle of the semester. Evaluations for continuing part time faculty will be conducted between the 4th and 12th week of the semester. Whether it is administrative evaluation or peer observation, both the evaluator/observer and the faculty member will set the date(s) of the observation and any follow-up meetings. The dean of instruction or designee reserves the right to conduct more than one administrative evaluation per academic year. 20% of all part-time faculty members will be evaluated each academic year by the dean of instruction or designee.

Criteria
Each division should determine specific criteria to be met by part-time faculty. Establishment of these criteria should include input from full and part-time faculty and the Academic Director. These criteria will be provided by the Academic Director to each new part-time faculty hired.

PART-TIME FACULTY EVALUATION FORM


NAME ________________________________________________
 
ACADEMIC YEAR ________________________________________________
 
DEPARTMENT ________________________________________________
 
DATE ________________________________________________


1. Student evaluations collected in the following courses (list titles/semesters). Attach a copy of the summary sheet for each student evaluation.




2. Peer/supervisory evaluations obtained from: (list all sources).




3. Division Chair's evaluation, including nature of evidence evaluated.




4. Comments (if appropriate):




________________________________________________________________________
Faculty Member Signature Date
 
 
________________________________________________________________________
(Print Name of Division Chair) (Signature of Division Chair) Date
 

________________________________________________________________________
(Signature of Dean)
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted November 23, 2004 Dates Revised June 20, 2013; September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-4-4.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-4-5: Administrative Faculty Letter of Appointment Policy

WNC Policy 4-4-5
Procedure: Administrative Faculty Letter of Appointment Policy
Policy No.: 4-4-5
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

This policy sets forth the method by which administrative faculty (.50 FTE and above) at Western Nevada College may assume LOA assignments. These assignments are not part of the written position description and are above the normal professional duties. Any assignment must be in accordance with NSHE Board of Regents Handbook provisions and WNC Bylaws.

  • Section 1: Teaching Classes or Accepting Assignments.
    • A. WNC administrative faculty may assume LOA assignments at WNC or at other NSHE institutions (for example teaching classes) that fall outside of their regular work assignments. However, the College must address the impact on their department and written approval must be obtained from the supervisor and Vice President.
      • 1. If the assignment is outside the hours of the employee's normal work day, the employee may be compensated at the standard rate appropriate for the assignment, and only with their supervisor's approval. The employee will perform all LOA duties (preparing, meeting with students, etc.) outside the normal work day.
      • 2. If the assignment is during the employee's normal work day, the employee may:
        • a. With approval of the supervisor, the employee may take annual leave for time spent during the normal working day for the additional assignment. Compensation will be at the standard part-time faculty or applicable rate.

          -OR-

        • b. With the approval of the supervisor, the employee may take an additional assignment during the normal work day without additional compensation.
      • 3. If an employee agrees to accept an assignment and receive no compensation, they may use the assignment as part of their college service. Paid assignments will not be viewed as service.
      • 4. Full-time administrative faculty will be limited to six instructional units per semester or eight hours per week on average for non-instructional assignments.
  • Section 2: Notification and Approval
    • A. Written approval from the supervisor and appropriate vice president must be obtained before the employee agrees to an assignment.
  • Section 3: Exceptions
    • A. The dean level and above are excluded from this policy.
    • B. It is understood that the terms of this policy can be changed or altered only with the written approval of the College President.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted September 19, 2006 Dates Revised December 1, 2009; September 2, 2008; October 5, 2006

WNC Bylaws

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-4-5.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-5-1-1: Recruitment and Interview Expense

WNC Policy 4-5-1-1
Procedure: Recruitment and Interview Expense
Policy No.: 4-5-1-1
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

This policy outlines the candidate reimbursement process for professional search vacancies.

  • Section 1: Recruitment for State Funded Positions
    • A. Recruitment for WNC professional full-time (.50 FTE or above) positions shall follow Hiring Academic and Administrative Faculty in the WNC Policy and Procedures Manual. Three-deep reference checks must be completed before inviting a candidate to campus for an interview. Once this process is complete and candidates are selected, expenses will be paid as follows:
      • 1. The WNC Interview and Recruiting Account will pay for the following:
        • a. Printing, postage, and distribution of announcement information including but not limited to the position announcements, labels and postcards for mailings
        • b. Mailing applicant packets and follow-up correspondence including postage, envelopes and stationary
        • c. Position announcements in the Reno Gazette Journal, Nevada Appeal and other media depending on the geographic location of the position and other institutional needs as identified by the Human Resources office.
    • B. The hiring department will be responsible for paying the following:
      • 1. At the direction of the hiring department, additional advertising may be done. This includes advertisement in other media not addressed above.
  • Section 2: Interviewing Expenses for State Funded Positions
    • A. The screening committee will follow the guidelines in Hiring Academic and Administrative Faculty in the WNC Policy and Procedures Manual for interviewing candidates for professional positions.
      • 1. The hiring department will be responsible for completing all travel claims submitted with all required receipts.
      • 2. The travel expenses will be paid to the interviewees from the Interview and Recruiting Account with the following guidelines:
        • a. The applicant may be reimbursed for traveling expenses in accordance with State Travel Regulations and WNC policy; limited to three applicants per search but additional applicants may be added at the discretion of the President.
        • b. Travel expenses will not be paid to interviewees living within a 75-mile radius of the interviewing campus.
        • c. No reimbursement may be made to an applicant who has been offered the position and declined.
    • B. Guidelines for Travel Reimbursement

      Description Reimbursement Policy Additional Requirements
      Airfare Actual cost (coach/business class only) Receipts required
      Hotel Actual cost per below per day (2 days maximum) Receipts required
      Auto Rental Actual cost up to $ 40.00 per day (2 days maximum) Receipts required
      Parking Actual cost up to $ 20.00 per day (2 days maximum) Receipts required
      Food Actual cost up to GSA limits - see Note below (2 day maximum) No receipts required
      Notes
      • Federal rates published by the U.S. General Services Administration (GSA), determines reimbursement rates for hotel and per diem rates (see www.gsa.gov).
  • Section 3: Expenses for Grant Funded Positions
    • A. Professional grant funded positions (.50 FTE or above) shall be recruited following Hiring Academic and Administrative Faculty in the WNC Policy and Procedures Manual and following the above guidelines.
      • 1. The vice president of the recruiting department is responsible for all expenses in the recruitment of these positions.
      • 2. If there are no funds allocated in the grant for the position(s), another funding source must be identified prior to the search initiation.
      • 3. The Interviewing and Recruitment Account will not pay for recruiting expenses for grant positions.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted May 1, 1989 Dates Revised September 10, 2013; September 2, 2008; December 1, 2007; May 11, 2004; April 1, 1996
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-5-1-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-5-1-2: Hiring Academic and Administrative Faculty

WNC Policy 4-5-1-2
Procedure: Hiring Academic and Administrative Faculty
Policy No.: 4-5-1-2
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President for Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

This policy sets forth the method by which academic and administrative faculty (.50 FTE and above) at Western Nevada College are selected for employment. All searches will be conducted in accordance with the NSHE Board of Regents Handbook provisions, WNC Bylaws and the policies and procedures of Affirmative Action.

  • Section 1: Notification
    • A. The hiring department submits a request to initiate the search process in the applicant tracking system.
    • B. The president will offer the opportunity to nominate members to the screening committee (herein referred to as the committee) from Academic and Administrative faculty senates. The composition of the committee should include no less than five members with the majority representing the area where the position reports, but with at least one other WNC faculty and staff member, and may include community and other NSHE staff.
    • C. The president appoints all committee members and designates a temporary chair to call the first meeting. The chair should be the appropriate supervisor in the area of the vacancy, such as Academic Director, dean, or vice president, if possible. The president notifies the committee members in writing of their appointment.
    • D. The hiring department is notified of the approval to begin the search process.
    • E. A copy of the letters is sent to the Human Resources (HR) office.
  • Section 2: Recruitment and Screening
    • A. Academic Faculty
      • 1. The Academic Director will instruct the division/department members to develop position requirements consistent with the qualifications, experience, and duties that are required for the position.
    • B. Administrative Faculty
      • 1. The president and/or appropriate vice president will develop, with the assistance of the department, the position requirements consistent with the qualifications, experience, and duties that are required for this position.
    • C. The chair is responsible for having each screening committee member complete a confidentiality/nondisclosure form and send the originals to the HR office.
    • D. The committee shall meet and review the position requirements in accordance with the qualifications, experience, and duties that are required for this position. The hiring department submits the approved job announcement to the appropriate dean, vice president or president, depending on the position, for approval via the applicant tracking system.
    • E. Upon approval, HR reviews and opens the position.
    • F. All positions will be open for a minimum of 30 calendar days.
      • 1. The committee may approve a longer search period.
      • 2. The position announcement will state the date that the committee will begin reviewing applications (the 30 day minimum date or longer), and those applicants who have submitted an application by that date will receive full consideration.
      • 3. The Recruitment and Interview Expense Policy in the WNC Policy and Procedures Manual will be followed for mailing and advertising procedures and expenses.
    • G. At the end of the 30-day search period, the HR Office will grant search committee members access to view applications in the applicant tracking system.
    • H. The chair shall establish a reasonable date for committee members to review the applications. The committee will then meet to decide on the finalists for telephone interviews.
    • I. Telephone interviews are required before bringing any finalists to campus for interviews. As a courtesy during the telephone interview, the candidate should be informed that, if they are recommended to be brought to campus for inperson interviews, reference checks will be completed before they are scheduled for interview.
    • J. After telephone interviews are completed, reference checking on those candidates who are being considered for in-person interviews will be completed. Reference checking must be completed before interviews are scheduled. The chair should assure that applicants have signed the Reference Release Form for Professional Positions. The committee will complete "three-deep" reference checks. Three-deep checks mean that at least two committee members will speak with references for each candidate at least three levels including the first reference they contact.
    • K. The hiring department will contact and arrange to bring the candidates to campus for in-person interviews.
      • 1. This will include scheduling meeting times for the college president and vice president(s) to meet with the candidates.
      • 2. Interviewees should be given a reasonable amount of time to make travel arrangements for the interview.
      • 3. Travel reimbursement will conform to Recruitment and Interview Expense Policy in the WNC Policy and Procedures Manual.
      • 4. The Recruitment and Interview Expense Policy will be provided to candidates prior to scheduling their on-campus interviews.
    • L. Interview questions shall be prepared in writing by the committee prior to the interview.
    • M. Once interviews are completed, the committee may choose to do further reference checks on the finalists. This would be in addition to the previous reference check done before the interview process.
  • Section 3: Recommendation
    • A. Immediately after the interview process is completed, the committee will invite the appropriate dean, vice president and the president to the committee meeting for the committee's discussion concerning the qualifications, strengths, and weaknesses of the final candidates and the committee's recommendations. The vice president will make a recommendation to the president for final approval and signature.
    • B. Upon approval by the president, the appropriate vice president shall contact the selected person and confirm acceptance.
    • C. The vice president will complete the hiring proposal in the applicant tracking system.
    • D. After the person has accepted the position, the chair will call those persons interviewed and inform them of the decision. The HR office will follow-up the phone calls with letters, informing all applicants that the position has been filled.
    • E. For each applicant, the chair completes an Application Review/Interview Record.
    • F. It is the responsibility of the chair to follow-up to make sure all search requirements are completed including all written approvals before the process is deemed completed.
  • Section 4: Irregularities
    • A. The Affirmative Action officer or chair shall report any problems during the search and selection process to the college president.
  • Section 5: Exceptions
    • A. If at any time during the search process, there is a consensus; either by the committee and/or vice president/president that the applicant pool is insufficient, a decision will be made on how to proceed with the search. The administration agrees to support this decision as long as the reasons are not discriminatory.
    • B. It is understood that the terms of this policy can be changed or altered only with the written approval of the college president.
    • C. In accordance with Board of Regents Handbook, Title 4, Chapter 8, Section 7.2, the institutional president or chancellor may waive the search requirement where he or she determines the waiver to be in the best interests of the institution or System unit.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted November 26, 1998 Dates Revised June 20, 2013; September 2, 2008; September 18, 2007; May 8, 2007; December 20, 2005; May 11, 2004; November 19, 2002; January 29, 2002; January 25, 2000
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

WNC Bylaws

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-5-1-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-5-1-3: Internal Searches

WNC Policy 4-5-1-3
Procedure: Internal Searches
Policy No.: 4-5-1-3
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

This policy sets forth the search and selection utilizing an internal search process to fill professional full-time (50% or more) academic or administrative faculty position vacancies.

  • Section 1: Definition
    • A. An internal search is defined as opening a professional full time (50% FTE or more) academic or administrative faculty vacancy to qualified candidates who are employed full time (50% or more) at Western Nevada College (WNC), and have already gone through a WNC external search process.
  • Section 2: Notification
    • A. If, after reviewing the minimum qualifications for the position, the supervising administrator determines that there is at least one qualified internal candidate and there is a need for an internal search, a memorandum would be initiated to the President recommending approval. The memo should explain the rationale of conducting an internal search versus an external search (Refer to hiring Academic and Administrative Faculty Policy in the WNC Policies and Procedures Manual). The College President has final approval.
    • B. If an internal search is approved, the search committee will be established pursuant to college bylaws.
  • Section 3: Recruitment and Screening
    • A. The supervising administrator making the recommendation may not serve on the search committee.
    • B. The Committee shall meet, develop and approve the requirements in accordance with the qualifications, experience, and duties for the vacant position.
    • C. The position announcement will be forwarded to the Human Resources Office for review and processing.
    • D. All positions will be open for a minimum of 14 days.
    • E. Human Resources will notify the college community by e-mail, and will post the position announcement on the WNC HR Job Opportunities web page.
    • F. Applicants will be asked to submit a cover letter, detailed resume, names and addresses of three current references and the Pre-employment Information Form to the Human Resources Office by the deadline date. The applicants may be asked for additional information or written approval to review their Personnel file by the committee chairperson.
    • G. The Human Resources Office will have the resumes available as soon as possible after the posted deadline date.
      • 1. The chairperson should check with the Human Resources Office before scheduling meetings with the Committee.
    • H. The chair of the committee shall not call the next meeting for a minimum of five working days after the applications have been distributed without the committee's approval.
    • I. Irregularities. Any irregularities shall be reported to the college president by the Affirmative Action Officer or committee chair.
  • Section 4: Recommendation
    • A. The search committee chair will advise the appropriate vice president in writing of their final recommendation.
      • 1. The vice president will review and, if recommending approval, forward the recommendation on to the President for final approval and signature.
      • 2. The final approval will be sent to the Human Resources Office and to the chair of the search committee.
      • 3. NO OFFER OF EMPLOYMENT SHALL BE MADE UNTIL THE REQUIRED APPROVALS ARE OBTAINED.
    • B. Upon approval from the President, the vice president shall contact the selected person and confirm acceptance.
    • C. After the person has been chosen and has accepted the position, the committee chair will inform the other candidates of the decision. The Human Resources Office will follow-up the phone calls with letters, if necessary, informing all applicants that the position has been filled.
    • D. Should the recommended candidate refuse the position, the Chair shall recommend another candidate from those interviewed or recommend that an external search process begin.
    • E. For each applicant, an Application Review/Interview Record form must be completed in detail by the chairperson of the Committee and returned with the resumes to the Human Resources Office. It is the responsibility of the chair to follow-up to make sure all search requirements are completed including all written approvals before the process is deemed completed.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted April 25, 2000 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-5-1-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-5-1-4: Emergency Appointment of Professional Staff

WNC Policy 4-5-1-4
Procedure: Emergency Appointment of Professional Staff
Policy No.: 4-5-1-4
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

It shall be the policy of WNC to approve emergency appointments for professional staff on a limited basis. These appointments will be for one semester minimum and will not exceed one year. For the purpose of this policy, emergency appointments and temporary appointments are the same.

  • Section 1: Definitions
    • A. If at all possible, vacant positions should be filled in accordance with policies set forth in the WNC Policy and Procedures Manual.
      • 1. When the normal policy cannot be followed due to such things as: sabbatical leave, leave without pay, last minute resignation, change in assignment, fluctuating enrollment, death or illness, or funding not available until shortly before or after the semester begins, the need to fill vacancies promptly with quality personnel obviously takes precedence over strict conformance to normal recruitment procedures.
      • 2. In these cases, an emergency appointment may be requested.
  • Section 2: Steps
    • A. To the greatest extent possible, provisions should be made for filling positions on an emergency basis, in a timely manner, but at the same time extend an equal chance for all interested to apply. When this situation arises, the following should be observed:
      • 1. The Vice President shall notify, by memorandum, the college president requesting approval for an emergency appointment.
      • 2. This memo shall include the rationale that makes the emergency appointment necessary, title and brief description of the duties of the position, type of appointment (A or B Contract), length of appointment, and financial support.
    • B. If the President approves this request in writing, the memo will then be forwarded to the Human Resources office before making the final appointment. In addition, the following will be provided to HR: salary amount, FTE, account number, position number.
    • C. Where an employee on a letter of appointment goes over one-half time or greater during the semester for more than three consecutive months, the employee may be placed on a Letter of Appointment with Benefits (LOB) or contract depending on the situation.
    • D. The employment contract will contain a clause that pertains to the conditions and limitations of the emergency appointment.
  • Section 3: Continuation
    • A. It is understood that an emergency appointment can be extended at the College President's written approval.
    • B. If this position continues, a national search will be required by the president.
    • C. In the event that the president chooses to waive a national search, the president shall so inform the chancellor and college council.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004; November 1, 2003; October 1, 1998
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-5-1-4.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-5-1-5: Professional Leave

WNC Policy 4-5-1-5
Procedure: Professional Leave
Policy No.: 4-5-1-5
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

Professional employees are entitled to leave as designated in the rules and regulations outlined in Title 4, Chapter 3 of the Nevada System of Higher Education Board of Regents Handbook.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008
NSHE and NRS Codes
NRS Code NRS 284.345

NSHE Code: Title 4, Chapter 3, Section 8, Leave of Absence without Salary; Title 4, Chapter 3, Section 9, Sabbatical Leave; Title 4, Chapter 3 Section 10, Administrative Leave; Title 4, Chapter 3, Section 12, Sick Leave; Title 4, Chapter 3, Section 13, Annual Leave; Title 4, Chapter 3, Section 14, FMLA; Title 4, Chapter 3, Section 15, Military Leave; Title 4, Chapter 3, Section 16, Judicial Leave
NSHE Board of Regents' Meeting Minutes: 1/91; 10/93; 4/02
Federal Law: 38 U.S.C. Section 2021

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-5-1-5.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-5-1-6: Grant-In-Aid, Professional and Dependents

WNC Policy 4-5-1-6
Procedure: Grant-In-Aid, Professional and Dependents
Policy No.: 4-5-1-6
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

Regulations covering grant-in-aid for professional staff and dependents can be found in the NSHE Board of Regents Handbook, Title 4 Codification of Board Policy Statements, Chapter 18, Section 5.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-5-1-6.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-5-1-7: Emeritus Status

WNC Policy 4-5-1-7
Procedure: Emeritus Status
Policy No.: 4-5-1-7
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

It shall be the policy of WNC to evaluate each request for recommending to the Board of Regents emeritus status for a retiring faculty member based upon an established set of standards outlined herein.

  • Section 1: Definition
    • A. Faculty member, for this policy, means both academic and administrative faculty.
  • Section 2: Request
    • A. Upon notification that a WNC faculty member of at least ten years standing will be retiring from WNC, the awarding of emeritus status will be considered, following established procedures.
    • B. Any notification of retirement by a WNC faculty member eligible for emeritus status received after April 15 will be considered during the next academic year.
    • C. A request for supporting documentation from the faculty member under consideration for emeritus may be made.
  • Section 3: Process
    • A. Upon notification of a retirement from WNC of a faculty member eligible for emeritus status, the human resources office will notify the college president, the chair of the academic faculty senate and the chair of the administrative faculty senate that a retirement notification has been received and a consideration for emeritus status will be automatic.
    • B. There shall be one emeritus committee who will consider emeritus (faculty) submitted prior to April 15 of each academic year. (Emeritus committee discussions will remain confidential.) Appointment shall be as follows:
      • 1. College president: One (1) appointment
      • 2. Academic Faculty Senate: shall recommend four (4) appointments; three (3) of which will consist of the members of the academic faculty senate sabbatical committee.
      • 3. Administrative Faculty Senate: shall recommend two (2) appointments to the college president.
    • C. The college president shall make appointments from those names recommended.
    • D. The college president shall appoint the temporary chair of the Committee, who will call the first meeting. At that meeting, committee members shall elect the chair.
    • E. The committee may request materials from the employee, his/her supervisor, or any WNC office.
    • F. The committee shall use the established standards for determining its recommendation.
    • G. The committee's recommendation shall be forwarded to the college president for review.
  • Section 4: Eligibility
    • A. Typically, the employee must have been employed at WNC for a period of at least 10 years. The committee may take into consideration other experience at a NSHE institution.
    • B. The employee must be officially retiring from WNC.
    • C. The employee must have a distinguished history of service to WNC for consideration.
  • Section 5: Benefits
    • A. A person granted the title Emeritus/Emerita is considered to have lifetime status as a WNC employee.
    • B. Emeritus faculty and professional staff, their spouses and financially dependent children are eligible for grant-in-aid privileges equivalent to those provided pursuant to Title 4, Chapter 3, Section 11 and 12.
    • C. Emeritus faculty are eligible to participate in certain departmental and college events to include WNC commencement.
    • D. Emeritus faculty are eligible for WNC business cards, listing in the WNC directory, a WNC e-mail account, a WNC identification card, event tickets and fitness center membership at employee rates, library privileges, and other rights and privileges as WNC may from time to time identify.
    • E. Inclusion on mailing lists for performances, lecture series, and other college events.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised December 10, 2013; September 2, 2008; December 20, 2005; May 11, 2004; January 1, 1998
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

NSHE Board of Regents' Meeting Minutes: 4/01

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-5-1-7.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-5-1-8: Professional Job Title Changes

WNC Policy 4-5-1-8
Procedure: Professional Job Title Changes
Policy No.: 4-5-1-8
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

All job titles are created and approved when the position is created. The contract status of WNC faculty members is determined annually and is not necessarily a continuing arrangement. Faculty members should be notified in writing in advance of any changes in current status, including job title changes. When a change in job title is initiated, the request must be approved in writing before any changes are made.

  • Section 1: Procedures
    • A. The appropriate Vice President must approve any job title change for administrative or academic faculty member in writing no matter how the change is initiated. The faculty member may be asked to provide a proposed job description and/or other information. A job title may be changed for a variety of reasons including, administrative assignments to academic faculty members, change in reporting order and/or additional responsibilities.
      • 1. Change in job title does not imply a change in contract type, rank or salary. The faculty member should be consulted prior to any change in job title.
      • 2. Changes in job title contract type, rank or salary will be determined by job responsibilities and duties, authority, and reporting order etc. and must be approved in writing by the appropriate Vice President and the College President.
  • Section 2: Notification
    • A. In cases where a change is approved that is accompanied by a change in contract type, rank or salary, written notification must be sent to Human Resources, the Budget Officer and Information and Marketing. Any changes will not be made on contracts, catalog, and staff directories until final written approval is received.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted May 11, 2004 Dates Revised September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-5-1-8.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-5-1-9: NSHE Board of Regents Policy For Compensated Outside Professional Services

WNC Policy 4-5-1-9
Procedure: NSHE Board of Regents Policy For Compensated Outside Professional Services
Policy No.: 4-5-1-9
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

Outside professional or scholarly service by faculty members within their subject matter field and for compensation is recognized as a legitimate activity unless specifically prohibited by the employee's contract with the institution. Faculty members engaged in providing compensated outside professional or scholarly service shall provide advance notification in writing to their immediate supervisor about the nature of the work to be performed, the company/organization for which the work will be performed, and the estimated time involved. The request must be approved in advance by the supervisor within 10 working days unless the supervisor believes that a conflict exists with obligations currently incurred or assumed by the college regarding a faculty member's consulting activities. Faculty members engaged in providing outside professional or scholarly service shall comply with NSHE Board of Regents Handbook, Title 4, Chapter 3, Section 8 regarding Compensated Outside Professional Services.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted March 27, 2007 Dates Revised September 2, 2008
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-5-1-9.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-5-2-1: Administrative Faculty Evaluations

WNC Policy 4-5-2-1
Procedure: Administrative Faculty Evaluations
Policy No.: 4-5-2-1
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

The Board of Regents Code (Title 5, Chapter 8, Section 8) and the WNC Bylaws (4.2.4, 8.1, and 8.2) require that the college shall administer a procedure for the annual evaluation of the performance of all administrative faculty members. Administrative Faculty is defined in Title 4, Chapter 3, Section 2 (1-d) in the NSHE Board of Regents Handbook.

  • Section 1: Philosophy
    • A. The administrative faculty believes that the evaluation process should be thorough, fair and objective.
    • B. The administrative faculty believes that an accurate job description is an integral and necessary part of the evaluation process.
    • C. The administrative faculty believes that the evaluation process should improve the overall operation of the institution and assist administrative faculty members in the growth and development of their professional abilities as well as identify areas of strength and areas that need improvement.
    • D. The administrative faculty believes that an effective evaluation process is best accomplished as a collaborative effort between employee and supervisor.
    • E. The administrative faculty believes that thoughtful input from the college community will enrich the evaluation process.
    • F. The administrative faculty believes that to keep the process safe, honest and forthright, it must involve the participation of other administrators, including vice presidents and the president.
  • Section 2: Purpose
    • A. Provide a process for communication between the faculty member and supervisor regarding goal achievement and performance of basic professional responsibilities;
    • B. Provide a framework for mutual identification of professional growth and development needs and institutional resources needed to meet those needs;
    • C. Provide information for personnel decisions;
    • D. Provide a process for description and recognition of administrative faculty member's performance;
    • E. Provide a framework for mutual identification of administrative faculty member's position description, responsibilities, and goals in relation to the College's mission and strategic plan.
  • Section 3: Procedure
    • A. A position description and an Administrative Faculty Evaluation Form will be completed for each administrative faculty member. The evaluation period is from January 1 to December 31 of each year. More specific information can be obtained on the Position Description Guidelines and on the Instructions for Completing the Administrative Faculty Evaluation.
  • Section 4: Approvals and Signatures
    • A. All sections of the Administrative Faculty Evaluation form and the Administrative Faculty Position Description will need to have all required signatures. Administrative Faculty Evaluations are considered advisory, until signed by the College President.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted September 23, 2003 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; January 25, 2005; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-5-2-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-5-2-2: Administrative Transition

WNC Policy 4-5-2-2
Procedure: Administrative Transition
Policy No.: 4-5-2-2
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

The Administrative Transition Policy governs the voluntary and involuntary movement of administrative positions including vice presidents, deans, directors, assistant, directors, coordinators, and other title at the manager and mid-manager levels at Western Nevada College requesting or being reassigned.

  • Section 1: Administrators with Tenure Status
    • A. An administrator with tenure status may request voluntary reassignment to a faculty position. The staff member shall request reassignment from their administrative position to a full time faculty position in writing at least six months in advance.
    • B. At the time of the request for reassignment, the vice-president of the appropriate area shall evaluate and make a recommendation to the President of, the following:
      • 1. The overall professional performance and the location of the assignment where the administrator would best contribute to the academic unit at the college.
      • 2. The administrator shall be placed at the appropriate range and step on the faculty salary schedule based on their education and experience.
      • 3. The salary shall be no more than that of a leading academic faculty member with similar education and experience in the field or discipline to which the outgoing administrator will be reassigned.
      • 4. This comparison may be from both within and outside the college.
      • 5. The outgoing administrator may request a period of professional development leave in which to prepare to return to the duties of a full time academic faculty member. This leave shall not be a longer period that one (1) semester.
      • 6. The request for leave shall include a proposal for activity during the leave.
      • 7. The salary during this time period shall be set up to, but no greater than, the mid-point between the administrator's outgoing salary and new academic faculty salary.
      • 8. The costs, salary and fringe benefits, payable during the leave period shall be paid by the outgoing administrator's department.
      • 9. The president will review and make the final approval of the transition and new assignment in writing outlining any conditions that must be met.
  • Section 2: Administrator with Non-Tenure Status
    • A. An administrator with non-tenure status may request consideration to be assigned to a vacant faculty position, in accordance with the conditions of Section 1, above.
    • B. This reassignment is not automatic and is subject to approval by the vice president and president.
  • Section 3: Involuntary Reassignment
    • A. In the event of an involuntary reassignment of the administrator to an academic faculty position, continuation of the salary, fringe benefits during the remainder of the term of the employment contract shall be determined by the provisions of the current contract.
    • B. Upon expiration of the current contract and if the contract is renewed, the new salary and fringe benefits will be applied as determined in Section 1, B, (2-4) above. The professional development leave provisions, if applicable, shall be applied as in Section 1, B, (5-8) above.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004; March 21, 1995
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

NSHE Board of Regents' Meeting Minutes: 6/95

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-5-2-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-5-2-3: Administrative Faculty Merit Policy

WNC Policy 4-5-2-3
Procedure: Administrative Faculty Merit Policy
Policy No.: 4-5-2-3
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

This policy applies to all administrative faculty, except the President, as defined by the Board of Regents Handbook, Chapter 3, Section 2, D, Title 4.

  • Section 1: Policy
    • A. Administrative faculty merit is determined through the following process:
      • 1. The vice president of finance and administration calculates the merit pool based on 2.5% of the total salaries, excluding vice presidents, deans, self-supported salaries, grant salaries, and salaries at the top of the salary schedule.
      • 2. Initial administrative faculty evaluations are performed by supervisors and submitted to the appropriate vice president or the president. The vice president reviews the evaluations and makes recommended changes and forwards them to the president for review and approval. The president meets with all vice presidents together to discuss and approve evaluations.
      • 3. The president, in consultation with direct reports, determines if any equity adjustments are in order and if so, the amounts. Equity adjustment amounts are deducted from the merit pool prior to awarding merit. The merit net of equity is divided by the total merit to get a funding percentage which is applied to all merit awards.
      • 4. The president, in consultation with direct reports, and after review of evaluation documents, places administrative faculty in one of the following four groups: Excellent, Commendable, Satisfactory, or Unsatisfactory.
      • 5. In order to be considered for merit, an employee must be employed in a WNC administrative position for a minimum of six months during the evaluation period. (Example: Employee must be hired on or before July 1 during the January through December evaluation period to be eligible for merit effective the following July.) This applies to administrative faculty hired on or after 1/1/06.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted May 17, 2005 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; October 5, 2006
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-5-2-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-5-2-4: Merit Procedure for Administrative Faculty at the Top of Their Salary Range

WNC Policy 4-5-2-4
Procedure: Merit Procedure for Administrative Faculty at the Top of Their Salary Range
Policy No.: 4-5-2-4
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

Merit can be granted for administrative faculty at the top of their salary range.

  • Section 1: Guidelines
    • A. Faculty do not apply for merit eligibility. All faculty are eligible for consideration for legislatively approved increases in salary earned through meritorious performance.
    • B. Consideration is based upon performance evaluation.
    • C. Board of Regents policy allows for merit consideration for faculty who are at the top of their salary range.
    • D. Administrative faculty at the top of their salary range may be eligible for merit consideration under the following circumstances:
      • 1. Performance evaluation demonstrates exceptional, not merely satisfactory, performance for the evaluation period.
      • 2. Identification of recipients is highly selective, and is not based upon a quota; nor should recipients be rotated among those eligible.
      • 3. Making these awards to eligible faculty at the top of their salary range will not adversely affect the merit award funds available to other faculty.
    • E. Recommendations for merit for administrative faculty at the top of their salary range are forwarded to the president for approval.
    • F. Each faculty member will receive written notice from the president.
    • G. The president is responsible for reporting annually to the chancellor the merit increases in salary awarded to academic and administrative faculty at the top of their salary range.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted November 4, 2008 Dates Revised
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

NSHE Procedures and Guidelines Manual: Chapter 3, Section 4

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-5-2-4.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-5-3-1: Summer Employment Salary Schedule

WNC Policy 4-5-3-1
Procedure: Summer Employment Salary Schedule
Policy No.: 4-5-3-1
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

The salary schedule policy for faculty employed during the summer must comply with the NSHE Procedure Manual, Chapter 3, Section 5(7)

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

NSHE Board of Regents' Meeting Minutes: 4/02; 12/02

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-5-3-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-5-3-2: Tenure for Community College Faculty

WNC Policy 4-5-3-2
Procedure: Tenure for Community College Faculty
Policy No.: 4-5-3-2
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

Rules for tenure of community college faculty must comply with the NSHE Board of Regents handbook, Title 2, Chapter 4, Tenure for Community College Faculty.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

NSHE Board of Regents Meeting Minutes: 4/91; 4/99; 1/00
WNC Bylaws: Title 5, Chapter 8, Section 7

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-5-3-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-5-3-3: Faculty Transfer

WNC Policy 4-5-3-3
Procedure: Faculty Transfer
Policy No.: 4-5-3-3
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

A faculty member may request a transfer to another teaching location should an appropriate vacancy occur and the faculty member meets all minimum qualifications. The Academic Director, the appropriate vice president, and the president must approve such a request

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised June 20, 2013; September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004; April 1, 1995
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-5-3-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-5-3-4: Academic Merit Guidelines for Faculty Who Have Reached Step 30

WNC Policy 4-5-3-4
Procedure: Academic Merit Guidelines for Faculty Who Have Reached Step 30
Policy No.: 4-5-3-4
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

Under certain conditions academic merit can be granted for faculty who have reached step 30 on the salary schedule.

  • Section 1: Guidelines
    • A. Faculty do not have to apply to be considered for merit.
    • B. The committee will have access to the faculty self evaluations, PEG reports, student evaluations, and any other additional materials that the faculty member may submit for consideration and review. Interviews may be requested.
    • C. The committee will assign one rating for Primary Duties, consistent with assignments for Instructors, Librarians, and Counselors. An additional rating will be given for all types of service, consistent with the NSHE Code. Primary Duties will be given an approximate 75% weighting.
    • D. The ratings of "Satisfactory," "Commendable," and "Excellent" may be assigned to each of the two above categories.
    • E. A value of "X" will be assigned for "Satisfactory."
      A value of "XX" will be assigned for "Commendable."
      A value of "XXX" will be assigned for "Excellent."
    • F. The committee will reserve up to, but not exceeding, a total of 10 "Xs" that may be assigned to one or more faculty members for "over the top performance."
    • G. With the understanding that all money awarded to Step 30 faculty will be used to award merit to this group, the value of "X" will be determined by the total amount in the merit pool divided by the number of "Xs" awarded.
    • H. Recognizing that all recommendations will be forwarded for presidential approval, the committee will consider the recommendations to be its final report.
    • I. At the conclusion of the committee's recommendations, each faculty member will receive written notice from the President.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted November 14, 2003 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-5-3-4.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-5-3-5: Professional Advancement Program

WNC Policy 4-5-3-5
Procedure: Professional Advancement Program
Policy No.: 4-5-3-5
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Professional Advancement Committee
Policy:

The goal of the Professional Advancement Committee is to encourage professional development among faculty in accordance with the Community College Professional Advancement Program adopted by the Board of Regents Handbook, Title 4, Chapter 3, Section 32.

  • Section 1: Professional Advancement Committee
    • A. This committee is charged with reviewing applications by faculty seeking professional advancement and providing a recommendation on the application to the appropriate Dean/Director, and the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs.
    • B. Duties
      • 1. The committee is responsible for developing procedures to ensure a fair and timely review of applications, as well as developing and using policies for determining which courses, programs, contact hour training/workshops and work experiences will be recommended or not recommended for approval.
      • 2. The committee will report to the Faculty Senate on the status of the "Professional Advancement Program" at least once each academic year.
    • C. Committee Organization
      • 1. The committee shall be organized to represent a diverse cross-section of faculty disciplines, locations, and professional areas.
      • 2. The ex-officio members include a Human Resources representative for the College and a WNC representative to the System Compensation Committee.
      • 3. The length of service on the committee should be a minimum of two years.
      • 4. To ensure continuity, each year the composition should include at least two members who served on the committee the previous academic year.
  • Section 2: Guidelines
    • A. All professional advancement must be relevant to the individual's primary job duties and supportive of the college's overall mission.
    • B. The following contains the developed guiding principles of the Professional Advancement Committee used to determine whether or not courses, programs, workshops, etc., are recommended for approval. These guiding principles are meant to act as general guidelines for applicants to the professional advancement program to ensure that all applicants are treated equitably.
      • 1. If a course taken is offered by an accredited institution, is at the level appropriate to the column movement being requested, is relevant to the duties of the individual, the course will be awarded credit according to the ratio of hours or credits established by the Board of Regents Handbook, Title 4, Chapter 3, Section 3.
      • 2. When a program includes training offered by private or professional organizations that do not meet the regionally accredited institution requirement specified in the Regents Handbook, the applicant will need to submit supporting materials.
        • a. These materials must demonstrate that the organization and/or trainer meets the accepted professional standards or is accredited by a recognized accrediting agency appropriate to the field in which the training is provided.
        • b. When the applicant is seeking to move on the salary schedule beyond range 2, the applicant must demonstrate that workshops and training meet the "graduate level or equivalent" requirement as stated in the Handbook.
      • 3. The verification process of attendance of workshops or training in nonacademic settings is subject to the same level of verification of grades from academic institutions. The verification document must include:
        • a. The total number of contact hours, the content of the training, the signature of the trainer or the representative from appropriate agency, the date of the training, and a verification that the individual participated in the training.
        • b. This verification process can be by certificate or by letter from the agency providing the training.
        • c. Copies of the verification documents must be attached to the application. The applicant will need to show the original verification document to the personnel analyst prior to any movement on the salary schedule.
      • 4. Events (e.g., workshops, seminars, etc.,) offered by WNC or for WNC through another agency where the individual is required or urged to attend will generally not be counted for movement on the salary schedule. The committee reasons that such events are part of the person's job duties or assignments. However, exceptions may be considered on a case-by-case basis.
      • 5. When a specific course, workshop, or training, is repeated, the total number of credits applicable to movement on the salary schedule shall be limited to six. The six-credit limit applies to specific topics within a discipline.
      • 6. On-the-job work experience is limited to work experience, which meets the requirements of the cooperative work experience program at WNC or meets the requirements of an internship program. Requirements for meeting these two categories typically include the establishment of goals in advance of the work experience, professional supervision, evaluation of performance in light of the goals, and a limit of the number of credits (six credits) that can be applied to the program.
      • 7. On-the-job work experience (with or without pay) will be 1:75.
        • a. For every seventy-five (75) hours of on-the-job work experience, one unit of credit will be awarded.
        • b. All hours of on-the-job work experience must be verified by the outside agency/employer.
      • 8. The internship experience for the faculty member must follow the same standards and requirements established for the on-the-job Work Experience Program.
      • 9. The Professional Advancement Program does allow occupational faculty to move to the fifth column.
        • a. Requirements for such movement center on the faculty member demonstrating that he/she has attained the accomplishments common to most terminal academic degrees.
        • b. These accomplishments should include a demonstrated mastery of the subject matter relevant to the discipline, and original contribution to his/her field, and appropriate activities that show that professionals in his/her field recommend the applicant as attaining the highest level of knowledge and skills recognized in his/her field.
  • Section 3: Application Review Procedures
    • A. Each applicant should obtain a copy of the appropriate WNC Professional Advancement Program application(s), goals, policies, procedures, and the guidelines available in the Board of Regents Handbook (Title 4, Chapter 3, Section 3), before preparing his/her application.
    • B. All WNC Professional Advancement Program materials should be available on the WNC Web page. Applicants should read all materials carefully before applying for this program.
    • C. Type of Application:
      • 1. It is recommended that approval is sought prior to the under taking of the activities.
      • 2. To request approval, faculty must complete the "Professional Advancement Application for Credit."
    • D. Deadlines
      • 1. It is the responsibility of the applicant to anticipate training/educational opportunities and to submit the application to the committee at least 15 B contract working days prior to the activity to allow the committee adequate time to review it.
      • 2. Applications will not be considered during the summer.
      • 3. For summer and semester break activities, applicants are encouraged to submit applications at least 15 B contract working days prior to the end of the previous semester. Otherwise applications for summer and semester break activities will be considered the following semester.
    • E. FACULTY NEED TO APPLY TO MOVE ON THE SALARY SCHEDULE BY FEBRUARY 1, TO BE CONSIDERED FOR MOVEMENT FOR THE FOLLOWING ACADEMIC YEAR. It will aid the college if you can give a full year's notice of when you anticipate completing your program.
    • F. Location of Application Packets:
      • 1. Application packets (including program information) can be obtained on the WNC web page.
    • G. Supporting Documents
      • 1. Applicants are to include materials to support their proposal for professional development.
      • 2. Each person should remember that the committee may include faculty who are unfamiliar with the applicant's discipline and should include necessary supporting documentation-especially in cases where the application includes review of workshops, training by private industry, etc.
      • 3. Supporting documents include, but are not limited to, catalogs to explain the level and department of the course, documents demonstrating that the workshop or training meets accepted professional standards, and rationale for the course/program being relevant to the individual.
  • Section 4: Application Review Process
    • A. Each applicant needs to submit the original application to the chair of the Professional Advancement Committee.
      • 1. The Chair will review the application for completion.
      • 2. If there seems to be obvious lack of information, the Chair will request, in writing, that the applicant submit the needed material.
    • B. The Chair will send a copy of the application to each committee member or will contact committee members about the application.
      • 1. Committee members need to treat the material as confidential. It should not be shown or discussed with anyone who is not a member of the committee.
    • C. The committee's review form will include the reasoning for the committee for all instances where the recommendation is for no approval.
    • D. The Chair of the committee will notify the applicant, in writing, of the committee's decision. An applicant may appeal the decision within 15 B contract working days and request to meet with the committee.
    • E. When the Committee approves an individual course, this application will be forwarded to the appropriate administrators for signature (see application forms).
    • F. When the committee makes its final recommendation for range movement, the complete application file (along with documentation) will be forwarded to the appropriate administrators (see movement application form) for final approval.
      • 1. Upon final approval, the administration will authorize the appropriate salary adjustments based on the fiscal year.
      • 2. Faculty need to apply for movement on the salary schedule by February 1, to be considered for movement for the following academic year.
    • G. The Faculty member (applicant) and Human Resources Office should each maintain a file, which includes every application, and all records pertaining to the Committee's decisions.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004; March 28, 2001; April 26, 1995
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

NSHE Board of Regents' Meeting Minutes: 3/02

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-5-3-5.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-6-1: State of Nevada Guidelines for Substance Abuse Situations not Covered by the Drug Free Workplace Act of 1988

WNC Policy 4-6-1
Procedure: State of Nevada Guidelines for Substance Abuse Situations not Covered by the Drug Free Workplace Act of 1988
Policy No.: 4-6-1
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

WNC is obligated to implement rules and regulations pertaining to problems related to alcohol and drugs, the health and social effects, legal sanctions, and counseling and treatment programs available.

  • Section 1: Employee Assistance Program
    • A. Employees who voluntarily seek assistance for dealing with a drug or alcohol abuse problem should be referred to the Employee Assistance Program for consultation and assistance.
  • Section 2: Employee Convicted Off-the-Job of a Drug/Alcohol Related Problem
    • A. As noted in Section 1 of Chapter 78, Statutes of Nevada 1989, an employee convicted of violating any federal or state law prohibiting the sale of a controlled substance must be dismissed.
    • B. An employee is a highly sensitive position or a position entrusted with the public safety, may be subject to disciplinary action for a conviction involving the use of alcohol or a controlled substance. This should be considered on a case by case basis. Otherwise, action should be taken only if it interferes with the employee's ability to perform his/her job. The employee should be counseled with the intent of encouraging him/her to seek help through the Employee Assistance Program.
  • Section 3: Employer Recognized Problem Involving Drugs/Alcohol
    • A. An employee who is suspected of drug or alcohol use which results in a deterioration of his/her performance should be handled as any other employee experiencing work performance problems.
    • B. The employee should be counseled regarding the specific shortcomings in his/her work performance and the need for improvement. As part of the counseling, the employee should be advised of the help available through the Employee Assistance Program for any problems which may be affecting their work performance.
    • C. Under no circumstances should direct allegations of drug or alcohol use be made without concrete supporting evidence.
    • D. An employee who is under the influence of alcohol or drugs on-the-job as determined by the observation of the employee's supervisor and/or management may be placed on administrative leave with pay pending the investigation of the wrongdoing. In such an incident, it is in the best interest of supervision to have two or more supervisors or managers witness the actions of the employee to attest to the employee's inability to perform in a safe and efficient manner.
    • E. The provisions of Nevada Administrative Code (NAC) 284.650 apply.
  • Section 4: Employee Convicted Of Driving Under The Influence While On State Business
    • A. The provisions of the Nevada Administrative Code, (NAC) 284.653, provides for disciplinary action ranging from suspension to dismissal when an employee is convicted of driving under the influence of alcohol or drugs while on state business. State employees should be held to a high standard of accountability for their actions. As such, a dismissal should be strongly considered for this type of conviction.
    • B. If an employee needs assistance with the administration of this policy or the procedural guidelines, contact the Department of Personnel or the appropriate Deputy Attorney General.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
NAC Code NAC 284.650, NAC 284.653
NRS Code NRS 193.105, NRS 453.146

Memorandum from Governor Bob Miller to all department heads on January 17, 1990

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-6-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 4-6-2: Drug and Alcohol Prevention for Employees

WNC Policy 4-6-2
Procedure: Drug and Alcohol Prevention for Employees
Policy No.: 4-6-2
Department: Human Resources
Contact: Vice President of Human Resources and General Counsel
Policy:

As part of the federal Drug-free Schools and Communities Act, colleges are required to provide students and employees with information on campus rules and regulations pertaining to alcohol and other drugs, the health and social effects, legal sanctions, and counseling and treatment programs available.

  • Section 1: Standards of Conduct
    • A. The unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of alcohol and drugs at WNC is prohibited. Violation of this prohibition will result in disciplinary action up to and including termination of employees or expulsion of students.
    • B. The WNC president has the authority to designate the time and place for special events where alcoholic beverages may be served on campus to persons 21 years of age or over.
    • C. Any student of employee who exhibits offensive behavior on WNC-owned or supervised property while under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal drugs shall be subject to disciplinary action.
  • Section 2: Legal Sanctions
    • A. Any act prohibited by local state or federal law which occurs on WNC premises or at a WNC-sponsored function shall constitute cause for discipline which for students can include a warning, reprimands, restitutions, probation, suspension or expulsion. Sanctions against employees can include any of the above in addition to termination of employment.
    • B. Nevada law states that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession or use of a controlled substance in the workplace by employees of state agencies is prohibited. Any violator is subject to disciplinary action which may include termination of employment. The specifics of the policy are addressed in Chapter 78 of the 1989 Revised Statutes of Nevada, NRS 453.146 and Nevada Administrative Code 284.650 and 284.653.
    • C. Federal penalties for trafficking in controlled substances such as methamphetamine, heroin, cocaine, PCP, LSD, fentanyl, marijuana, and hashish include imprisonment for five years to live and fines of up to $8 million. Federal penalties for illegal possession of a controlled substance include imprisonment from one to 20 years and fines of up to $250,000.
  • Section 3: Health Risks
    • A. Drug performance affects health risks
      • 1. Alcohol
        • a. poor concentration, coordination and judgment;
        • b. absenteeism or lateness;
        • c. mood swings;
        • d. fatigue;
        • e. liver diseases;
        • f. ulcers;
        • g. birth defects;
        • h. depression;
        • i. malnutrition;
        • j. heart disease and stroke;
        • k. certain cancers;
        • l. brain damage.
      • 2. Anti-anxiety drugs (Valium, Xanax, Librium, etc.)
        • a. drowsiness;
        • b. poor attention span, memory and coordination;
        • c. confusion;
        • d. birth defects;
        • e. possible liver disease.
      • 3. Cocaine (crack) and amphetamines
        • a. nervousness, short attention span, poor judgment, mood swings, paranoia or hallucinations;
        • b. depression caused by withdrawal;
        • c. death from heart or respiratory failure; stroke or seizures;
        • d. lung and voice damage;
        • e. hepatitis or AIDS.
      • 4. Heroin (and other opiates)
        • a. drowsiness, confusion and disorientation.
        • b. slows breathing rate, sometimes to the point of death;
        • c. coma;
        • d. hepatitis or AIDS.
      • 5. Marijuana
        • a. poor short-term memory;
        • b. slowed reflexes;
        • c. problems judging time, depth, and distance;
        • d. lung damage;
        • e. may harm immune system or fertility.
      • 6. PCP (angel dust)
        • a. disorganization;
        • b. hostile feelings toward others;
        • c. short attention span;
        • d. poor motor skills;
        • e. self-inflicted injury;
        • f. brain hemorrhage;
        • g. convulsions, coma and death.
      • 7. Steroids
        • a. aggressive behavior;
        • b. mood swings;
        • c. withdrawal can cause depression;
        • d. liver disease;
        • e. high cholesterol levels;
        • f. in men, breast development, small testicles and sterility;
        • g. in women, deep voice, acne, hair growth and decrease in breast size.
  • Section 4: Services and Programs That Can Help
    • A. Confidential information and counseling services for alcohol and other drugs are available at WNC and in the Carson City, Fallon and rural centers areas.
    • B. Counseling services include prevention, crisis intervention, assessments and evaluations, and treatment via on-campus services and/or community referrals.
    • C. For WNC employees, an Employee Assistance Program is also available.
    • D. For students, counseling is provided through WNC Counseling Services.
    • E. Toll-free information
      • 1. National Institute on Drug Abuse Hotline
        1-800-662-HELP (4357)
        Refers callers to local drug treatment centers and support groups.
      • 2. American Council on Alcoholism Helpline
        1-800-527-5344
        Refers callers to local alcohol and drug treatment centers.
      • 3. Al-Anon
        1-800-344-2666
        Will refer families of substance abusers to group meeting in their local area.
      • 4. Cocaine Hotline
        1-800-COCAINE
        Will send a brochure on cocaine use.
    • F. Local Groups/Groups for Families
      • 1. Alcoholics Anonymous: 775-329-7593
        Al-Anon: 775-348-7103
      • 2. Narcotics Anonymous
        Carson City: 775-883-5110
        Reno: 775-322-4811
      • 3. Family Counseling Service of Northern Nevada: 775-329-0623
      • 4. United Way Information/Referral Line: 775-322-8668
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted October 1, 1990 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
NAC Code NAC 284.650, NAC 284.653
NRS Code NRS 453.146
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/4-6-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 5-1-1: Collection Development

WNC Policy 5-1-1
Procedure: Collection Development
Policy No.: 5-1-1
Department: Library
Contact: Director
Policy:

This policy is a statement of the operating guidelines used by Western Nevada College, Library and Media Services for the acquisition and maintenance of materials in the collection. In this policy the word "materials" is used to encompass information sources in various formats which Library and Media Services collects to make available to users. All materials purchased with Library and Media Services funds will be located in facilities that are accessible to the entire college.

  • Section 1: Objectives
    • A. Library and Media Services is responsible for providing materials that assist students in achieving their educational goals. The primary focus of the collection will be to purchase materials that support programs identified in the NSHE's Community College Mission Statement:
      • 1. university transfer
      • 2. applied science and technology
      • 3. business and industry partnering
      • 4. developmental education
      • 5. community service
      • 6. student support service
    • B. The collections will include materials on subjects reflecting a variety of viewpoints.
  • Section 2: Selection Responsibility
    • A. Selection of materials is a primary duty of Library and Media Services staff.
    • B. Selection aids and tools such as professional journals, bibliographies, and publishers catalogs are used to identify materials for consideration.
    • C. Materials are purchased throughout the academic year by Library and Media Services staff who work closely with instructors to determine what items best meet classroom objectives and/or student needs.
    • D. The Director of Library & Media Services makes the final determination on the purchase of all materials, and is responsible for the implementation of this policy.
  • Section 3: Fund Allocation
    • A. Purchases are made within the limitations of the budget with no specific allocation by discipline or department
    • B. Library & Media Services acquisition funds are expended in proportion to the previous year's annualized FTE for the Carson City and Fallon campuses.
    • C. Items of high cost, which may meet selection criteria, but require a large percentage of the total materials budget, will be held for further consideration if year-end funds are available.
  • Section 4: Selection Guidelines
    • A. The department mission statement provides the framework for the selection process.
    • B. Library and Media Services strives to meet the needs of students, faculty, and staff either by purchasing or securing through interlibrary loan those materials needed for study and research.
    • C. Library and Media Services also serves the entire college community by purchasing some recreational, cultural and general information materials. Specific considerations in choosing individual materials include some or all of the following:
      • 1. support of mission statement
      • 2. appropriateness for undergraduate use
      • 3. a topic/subject students need for class assignments
      • 4. a topic/subject supporting core courses
      • 5. materials recommended by faculty to support classroom instruction
      • 6. strength of present holdings in subject
      • 7. cost
      • 8. suitability of format
      • 9. authoritativeness of author or reputation of publisher
      • 10. timeliness or permanence of the material
      • 11. classic in its field
      • 12. appearance of the title in bibliographies or indexes
    • D. Materials not normally purchased are:
      • 1. textbooks for courses offered at WNC
      • 2. graduate level materials
      • 3. books in languages not taught at the college
      • 4. popular fiction
      • 5. highly specialized research & technical materials
      • 6. specialized materials available in local area Nevada libraries
      • 7. test books
    • E. The majority of selections are current English language publications.
    • F. Lost or stolen materials will be considered for replacement within one year if they are still available.
    • G. Additional criteria may be developed to determine purchases for special formats.
  • Section 5: Gifts
    • A. Materials received as gifts will be evaluated by the same criteria as purchased materials. Everything donated to Library & Media Services becomes the property of Western Nevada College. Items not suitable for the collection will be sold in book sales, sent to other libraries or discarded.
    • B. No dollar value will be assigned to gifts by library staff.
    • C. Donations that need a formal acknowledgment must be made through the WNC President's Office, with a designation to Library & Media Services.
  • Section 7: Collection, Maintenance, and Evaluation
    • A. Library and Media Services uses weeding of outdated and damaged materials to maintain the quality of the collection. The reference collection is continually monitored for outdated material, which is replaced or withdrawn. Individual sections of the general collection are periodically reviewed. Faculty are encouraged to assist in identifying outdated or inaccurate materials in their areas of expertise.
  • Section 8: Intellectual Freedom
    • A. Library & Media Services adopts the American Library Association Library Bill of Rights to govern services of this library.
    • B. Materials are purchased to represent differing opinions on controversial issues. If the appropriateness or value of any material is challenged, the objections must be submitted in writing to the Director of Library & Media Services before any action will be taken on a complaint. The procedure followed in responding to complaints is described in the Nevada Library Association's Intellectual Freedom Handbook.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted October 1, 1998 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

Nevada Library Association's Intellectual Freedom Handbook
Library Bill of Rights

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/5-1-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 5-1-2: Library Circulation

WNC Policy 5-1-2
Procedure: Library Circulation
Policy No.: 5-1-2
Department: Library
Contact: Director
  • Section 1: Circulation Policy
    • A. Library & Media Services issues library cards to currently enrolled students, WNC faculty, and staff. WNC students must show a student I.D. or photo identification along with proof of enrollment. Faculty and staff must show a current WNC employment card. Part-time faculty must be teaching for WNC during the current semester. (See Non-Student Policy for certain restrictions).
    • B. WNC materials may be renewed via telephone, the online library catalog, or in person. Students may not renew media items.
    • C. Carson Campus materials that circulate to students and staff:
      • 1. Books (3 Week Loan)
      • 2. Maps (3 Week Loan)
      • 3. Nevada File Materials (3 Week Loan)
      • 4. Media items (video and audio) (2 items simultaneously; 1 Week Loan): Some videos may include adult language or content
    • D. Fallon Campus materials that circulate to students and staff:
      • 1. Books (3 Week Loan)
      • 2. Media items (1 Week Loan)
    • E. Carson Campus materials that circulate to faculty:
      • 1. Books (Semester Loan)
      • 2. Maps (3 Week Loan)
      • 3. Nevada File Materials (3 Week Loan)
      • 4. Periodicals (1 Week Loan)
      • 5. Media items (3 Week Loan)
    • F. Fallon Campus materials that circulate to faculty:
      • 1. Books (Semester Loan)
      • 2. Periodicals (except current issue) (1 Week Loan)
      • 3. Videos (3 Week Loan)
    • G. All items are subject to recall if an item is requested by another patron.
    • H. Patrons must return materials promptly, if they receive an overdue or recall notice.
    • I. Items will only be renewed once if not on hold for someone else. Students may not renew media items.
    • J. Faculty will not be charged overdue fines for WNC materials, but will be billed for the replacement cost and processing fee if overdue items are not returned. Borrowing privileges will be suspended until bills are resolved.
  • Section 2: Non-Circulation Materials
    • A. Carson Campus materials that do not circulate - library use only:
      • 1. Reference Books
      • 2. Newspapers
      • 3. Periodicals
    • B. Fallon Campus materials that do not circulate - library use only:
      • 1. Reference Books
      • 2. Newspapers
      • 3. Nevada File Materials
      • 4. Periodicals
      • 5. Maps
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted May 11, 2004 Dates Revised December 9, 2008; September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/5-1-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 5-1-3: Interlibrary Loan

WNC Policy 5-1-3
Procedure: Interlibrary Loan
Policy No.: 5-1-3
Department: Library
Contact: Director
Policy:

Parameters and eligibility for borrowing materials from other libraries.

  • Section 1: Borrowing Materials
    • A. In requesting materials from Interlibrary Loan, please note:
      • 1. Interlibrary Loan is a service provided only to WNC students, staff, and faculty.
      • 2. Patrons must have a current library card to request materials on ILL.
      • 3. WNC will not borrow materials that are already in our collection.
      • 4. WNC will not borrow materials from local libraries.
      • 5. Materials borrowed through WNC must be returned to WNC.
      • 6. Materials borrowed on ILL will not be placed on reserve.
      • 7. Materials may be renewed at the discretion of the lending library.
    • B. Students and part-time faculty may borrow materials located within the state; full-time faculty and staff may also borrow materials from out-of-state, with all costs being borne by the borrower.
    • C. Students may borrow up to three (3) items at a time. Library & Media Services will not place InterLibrary Loan (ILL) requests for students during semester breaks.
    • D. Part-time faculty may borrow up to three (3) items per request and may borrow additional material as soon as the current loans are returned.
    • E. Library and Media Services does not limit borrowing for full-time faculty and staff. However, if there are a large number of items to be located and/or borrowed, please contact a staff member before submitting a request.
  • Section 2: Lending Materials
    • A. Any Nevada Library may borrow circulating WNC books for their library card holders (students, faculty, and patrons).
    • B. Libraries in the Nevada System of Higher Education (NSHE) may borrow circulating WNC video and audio items for their faculty.
    • C. Video and audio items will not be loaned to public libraries.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted May 11, 2004 Dates Revised December 9, 2008; September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/5-1-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 5-1-4: Non Student Use

WNC Policy 5-1-4
Procedure: Non Student Use
Policy No.: 5-1-4
Department: Library
Policy:

Non-Student use of collections and facilities.

  • Section 1: Services for Non-Students
    • A. Some restrictions apply to non-students. First priority is given to WNC students, faculty and staff. Patrons who are not students are able to use Library & Media Services with certain restrictions.
  • Section 2: Borrowing Privileges
    • A. After presenting identification and registering their Nevada public library card at a WNC Library, non-students may check out WNC books for the same loan period as WNC students - 3 weeks. Non-students are restricted to borrowing 5 WNC books simultaneously. Fines and replacement charges are the same as WNC students.
    • B. Non- students may not check out WNC video materials, but they may view them in the library.
  • Section 3: Inter-Campus Loan/Interlibrary Loan
    • A. Library & Media Services will not borrow books from other institutions for non-student users.
  • Section 4: Library Cards
    • A. If a patron does not have a library card, books will be placed on hold for one week while the patron obtains a card from their public library.
  • Section 5: Reference Assistance
    • A. Reference service is provided on a first-come, first-served basis. Priority is given to WNC students, faculty and staff.
    • B. Librarians are available to help non-students use the collection and locate materials as time and staffing permit.
    • C. Library staff will answer "ready reference" questions (defined as taking less than ten minutes to answer). For more in depth assistance, non-students may be referred to their public library.
  • Section 6: Library Tours
    • A. Priority is given to WNC classes and organizations followed by classes and organizations of other NSHE institutions.
    • B. Tours for community organizations may be scheduled at the convenience of the library (time and staff permitting).
  • Section 7: Individual Library Instruction
    • A. Although individual library instruction is considered an integral part of reference assistance, it is not the responsibility of the library staff to teach basic computer or internet technology.
  • Section 8: Computer Use
    • A. First priority is given to WNC students, faculty and staff, non-student users may be requested to discontinue usage if there are students waiting.
    • B. Computers are provided primarily for searching library indexes, research databases, the online book catalog and class related assignments. Research activities always take precedence over recreational computer use.
  • Section 9: Photocopying
    • A. Library & Media Services has a photocopier located in each library on the Carson City and Fallon Campuses, which is available for personal use at 10 cents per copy.
  • Section 10: Media Duplication
    • A. Library & Media Services offers audio and video duplication services. Users need to supply their own blank media. There is a fee for duplication services.
    • B. Duplication of copyright protected materials is not permitted, unless a letter of permission from the copyright holder is provided to Library & Media Services.
  • Section 11: Media Equipment Loan to Outside Organizations
    • A. WNC media equipment is purchased specifically to support the instructional programs at WNC and is not loaned outside the college.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted October 1, 1998 Dates Revised December 9, 2008; September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/5-1-4.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 5-2-1: Fines and Replacement Charges

WNC Policy 5-2-1
Procedure: Fines and Replacement Charges
Policy No.: 5-2-1
Department: Library
Contact: Director
Policy:

Fine schedule for overdue, damaged, and missing materials.

  • Section 1: Fines
    • A. Fines on Overdue Books
      • 1. 1st through 7th day after the book is due: NO FINE
      • 2. After 7th day: $0.25 Per Day
      • 3. 8th day after the book is due: $2.00
      • 4. Maximum fine per book (Billing Fee): $10.00
    • B. Fines on Overdue Media Equipment (Per Day)
      • 1. Audio Players/Recorders: $5.00
    • C. Fines on Other Overdue Materials
      • 1. Interlibrary Loan Materials: $1.00/day
      • 2. Maximum Fine on Interlibrary Loan Materials: $20.00
      • 3. Reserve Materials: $1.00/day
      • 4. Maximum Fine on Reserve Materials: $20.00
      • 5. Media Items: $1.00/day
      • 6. Maximum Fine on Media Materials: $10
  • Section 2: Replacement Charges
    Replacement Charges for Lost Resources
    • A. Books: Replacement Cost Plus processing and billing fees.
    • B. Nevada file materials: replacement cost plus $3.00
    • C. Media items: replacement cost plus processing and billing fees
    • D. Media Equipment: Replacement Cost
  • Section 3: Repair Costs
    • A. Bindery Fee: $15.00
    • B. Repair Fee: $5.00
    • C. Damage to cases, equipment or accompanying materials will be assessed by staff not to exceed the replacement cost.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted October 1, 1998 Dates Revised July 16, 2013; May 14, 2013; December 9, 2008; September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/5-2-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 5-2-2: Claims Returned

WNC Policy 5-2-2
Procedure: Claims Returned
Policy No.: 5-2-2
Department: Library
Contact: Director
Policy:

If a patron notifies the Library that an overdue or billed item was returned, but our records show it is still checked out to the patron and it is not on the shelf, the item becomes a claims returned item.

The library requests that the patron continue to search for the material. Meanwhile a search is initiated within the Library. If the material is found, the patron will be notified. If the material is not found after two separate searches, the material will be considered "lost."

The patron will not be billed for the first item which he/she claims to have returned. After this, the patron is billed for all future claims returned items (including billing fee, processing fee, and replacement cost). Innopac keeps track of the number of items each patron has claimed to have returned.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted May 11, 2004 Dates Revised September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/5-2-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 5-2-3: Behavior

WNC Policy 5-2-3
Procedure: Behavior
Policy No.: 5-2-3
Department: Library
Contact: Director
Policy:

Behavior not allowed in Library & Media Services facility.

  • Section 1: Specific Behaviors
    • A. The specific behaviors not allowed include, but are not limited to the following:
      • 1. Sleeping
      • 2. Smoking or chewing tobacco
      • 3. Eating and/or drinking
      • 4. Harassing or annoying other patrons or library personnel
      • 5. Leaving children unattended
      • 6. Drunk or disorderly conduct
      • 7. Soliciting
      • 8. Damaging or stealing Library/Media Services materials
      • 9. Disregarding library policy
  • Section 2: Enforcement
    • A. Any person found doing any of these activities will be given a warning by the Library and Media Services staff that the behavior must stop or the person must leave the campus.
    • B. If the behavior continues, it is the option of the Director, after consultation with administration, to forbid the offender from using Library and Media Services for a specified period of time.
    • C. Library and Media Services staff may call security or the Sheriff's office for assistance in enforcing this behavior policy.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted August 1, 1998 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/5-2-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 5-2-4: Refunds for Lost WNC Library Materials

WNC Policy 5-2-4
Procedure: Refunds for Lost WNC Library Materials
Policy No.: 5-2-4
Department: Library
Contact: Director
Policy:

If a library patron has paid for library material(s) that were lost, but later finds and returns the material(s), the patron may be eligible for partial reimbursement.

Materials must be returned within three months from the date the patron paid for the item(s). Within the three-month time period, the reimbursement schedule below will apply:

Materials price (the price the patron was billed): refundable
Processing fee ($10.00): refundable
Billing fee ($10.00): non-refundable

If an item(s) has been replaced due to the loss of the original within the three-month time frame, either by the same edition or a newer edition, refunds will be at the discretion of Library & Media Services staff, with the primary consideration the potential usefulness of the returned item.

Refunds are issued only by the WNC Business Office after library staff have determined the refund request complies with the above requirements.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted May 11, 2004 Dates Revised July 16, 2013; May 14, 2013; September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/5-2-4.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 5-3-1: WNC Video Conferencing Facility Usage

WNC Policy 5-3-1
Procedure: WNC Video Conferencing Facility Usage
Policy No.: 5-3-1
Department: Library
Contact: Director
Policy:

Western Nevada College has installed a video conferencing system between its facilities in Carson City, Fallon, Fernley, Hawthorne, Lovelock, Minden, Schurz, Smith Valley, and Yerington, Nevada. That system was installed primarily to serve the academic needs of WNC. It also helps to reduce in-state travel costs.

  • Section 1: Intent of Policy
    • A. This policy statement is intended to describe the circumstances and conditions under which the WNC facilities will be made available to persons other than WNC staff.
    • B. The facilities in question include the WNC interactive video rooms at the Carson City campus, the Douglas campus, at the Fallon campus, and at the Fernley, Hawthorne, Lovelock, Schurz, Smith Valley, and Yerington centers where they are located at high school and community centers.
    • C. Scheduling must be arranged by contacting WNC Distance Education Program personnel who are assigned this responsibility.
  • Section 2: Priorities
    • A. Regularly scheduled academic classes have the highest level of priority.
    • B. The Nevada System of Higher Education (NSHE) and the Chancellor's Office have priority over all other users of the facilities.
    • C. Next in line is System Computing Services (SCS) staff who may also preempt already scheduled use of the facilities by groups lower in priority order. It should be noted that SCS staff will not normally preempt such meetings unless timely use of the facilities is extremely important for the mission of SCS.
    • D. Following SCS, all other NSHE personnel which includes WNC staff have priority, and, like the priorities already mentioned, preempt use by groups lower in the priority order. However, among NSHE personnel, the facilities will be scheduled on a first come-first served basis.
    • E. Finally, the use of the facilities will be available to state and local government and selected non-profit organizations on a space and time available basis. Again, such entities will compete with one another on a first-come first-served basis for use of the facilities.
  • Section 3: Scheduling
    • A. The video rooms at the Carson City campus, the Douglas campus, the Fallon campus, and the rural centers are "secure" facilities due to the large amount of expensive equipment which they house.
      • 1. Normally, the facilities are available only between 8 a.m. and 5 p.m., Monday through Friday.
      • 2. Any qualified group may schedule the facilities during that time with the understanding that higher-priority use of the facilities may preempt them even after scheduling.
    • B. Use by non-NSHE affiliates will require the presence of a WNC staff member to provide access to facilities and the operation the equipment. Such may be the case for some NSHE groups until trained.
    • C. Scheduling is to be done through the Distance Education Program office.
  • Section 4: Cost
    • A. WNC will not charge NSHE institutions for official use of the WNC facilities during normal working days/hours even though there is some cost associated with the operation of the facilities.
    • B. Price per hour for use of the facilities by all other entities may be $50.00 per hour, per participating WNC site.
      • 1. Any conferences scheduled outside of a normal 8 a.m. - 5 p.m., Monday through Friday, schedule are subject to a two-hour minimum.
      • 2. Included in the price are personnel time, equipment maintenance (in Carson City, Fallon, Fernley, Hawthorne, Lovelock, Minden, Schurz, Smith Valley, and Yerington, Nevada), and network costs to connect the participating cities.
      • 3. In the event a "fee for use" meeting is completed prior to its scheduled completion time, the cost for the full scheduled time will be billed.
      • 4. In the event such a meeting runs over its allotted time, the hourly cost, and any portion, will be billed, assuming the equipment is not otherwise committed and the extended use can be supported.
      • 5. All "fee for use" cancellations must be done 24 hours prior to the scheduled meeting time to avoid billing.
    • C. All other sites throughout the NSHE must be scheduled directly with the appropriate campus scheduler and will be billed directly by those campuses at their costs.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004; April 29, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/5-3-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 5-3-2: Media and Equipment Loan

WNC Policy 5-3-2
Procedure: Media and Equipment Loan
Policy No.: 5-3-2
Department: Library
Contact: Director
  • Section 1: Students
    • A. Media equipment is available for loan to WNC students upon presentation of a library card or a photo ID with proof of enrollment.
    • B. Carson Campus equipment that circulate to WNC students only:
      • 1. Audio Players & Recorders: 24 hours, Friday checkouts are due back Monday at 9:00 am.
  • Section 2: Faculty
    • A. Media equipment must be scheduled 24 hours in advance for delivery to classrooms on the Carson Campus, Fallon Campus, Douglas Center and rural teaching centers.
    • B. Borrowing privileges are also extended to specific institutions where we have reciprocal borrowing agreements.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted May 11, 2004 Dates Revised December 9, 2008; September 2, 2008
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/5-3-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 5-3-3: iPad Policy

WNC Policy 5-3-3
Procedure: iPad Policy
Policy No.: 5-3-3
Department: Library
Contact: Director of Library and Media Services
Policy:

The college supports faculty, staff and student use of iPads to enhance classroom instruction and individual productivity. iPads are not purchased for faculty, staff or students to use as personal digital devices. WNC will only fund wireless iPads. Tablets other than iPads are not supported at this time.

  • Section 1: Usage Guidelines
    • A. The same general guidelines for using college-owned computing equipment at WNC are to be observed with using college-owned iPads. These policies include but are not limited to the following:
  • Section 2: Purchasing
    • A. Media Services will provide a quote when requested but individual departments are responsible for ordering iPads via the normal purchasing process. When received iPads will be sent to Media Services for initial setup. iPads are the property of the department that purchased the iPad.
  • Section 3: Jail Breaking
    • A. Jail breaking is the process of removing the limitations imposed by Apple on an iPad. As the iPad remains the property of the college, any attempts to “jail break” an iPad are in direct breach of this policy. Jail breaking can be detected by college Computing Services staff.
  • Section 4: Privacy
    • A. Do not take or distribute photos, sound or video recordings of people, including background figures and voices, without their permission.
  • Section 5: Confidentiality
    • A. Confidential college data must not be stored on the device for privacy, security, and compliance reasons. Confidential personally identifiable information includes but is not limited to Social Security numbers, credit card numbers, financial/banking information or information that qualifies as confidential information under FERPA or HIPPA regulations. Loss or theft of a college owned iPad must be reported promptly to Media Services staff in order to remotely wipe data from the device and to notify affected individuals.
  • Section 6: Applications
    • A. The college will provide certain productivity and security software to all college iPad users. To purchase specific Apps users should email Library & Instructional Technology IT staff with their requested App information. After department approval for the expenditure, the App will be purchased and installation information sent to the user. Free Apps can be installed by users utilizing a division or department specific generic Apple ID. WNC will not fund magazine subscriptions for faculty and staff. Games are not allowed on college owned iPads unless designed specifically for classroom use. Management applications and configuration profiles have been installed to monitor and track iPads. Users must agree not to remove these applications and profiles.
  • Section 7: Classroom Use
    • A. The ability to project iPad displays using campus projectors is dependent on the application used and available adapters and cannot be assured in all cases. It is highly recommended that any intended use of iPads with projectors be tested in advance with the appropriate hardware.
  • Section 8: Security
    • A. Users will promptly notify Media Services staff as soon as possible in the event of the loss or theft of a college owned iPad. Users are not permitted to store any student data that qualifies as confidential information under FERPA regulations on their iPads. All users must have password protection activated on any college-owned iPad. Media Services will update iPads on an annual basis.
  • Section 9: Student Use
    • A. Students using college owned iPads must agree to abide by the WNC iPad policy and policy 8-1-2, the WNC Computing and Network Use Agreement.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted September 10, 2013 Dates Revised
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/5-3-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 6-1-1: Facility Use Policy

WNC Policy 6-1-1
Procedure: Facility Use Policy
Policy No.: 6-1-1
Department: Facilities Planning & Management
Contact: Director
Policy:

College facilities are available to faculty, students and campus organizations for sponsorship of various educational, recreational and social programs and/or events. College academic departments, administrative units and approved organizations may act as a sponsoring host for an external professional organization that is related to the sponsoring area's institutional role. If the primary audience of the scheduled event is not from the college, the group may be charged for use of the facilities.

College facilities are available to external not-for-profit organizations and for-profit organizations providing educational programs. All facility rentals are on a space available basis, and must not interfere with the educational programs of the college.

All facility rentals are scheduled through a process approved by the vice president for Finance and Administrative Services. The Facilities Management and Planning Department, which also assists users with the preparation of the initial contract and any subsequent issues, is responsible for daily coordination of the process.

  • Section 1: Definitions and Restrictions
    • A. College facilities are identified as all buildings and grounds owned or controlled by the college, including streets, sidewalks, parking lots, athletic fields, roadways and all other property owned or controlled by the college.
    • B. An event is defined as any function, meeting, gathering, workshop, or seminar attended by others regardless of size and purpose.
    • C. The use of college space can only be granted if such use is consistent with the mission of the college.
    • D. The college and its facilities shall be used only in accordance with federal, state, and local laws and shall not be used for the purpose of organizing or carrying out any unlawful activity.
    • E. The college and its facilities are provided primarily for the support of the regular educational functions of the college and the activities necessary for the support of these functions, which take precedence over any other activities.
    • F. The use of the college facilities does not include the use of staff, services or equipment unless special arrangements are made in writing in advance and may include additional fees.
    • G. There will be no eating or drinking in the facilities unless special arrangements are made in writing in advance. The renter is responsible for maintaining cleanliness during the scheduled event.
    • H. All WNC buildings are non-smoking.
    • I. Non-campus organizations, groups or individuals may not solicit during the first two weeks of classes and may apply through the president's office for time to solicit.
    • J. The use of alcohol at any event/program hosted by and/or held on WNC property must have prior approval from the president's office. (See College Policy 1-6-1)
    • K. Publicity for all events scheduled in campus facilities by non-college groups and/or organizations must clearly identify the college as the location and not as an event sponsor.
    • L. To ensure adequate security measures are in place, security assessments by the director of Public Safety are required for all non-classroom related events on any Western Nevada College campus that are open to any student, non-student, staff member, or the general public.
      • 1. If additional Public Safety staff is necessary or contract law enforcement services required, the costs of these additional services shall be the responsibility of the sponsoring group or individual. If funding is requested from the college, approval by the vice president of Finance and Administrative Services is required.
      • 2. Only the director of Public Safety has the authority to contact local law enforcement to provide these services or to schedule Public Safety staff at these events.
  • Section 2: Use of College Facilities by Non-College Groups
    • A. Organizations eligible to use college facilities:
      • 1. Not-for-profit, educationally oriented associations and organizations
      • 2. Local, county, state and Nevada System of Higher Education system agencies and organizations
      • 3. Organizations that meet on campus and enhance the relationship between the college and the community or enhance the educational mission of the college
      • 4. Organizations that provide a community service and their use of College facilities do not compete with area business
    • B. All non-sponsored, non-college organizations, groups, and individuals may be required to identify themselves and any products, information or materials distributed as being neither sponsored by, nor endorsed by the college. Prominent display of this disclaimer may be required to be prominently displayed at all times for the duration of the use.
    • C. This policy also applies to all WNC employees using college space for personal non-college sponsored events.
  • Section 3: Public Forums
    • A. Public expression in the form of freedom of speech and advocacy may be exercised on college property at such times and places, and in such a manner as to assure orderly conduct, the least possible interference with college responsibilities as an educational institution, protection of the rights of individuals in the vicinity of college facilities, and reasonable protection of persons against practices that would make them involuntary audiences.
    • B. In the spirit of open discussion and freedom of expression, the college will not discourage any group from using designated college facilities or services to render an opinion as long as the college determines the time, place, and manner of presentation of the views in question. The college will not attempt to control the viewpoint of the speaker.
      • 1. Such activities shall be consistent with maintenance of college facilities and the free flow of persons and shall not interfere with other scheduled activities. Interference with entrances to buildings, classroom, offices or study areas is strictly prohibited.
      • 2. An application with signed approval must be in the possession of the person who is present and that person must be within the reserved location for the duration of the use of the area.
      • 3. Arrangements for amplified sound must be made in advance. The privilege to use amplified sound may be withdrawn if such sound interferes with academic instruction, scheduled events, normal business of the college, or the general public.
      • 4. If scheduling allows, the following spaces are identified as available for public forums:
        • a. Carson Campus: Marlette Hall, Sarah Winnemucca Hall, Rotary Plaza, and Reynolds Building, rm. 103
        • b. Fallon Campus: Art Gallery
        • c. Douglas Campus: Student Lounge
  • Section 4: Sponsored Use
    • A. Sponsored use of space by non-college organizations, groups and individuals shall follow the guidelines above.
    • B. All notices, advertisements, literature or other communications for the event must clearly represent the event as sponsored by the non-college group and include contact information.
    • C. The on-campus sponsor must be present with the off-campus group at all times they are on campus including set-up and teardown.
    • D. The campus sponsor may assume responsibility for scheduled fees and charges resulting from the use of WNC facilities.
  • Section 5: Non-College Publications
    • A. Prior to display or distribution, all non-college publications must be approved by the Information and Marketing Department.
    • B. The on-campus distribution of non-college publications, notices, advertisements, literature or other communications must be approved by the college and is limited to approved distribution area.
  • Section 6: Direct Sales
    • A. Direct sales are not allowed on college properties except for those agencies that have contracted with the college to do so.
    • B. On-campus marketing for credit cards companies is prohibited.
  • Section 7: Long-Term or Continued Use
    • A. Long-term or continued use of WNC facilities requires a WNC lease agreement approved by the vice president for Finance and Administrative Services or designee(s).
  • Section 8: Making Arrangements
    • A. The Facilities Management and Planning Department is responsible for approving, coordinating and scheduling the use of all space for non-instructional events as defined above in accordance with college policy.
    • B. Arrangements to use designated areas must be made at least ten business days in advance of the requested event date, and can be made by contacting the facilities management and planning department.
    • C. A signed facility use form must be on file with the facilities management and planning department two business days prior to the start of an event.
  • Section 9: Liability Insurance
    • A. The facility user shall carry commercial general liability insurance as indicated below:
      • 1. Commercial General Liability: (minimum limits)
      • 2. Each Occurrence - $1,000,000
      • 3. Products/Completed Operations Aggregate - $1,000,000
      • 4. Personal and Advertising Injury - $1,000,000
      • 5. General Aggregate - $1,000,000
    • B. The Board of Regents of the Nevada System of Higher Education must be named as an additional insured with respect to their liability arising out of the facility user's activities.
    • C. An Accord 25 Certification of Insurance form or a form substantially similar must be submitted to the Board of Regents of the Nevada System of Higher Education as evidence of the insurance policies and coverage s required of the facility user. The certificate shall require that NSHE be given 30 days notice of cancellation or material change in coverage.
  • Section 10: Rental Fees and Services
    • A. Short-term rental fees do not include the use of staff, services or equipment unless special arrangements are made in writing in advance and may include additional fees. See attached WNC Facility Use Rate Structure for the fee and charge schedules.
    • B. Payment for room use is payable to "Board of Regents" and submitted directly to the college's Facilities Management and Planning Department. The Facilities Management and Planning Department coordinates the due date for payment.
    • C. Coordination for other services is made through the Facilities Management and Planning Department.
    • D. Appeals and Waivers
      • 1. Appeals of decisions made under these guidelines may be addressed in writing to the college president.
      • 2. Waiver requests for facility use fees must be submitted in writing to the vice president of Finance and Administrative Services with the facility use request form. The request must include the basis for the request (i.e., conducting the event/activity on the WNC campus would support or benefit the educational mission of the college by...).
  • Section 11: Cancellations and No Shows
    • A. Cancellation of a facility use contract should be made as far in advance as possible to allow other groups the opportunity to use WNC facilities.
    • B. Reservations canceled 48 hours or less prior to an event/meeting may result in the assessment of charges to the sponsoring group.
    • C. A reservation that has not been canceled prior to the event will be considered a 'no show' and the group may incur charges.
  • Section 12: Exceptions
    • B. Any exceptions to this policy require the written approval of the college president or his/her designee(s).
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted February 11, 2009 Dates Revised December 4, 2012; February 2, 2008; May 11, 2004; November 1, 2003; March 1, 2003
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
NRS Code NRS 396.433
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/6-1-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 6-1-2: Standard Hours and Building Access

WNC Policy 6-1-2
Procedure: Standard Hours and Building Access
Policy No.: 6-1-2
Department: Facilities Planning & Management
Contact: Director
Policy:

Departments will be responsible for providing Facilities with a list of personnel needing access to WNC facilities at the Carson Campus for Faculty, Staff, and Students to improve personnel safety and operating efficiencies at WNC.

  • Section 1: Hours for Staff and Faculty
    • A. Faculty and Staff will have access to the Buildings they require access to in order to perform their assigned duties 24 hours a day seven days a week.
  • Section 2: Hours for Student Government Officers
    • A. Hours

      Monday - Thursday 6 a.m. - 1:30 a.m.
      Friday 6 a.m. - 12:30 a.m.
      Saturday 7 a.m. - 12:30 a.m.
      Sunday 7 a.m. - 7 p.m.
      Closed For All State Holidays
    • B. The above schedule can be modified for special projects and events with 24 hour notice to Public Safety and Facilities.
  • Section 3: Student Access
    All buildings will be unlocked for access by students as follows:
    • A. Hours

      Monday - Friday 7 a.m. - 10:30 p.m.
      Saturday 7:30 a.m. - 5:30 p.m.
      Sunday closed except for special classes and events
    • B. Buildings not scheduled for classes will be locked and not accessible by students.
  • Section 4: Key Card Access
    • A. WNC has a card access system with one door in each building having the card access system. This will allow staff, faculty, and student government officers to access the buildings during those times the buildings are locked and not open for student use.
      • 1. The card system will allow access during the times stated above.
      • 2. Cards will be issued to each person for the buildings they need to have access to.
      • 3. All keys to exterior doors will be turned in when access cards are issued.
      • 4. Any building that the exterior door keys are not all turned in on will have the exterior locks changed.
    • B. The card access system will be operated by the Facilities Department and monitored by Public Safety.
      • 1. All access cards will be issued and programmed by Facilities.
      • 2. Each Department will be responsible for providing Facilities with a list of personnel needing an access card, listing which buildings the person requires access to, days of the week access is needed and time of day access is needed so the information will be programmed into the system.
      • 3. Persons will receive their access cards from Facilities and will sign a custody form for the card. Each person is responsible for their card and not loaning it to others.
      • 4. Cards that are lost should be reported to Facilities immediately so they can be deleted from the system and a new card issued.
      • 5. Individuals are responsible for turning in their access card prior to leaving the College along with any keys they have.
      • 6. Persons that do not need to have access to the buildings at times when they are locked will not need to get an access card.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted March 20, 2003 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/6-1-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 6-1-3: College Equipment

WNC Policy 6-1-3
Procedure: College Equipment
Policy No.: 6-1-3
Department: Facilities Planning & Management
Contact: Director
Policy:

College equipment is property of Western Nevada College.

  • Section 1: Students
    • A. College equipment is only to be used by students for college work assignments.
    • B. The use of equipment for personal business or profit is prohibited.
    • C. Students using computer labs for non-computer courses will be required to pay a computer laboratory fee of $20 per semester.
  • Section 2: College Personnel
    • A. College personnel may not take computers, typewriters, or other college equipment home (except under special circumstances with written permission of the appropriate administrator).
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted May 16, 1990 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/6-1-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 6-2-1: Vehicle Usage Procedures

WNC Policy 6-2-1
Procedure: Vehicle Usage Procedures
Policy No.: 6-2-1
Department: Facilities Planning & Management
Contact: Director
Policy:

All Western Nevada College personnel (employees, work study students and volunteers) having a valid driver's license, must use an agency vehicle when conducting college business. If an agency vehicle is not available, a State Motor Pool or personal vehicle may be used under the stipulations indentified here-in.

  • Section 1: Usage Guidelines
    • A. Under specific conditions, an employee may request and obtain special exception from this policy through their appropriate department administrator to use a private vehicle.
    • B. All vehicles owned by the college are only for authorized official business use.
    • C. Agency vehicles are not used to drive between home and workstations at the beginning or end of working hours, or driving on personal business.
    • D. College employees using college and/or State motor pool vehicles should familiarize themselves with state vehicle use policies and procedures. They are located at http://nevadabudget.org/index.php/publications/sam/32-1300
    • E. All employees must successfully complete and hold a current National Safety Council Defensive Driver Training Certificate or State of Nevada Defensive Driving Course Certificate prior to use of campus/state motor pool vehicle or when using their personal vehicle for state business. Employees must successfully complete the course within 60 days of appointment. New employees must send the course completion certificate to the Carson environmental health and safety office. They will send a copy to the WNC motor pool. Maintain a copy of the defensive driver training certificate for yourself for when using a State auto from other State motor pools a copy of the certificate will be required. To take this training course, contact the college's Environmental Health and Safety office for class information, or click on the following for class locations and times http://www.risk.state.nv.us/SafetyTrainingClasses.htm, you also need to contact the State NEATS Defensive Driving Coordinator at 687-3188 to enroll in a class. On-line training through NEATS may be available soon. Both defensive drivers’ certificates valid are for four years.
    • F. Effective in 2011, the Nevada State Administrative Manual Section 1320 was revised to prevent texting while driving a state vehicle section reads as follows:

      A person shall not drive a State motor vehicle while using an electronic wireless communications device to write, send, or read a text-based communication. a) As used in this section “write, send, or read a text-based communication” means using an electronic wireless communications device to manually communicate with any person using a text-based communication, including, but not limited to, communications referred to as a text message, instant message, or electronic mail. b) For purposes of this section, a person shall not be deemed to be writing, reading, or sending a text-based communication if the person reads, selects, or enters a telephone number or name in an electronic wireless communications device for the purpose of making or receiving a telephone call. 2. This does not apply to a driver who is: a) Receiving messages related to the operation or navigation of a motor vehicle; safety-related information including emergency, traffic, or weather alerts; data used primarily by the motor vehicle; or radio. b) Using a device or system for navigation purposes. c) Conducting hands-free wireless interpersonal voice only communication that does not require manual entry, except to activate, deactivate, or initiate a feature or function.”
    • G. SStudents are not allowed to ride in an agency staff or private vehicle unless they are working for the college (e.g. volunteer or student government member).

      The only exception to this is an approved activity/ field trip approved by the appropriated WNC vice president (see Attachment “B” the “Request for Activity/Field Trip Approval Form”) whereby all employee, volunteer or work study drivers must have complied with Defensive Driver Training, “Employee Driver Acknowledgement form/Work Related Business”, and driver license requirements. In addition all students (except WNC employees) must complete Attachment “C” “Activity Waver, Release, and Indemnification Agreement.”

      In addition to the above if private vehicles are used for an activity/field trip. Private vehicle information must be stated on Attachment “D” the “Activity/Field Trip Private Vehicle Information” form.

      NOTE: Vehicle mileage for private vehicles will not be paid to owner drivers unless all vehicle usage procedures are followed.
  • Section 2: Procedures for Checking Out and Maintenance of an Agency Vehicle
    • A. On the Carson campus, a vehicle is checked out through Central Receiving/Mail Services; on the Fallon campus, arrangements for vehicle use are made through the main office.
    • B. In compliance with the Nevada Department of Motor Vehicles and Public Safety, all employees must show a valid driver's license when checking out a state vehicle or have a record of their driver's license on file with Central Receiving/Mail Services (Carson/Douglas) or the Fallon Campus office, and must have a valid driver's license in their possession while operating a state vehicle.
    • C. To comply with State Risk Management, which now handles the college’s vehicle physical damage (APD) insurance, all WNC personnel driving on NSHE business, whether in a state, WNC, or personnel vehicle, must complete and sign the WNC “Employee Driver’s Acknowledgement Form/Work Related Business” see Attachment “A” to this procedure. The purpose of or all campuses to the implementation of the use of the “Employee Driver Acknowledgement Forms” is twofold. First, this form establishes a method of consistently communicating all the rules related to vehicle use that the State has established and establishes best practices related to prevention of claims. Secondly, it provides documentation that the college has implemented a procedure to inform all employees and drivers of the vehicle use rules and thus preserves the ability to have claims accepted and reimbursed.

      In the event of an accident, the State’s claims adjustor will ask for documentation of the employee’s Defensive Drivers Training and documentation of the procedures in place to notify employees of the rules and requirements related to vehicle use. If this documentation cannot be provided, and one of the established rules was violated, the claim can be denied and/or the employee could be held personally responsible to reimburse the claim costs.
    • D. For in state travel (i.e. trips to meetings, conferences, travel to other college centers to teach etc.), employees should reserve a car at least two days prior to when it is needed. Realizing that the requested two days notice is not always possible, all efforts to reserve a state vehicle will be made, but because of limited numbers of vehicles, a choice as to vehicle type may not be available.
    • E. When checking out a car for out-of-state travel, employees should make a request at least three weeks in advance of a trip.
    • F. A gasoline credit card may be issued to college personnel using agency vehicles. Anyone using a vehicle should check to ensure that the vehicle used has at least one-half of a tank of gas when returning the vehicle to the college. Personnel who pay cash for gas purchases must have a receipt in order to be reimbursed.
    • G. If a driver notes problems with a vehicle, the problem must be reported to the college's motor pool immediately upon returning to the college.
    • H. Vehicle users must discard all trash upon returning the vehicles.
    • I. Smoking is prohibited in all college and state motor pool vehicles.
  • Section 3: NSHE Vehicle Insurance
    • A. The Nevada System of Higher Education (NSHE) is self-insured for vehicle liability through the State of Nevada Torts Claim Fund. The Office of the Attorney General administers the Fund. Claims are handled in accordance with Chapter 41 of the Nevada Revised Statutes. Under Chapter 41, claims against the state and NSHE are limited to $75,000 per cause of action. There is no per occurrence cap on claims.
      • 1. Liability insurance for NSHE owned vehicles - Liability includes bodily injury or property damage to others, including passengers in our vehicle, arising out of a NSHE driver's negligence. The NSHE employee is generally entitled to defense and indemnification in such situations.
      • 2. Liability insurance for Volunteers - A person, who performs volunteer service under the direct supervision and control of and for the benefit of NSHE, is considered an employee for liability purposes and is generally entitled to defense and indemnification.
      • 3. Liability insurance for student employees - Students cannot be defended or indemnified by the NSHE under Nevada law unless the student is also an employee and is acting as such at the time of the accident. Students performing required course work are not volunteers.
    • B. Uninsured motorist coverage (coverage for bodily injury to a vehicle occupant caused by an at-fault driver who does not have insurance or enough insurance) - NSHE does NOT provide uninsured motorist coverage. In this situation, an injured NSHE employee would have his medical bills and part of his lost wages (when eligible) paid by Workers Compensation.
    • C. Medical payments coverage - The coverage provides limited medical expense to anyone injured in a vehicle accident regardless of fault. NSHE does NOT provide medical payments coverage. An injured NSHE employee in this situation would have his medical bills and part of his lost wages paid by Workers Compensation.
    • D. Vehicle physical damage coverage for NSHE owned vehicles - Vehicles can be insured for Comprehensive and Collision (collectively known as Automobile Physical Damage coverage or APD) at your option through a self-insurance program funded by the State of Nevada, effective July 1, 2009. Claims will continue to be administered by NSHE Risk Management. This coverage is not provided unless requested by the department owning the vehicle. The department bears the cost of repairs or replacement of a damaged vehicle when coverage has not been requested. Insured vehicles are subject to a deductible of $300. The deductible will be waived when it is recovered from another party.
      • 1. NSHE owned vehicles insured with APD while being used "off-road, are subject to a $2,000 department deductible. For additional information, see the document "NSHE Vehicles Used Off-Road" on the BCN Risk Management website at: http://www.bcn-nshe.org/hr/riskmanagement/
    • E. Automotive Physical Damage Coverage and Liability Coverage, add, delete or change coverage - A request to have a vehicle covered must be made within 30 days of purchase. This request should be made by completing a URM-004 form. Once the form is completed, it should be submitted to the BCN Risk Management Office. Requests to delete a vehicle or change liability or APD coverage should also be made by completing a URM-004 form.

      The URM-004 can be located at:

      http://www.bcn-nshe.org/downloads/riskmgmt/urm004vehiclechangeform.pdf
      • 1. For more information on insurance and auto physical damage procedures see the BCN Risk Management office website at:
        http://www.bcn-nshe.org/hr/riskmanagement/
      • 2. Covered Vehicles: Any vehicle that is scheduled for automobile liability coverage with the State is eligible to have APD coverage. This includes busses, cars, trucks, dump trucks, motor homes, motorcycles, trailers, Gators and golf carts.
      • 3. Leased Vehicles: When the lease agreement requires that NSHE insure these vehicles, the same provisions will apply to these vehicles that apply to vehicles owned by NSHE.
    • F. All WNC motor pool vehicles have NSHE accident packets in the glove box. With-in 48 hours of an accident you must complete the accident report and file it with Business Center North and the Attorney General's Office. To meet this deadline it is important to notify your supervisor, as well as the Carson City motor pool and the WNC Carson Environmental Health and Safety Department for assistance.
  • Section 4: Personal/Privately-owned Vehicles
    • A. Personal/privately-owned vehicles - NSHE does not have insurance coverage on the personal vehicle of an employee. Persons using their privately owned vehicles for regular business use should inform their insurance agent. In some cases, a "business use rate" may be applied. In the event of an accident, the personal vehicle insurance carrier would be required to provide coverage for liability, physical damage to the vehicle and legal defense for NSHE.
    • B. Private Vehicle Use for College's Convenience - If a college employee is directed by his department administrator to use a private vehicle for the college's convenience, he/she shall be reimbursed at the current higher rate (see Travel Policy) allowed for reimbursement per mile and shall be entitled to reimbursement for meals and lodging enroute.
      • 1. An employee shall not be directed to use a private vehicle if a college vehicle is available unless the round trip is 75 miles or less. Use of a private vehicle is prohibited for transportation of students on official trips.
      • 2. A college employee must use a private vehicle when using Reno/Tahoe International Airport for a trip exceeding one day, and will be reimbursed at the current higher rate allowed for reimbursement per mile.
      • 3. Taxicab, bus fare and parking receipts are required for reimbursement of these expenditures.
      • 4. A college employee leaving from his/her college workstation and returning the same day must use a college vehicle, when available.
        • a. If a college vehicle is NOT available, the college employee may use a personal vehicle and obtain reimbursement at the current higher rate allowed for reimbursement per mile. Vehicle non-availability form must be obtained from appropriate college motor pool office.
        • b. If a college vehicle is available, and the college employee chooses to use their personal vehicle, he/she is reimbursed at the lower rate allowed for reimbursement per mile.
    • C. Private Vehicle Use for Employee's Convenience - If a college employee is authorized by their appropriate department administrator to use a private car for the employee's convenience for a trip to a city served by commercial airlines, he/she is reimbursed the round trip air coach ticket cost or at the current lower rate allowed for reimbursement per mile, whichever is less, to the destination city.
      • 1. When a college vehicle is available, and a college employee's request is authorized by an administrator to use his/her private vehicle for a trip to a city not served by commercial airlines, he/she is at the current lower rate allowed for reimbursement per mile.
      • 2. There shall be no reimbursement of meals enroute, or for any other enroute expenses. Reimbursement departure and return times should correspond to the airline departure and return times.
    • D. In all cases where private vehicles are used, reimbursement of mileage payments will not be made unless all vehicle usage requirements are followed including defensive drivers training, employee driver acknowledgment forms, and current driver's license on file.
  • Section 5: Vehicle Rentals
    • A. Rental Vehicles: Vehicles must be rented from companies with whom the State of Nevada's Purchasing Division has negotiated overriding agreements. This information is found on their website at: http://purchasing.state.nv.us/Vehicle_Rentals/Vehicle_rental.htm

      NOTE: Departments renting from car rental companies with whom there is no overriding agreement will be responsible for all APD claims and other contractual fees relating to those rentals. Should it be necessary to rent a vehicle outside of these agreements, the collision damage waiver must be accepted and paid for at the time of the rental.
    • B. NSHE has a rental agreement with Enterprise Rent-a-Car that provides primary automobile liability limits of $500,000 per claim. This insurance will pay damages to third parties that the NSHE would otherwise have to pay. The program also provides for a FULL LOSS DAMAGE WAIVER with no deductible (the rental company does not hold the renter responsible for damage to the rented vehicle). This means there is no charge to the NSHE or the driver for physical damages to a rental vehicle. This program can be accessed online at http://www.enterprise.com or by calling 1-800-593-0505. This program will be honored by all Enterprise locations in Nevada. The NSHE rental agreement account number and PIN number must be referenced to insure access to the insurance coverage. The NSHE rental agreement account number is on this web-site "http://purchasing.state.nv.us/Vehicle_Rentals/Vehicle_rental.htm" (this is the State of Nevada Department of Administration Purchasing Division. Please contact the BCN Risk Management Office at 775-682-6105 for the account and PIN number for they may change.)
    • C. NSHE can also use the State of Nevada Purchasing Department's four automobile rental agreements. These agreements provide primary liability insurance coverage for $100,000 per claim, $300,000 per accident, and $25,000 property damage. While these limits are not as good as those provided by Enterprise, they are much better than renting a vehicle without using them. These agreements also provide for a FULL LOSS DAMAGE WAIVER with no deductible. Current information on these agreements is available at http://purchasing.state.nv.us/rental.htm. The Vehicle must be rented in the name of the individual traveler, and the State of Nevada rental agreement account number and PIN number must be referenced to assure the contracted price and appropriate insurance coverage are provided. The State of Nevada account number is NA54621. (Please contact the BCN Risk Management Office at 775-682-6105 for the PIN number.)
    • D. There are exclusions under the Enterprise and State's programs for:
      • 1. Driving under the influence of alcohol or drugs
      • 2. Driving off road
      • 3. Vehicles rented principally for personal use
      • 4. Vehicles driven by non-employees (which means students cannot drive unless they are also paid employees and acting as such at the time they are driving)
      • 5. Anyone under the age of twenty-one.
    • E. Enterprise Rent-A-Car or the State purchasing programs must be used whenever they are available. The campus and renting department are responsible for all damages to a rented vehicle if the vehicle is rented from a rental agency other than those in the two programs above. Payment for damages to the rented vehicle in this situation may be available under the employee's personal insurance or by a Loss Damage Waiver if one was purchased from the rental agency.
    • F. Rental trucks and sport utility vehicles (SUVs) - If a truck or SUV is rented from anyone other than Enterprise Rent-A-Car, please call the BCN Risk Management Office prior to renting the vehicle to ensure that proper insurance coverage is obtained.
    • G. Long-term rentals - Long-term rentals requiring APD coverage must be reported to the NSHE's BCN Risk Management Office prior to the date of the rental. Coverage cannot be retroactive. The request for liability coverage must be made within 30 days of the rental.
    • H. Rentals in foreign countries - NSHE has no contracts with rental companies that apply to foreign countries. Employees renting a car in a foreign country should purchase the insurance offered by the rental company.
    • I. If a college employee is authorized by the appropriate administrator to rent a vehicle while conducting college business (i.e., out-of-state travel in conjunction with conferences, workshops, etc.), the employee will be reimbursed for the rental cost, excluding the insurance waived collision deductibles.
    • J. Fifteen-passenger vans may not be rented, leased or used in the transaction of college business.
  • Section 6: Vehicle Accidents/Claims
    • A. Accidents involving NSHE owned vehicles - All accidents involving another party must be reported to the BCN Risk Management Office and to the Tort Claims Manager in the Attorney General's Office within 48 hours. Details of the accident should be reported on the URM-002 (Vehicle Accident Report).
    • B. Claims for damages to NSHE owned vehicles with APD coverage should be reported to the BCN Risk Management Office as soon as possible. Reports should be made utilizing the URM-002 (Vehicle Accident Report) form and filled out as completely as possible. The department is responsible for obtaining three repair estimates. Reimbursement will be made based on the lowest estimate. There is a $300.00 department deductible. Claims will be adjusted by BCN or BCS Risk management.
    • C. If a third party is responsible for the damage to a NSHE vehicle, the BCN Risk Management Office will subrogate against the third party's insurer for the repair or replacement of the damaged vehicle. If the third party has no insurance or is not able otherwise to pay for the damages, the cost of repairs will be reimbursed through the BCN Risk Management Office if there is APD coverage on the vehicle. The $300.00 deductible will be applied.
    • D. Accidents involving rental vehicles - Damages to rental cars should be reported to the rental agency and the BCN Risk Management Office as soon as possible.
    • E. Glass Repairs - If the damage is such that a repair, rather than replacement, will take care of the damaged glass, departments are encouraged to make the repair. These repairs usually cost between $30 and $50 and are 100% reimbursable. Multiple estimates are not required for glass repairs and the usual $300 comprehensive deductible is waived.
    • F. Glass Replacement - NSHE Risk Management uses the contracts awarded by the State of Nevada. Departments utilizing these vendors will not be required to obtain competitive bids for automobile glass replacement. The URM-007 (Windshield/Glass Loss Report) form should be completed and submitted to the BCN Risk Management Office with a check for the $300 deductible. Attach the original invoice if BCN Risk Management is requested to pay the vendor directly. Go to the Windshield Repair Vendors form for a list of authorized vendors. Departments unwilling to utilize preferred glass replacement vendors must obtain three (3) estimates for vehicle glass replacement and have the glass replaced for the lowest available cost. Exceptions to this rule may be made on a case-by-case basis in rural areas where there are not three available vendors. Because of the nature of glass replacement claims, agencies may obtain telephone estimates for windshield and other vehicle glass replacements. However, these estimates should still be documented for the file. Reimbursement of claims not utilizing contracted vendors must also be made using the URM-007 (Windshield/Glass Loss Report) form, which also helps to document telephone estimates.
  • Section 7: State Motor Pool
    • A. A college employee, with the approval of the appropriate administrator, may use state motor pool vehicles, if an agency vehicle is unavailable.
    • B. All State-owned vehicles shall be used only for authorized official business and driven by qualified and authorized personnel in a safe and courteous manner. (State Administrative Manual, Twenty-Fourth Edition, page 80, State Vehicles, and Chapter 1300)
    • C. A partial list of potential abuses includes:
      • 1. Driving between home and work stations at beginning and end of shift or during lunch
      • 2. Driving by anyone other than authorized state employees
      • 3. Driving on personal business, visiting, shopping trips, etc.
      • 4. Carrying unauthorized passengers
      • 5. Excessive speed and poor driving habits
      • 6. Improper care and treatment of state property
    • D. Motor Pool Locations and Hours
      • 1. State motor pool information is available at the following website - http://www.motorpool.state.nv.us/
      • 2. Parking space for private vehicles is available.
      • 3. Motor pool vehicles may be assigned to other locations throughout the state.
    • E. Motor Pool Requisitioning
      • 1. College employees will present a completed Rental Request Form (vehicle requisition) signed by an authorized college administrator to the motor pool attendant. The Rental Request Form can be located at:

        http://motorpool.state.nv.us/Word%20Docs/MP-2%20Rental%20Request%20Form.pdf

        All employees who complete the approved defensive driving class will receive a certificate of completion. Employees with current certificates will be asked to attach a copy to the MP-2 form when submitting a request to Motor Pool. We understand that there will be unique circumstances for non-compliance and Motor Pool will not deny use if the certificate is not presented. However, Risk Management will be auditing the Motor Pool forms and initiate follow up if defensive driving has not been completed.
      • 2. The motor pool attendant will enter the vehicle number and starting mileage on the requisition. If the trip destination is away from motor pool service areas, credit cards, field requisitions and instructions are furnished to the driver. The pool will retain the vehicle requisition while the vehicle is in service.
      • 3. On the return, the driver will note in the remarks section of the requisition, any discrepancies encountered. Emergency service, if necessary, will be provided as instructed by the attendant.
    • F. Insurance and Accident Reporting
      • 1. Accidents must be reported promptly to the college motor pool and to risk management, as well as normal law enforcement agencies.
      • 2. In the event of an accident where driver neglect is apparent or where defensive driving practices are not used, the college motor pool shall follow-up with risk management and with the driver's supervisor. In such an event, the college employee driving the vehicle is required to complete recertification under the National Safety Council Defensive Driver Training program.
      • 3. Liability coverage on state vehicles provides insurance to the state, its officers and employees (or volunteers formally registered with an agency) when driving state vehicles.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted July 1, 1983 Dates Revised September 6, 2011; November 3, 2009; September 2, 2008; November 20, 2007; May 11, 2004; September 1, 1998; October 1, 1993; June 1, 1993

Memo: March 27, 1992, from Randy Waterman to Edy Anderson
NRS: Chapter 41; Chapter 42; and Chapter 336;
State Administrative Manual: 0246.0; 0250.0; 252.0; 0254.0; 256.0; and 2900

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/6-2-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 6-2-2: Accident Involving Motor Pool Vehicle

WNC Policy 6-2-2
Procedure: Accident Involving Motor Pool Vehicle
Policy No.: 6-2-2
Department: Facilities Planning & Management
Contact: Director
Policy:

Any and all accident or incidents involving a Motor Pool vehicle must be reported.

  • Section 1: Procedures
    • A. An accident report form/packet is located in the glove compartment of all motor pool vehicles. IF YOU ARE INVOLVED IN AN ACCIDENT, FOLLOW THESE PROCEDURES:
      • 1. Stop at once.
      • 2. Render aid to the injured.
      • 3. Notify police and give exact location, and advise if there are injuries. The WNC motor pool should also be notified. The motor pool contacts are 445-3354 for Carson City and 423-7565 ext. 2250 in Fallon.
      • 4. Obtain name, address, and vehicle license number of other party(s), and obtain name and addresses of all witnesses. Use witness statement cards found in the glove compartment of the vehicle for this information.
      • 5. Complete as much of the police and state accident reports as possible at the scene of the accident. DO NOT SIGN OR MAKE A STATEMENT AS TO RESPONSIBILITY.
        • a. Include any other information you have; however, DO NOT hold your report for any additional items. The additional items can be forwarded at a later date as soon as you receive them.
        • b. Should the other driver wish to pursue a claim, provide them with a Self-Insurance Program Information Card (in accident packet in vehicle) or refer them to Business Center North (682-6105).
      • 6. As soon as possible, notify your supervisor and request that the Motor Pool (if not done previously) be notified. If an accident occurs on a weekend or holiday, notify the office on next working day. The NSHE Vehicle Accident report URM-002 must be completed within 48 hours and forwarded to BCN Risk Management office.
      • 7. Claims involving bodily injury to a non-college employee should be telephoned (784-4394) or faxed (784-4363) to Business Center North as soon as possible.
      • 8. Within 48 hours, submit one copy of the Nevada System of Higher Education Accident Report (form URM-002) to the Motor Pool and one copy to Business Center North and to the TORT Claim Manager in the Nevada State Attorney General's Office. Accident reports must include supervisor's signature. The URM-002 form should be in the glove box, if not contact BCN Risk Management to get one or download the form from the BCN Risk Management website:

        http://www.bcn-nshe.org/downloads/?deptID=Risk%20Management.
    • B. Driving on college/university business carries with it responsibilities. Observe all traffic laws, buckle up, and drive defensively.
    • C. Failure to comply with the above procedures may subject driver to revocation of Motor Pool use privileges.
    • D. Departments/Divisions having the accident will be asked to pay the insurance deductible cost that is normally $300.00. If reports are not submitted promptly causing the claim to be denied, the department or division may be requested pay more of the costs.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted March 1, 1989 Dates Revised November 3, 2009; September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004; June 1, 1993
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/6-2-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 6-3-1: Construction Management Process

WNC Policy 6-3-1
Procedure: Construction Management Process
Policy No.: 6-3-1
Department: Facilities Planning & Management
Contact: Director
Policy:

It will be the responsibility of the Facilities Management and Planning Department to respond to the needs of departments at Western Nevada College (WNC) and work with the State Public Works Board of Nevada (SPWB) to:

  • Section 1: Define the Scope and Budget of Planned Projects
    • A. Facilities Management will work with other departments to determine their needs, wants and desires then assist in defining the scope and budgetary requirements of all proposed projects and any possible funding sources.
    • B. Projects will be reviewed and approved by the Facilities Committee. This will be done in accordance with the NSHE Purchasing Policies and Procedures.
  • Section 2: Request Delegation of Authority for Projects that May Be Managed In- House
    • A. Facilities will write a letter requesting "Delegation of Authority" for projects they feel they have the expertise and resources to manage in house.
  • Section 3: Assist in the Selection of the Architectural Firm if Project Scope Requires
    • A. If warranted by the size and or complexity of the proposed project Facilities Management and Planning staff would work to select an architectural firm to design the project, with or without the assistance of the Nevada State Public Works Board Staff.
  • Section 4: Work With Architect and/or SPWB to Develop Conceptual Designs of New Project
    • A. Facilities Management staff will work with the architect to develop the conceptual design into a buildable design for construction, which fits within the established budget.
  • Section 5: Refine the Conceptual Design to Meet the Current and Future Needs of WNC
    • A. Further refine the design to provide a complete set of building plans, blueprints and the construction documents necessary to put the proposed project out to bid.
  • Section 6: Monitor Construction Budget to Avoid Unexpected Cost Overruns
    • A. Monitor the construction budget and progress to insure that the project is staying on track and that the budget will be sufficient to continue through to project completion, and warn all affected parties as soon as possible of impending shortfalls.
  • Section 7: Act as Liaison Between WNC and SPWB Staff
    • A. Coordinate all activities between Western Nevada College and the State Public Works Board Staff to keep all parties aware of the requirements of all other parties.
  • Section 8: Oversee Construction to Insure the Best Interests of WNC Are Maintained
    • A. Oversee the construction project to insure that all proposed changes to the project are in the best interest of Western Nevada College, now and well into the future.
  • Section 9: Insure Accuracy of "As Built" Drawings or Future Use
    • A. Insure that all parties maintain current "As Built" drawings so that each deviation from construction plans, blueprints and documents is properly documented for future reference for maintenance, remodels and additions.
  • Section 10: Coordinate With Contractor to Insure Least Amount of Negative Impact to WNC Students
    • A. Meet regularly with construction foreman or superintendent to insure that the negative impact to students, faculty and staff is kept to an absolute minimum.
  • Section 11: Advise Affected Departments of Progress of Project for Smooth Transition
    • A. Keep all affected departments advised of progress of the project so that they can make the necessary adjustments in a timely manor to facilitate a smooth transition to the new facilities.
  • Section 12: Act As the Hub of the Communication Process for All Interested Parties
    • A. Keep the State Public Works Board, Architectural Firm, Using Department(s), and all other affected parties, current with the status of the project and the needs and wants of WNC, the Using Department(s), and the Facilities Maintenance requirements, to eliminate any last minute surprises and confusion and to insure the satisfaction of the using department with the final results.
    • B. This will be done prior to the design phase, throughout the entire construction or remodel project, and after completion to identify what worked and what didn't for future projects.
  • Section 13: Coordinate the Move-in of Departments for Least Amount of Disruption
    • A. Coordinate the moving in of departments in such a way as to cause the least amount of disruption to students, facility, staff and programs. Preferably these moves should occur during breaks, so as to have no negative impact on students or their studies.
  • Section 14: Remodel Reassigned Vacated Space to Other Departments & Functions as Required
    • A. Plan the remodeling of reassigned vacated spaces to the best use of Western Nevada College, to meet our goals now and well into the future in accordance with the WNC mission statement.
  • Section 15: Monitor Area Around Construction Site to Insure Safety of Students, Staff and Facilities
    • A. Keep a constant vigil to insure that all work within and around the construction site is done in the safest manner, that the areas around the site and where materials are stored are kept neat and all materials are stacked safely, all open trenches are covered or fenced off, and all other safety concerns are properly dealt with in a prompt manner.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted September 23, 2003 Dates Revised September 2, 2008
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
NRS Code NRS 034.396

NSHE Board of Regents' Meeting Minutes: 1/66; 4/72; 1/74; 4/82; 10/85; 10/91; 8/02

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/6-3-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 6-3-2: Education Specifications Committee Appointment for College Construction Projects

WNC Policy 6-3-2
Procedure: Education Specifications Committee Appointment for College Construction Projects
Policy No.: 6-3-2

This policy is has been rescinded and is no longer active.

If you wish to view an archive of this policy, please visit the WNC library.

Note: Policy removed on 8/4/2008 as directed by presidential staff.

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-1-1: Contracts

WNC Policy 7-1-1
Procedure: Contracts
Policy No.: 7-1-1
Department: Finance & Administrative Services
Contact: Vice President of Finance and Administrative Services
Policy:

WNC handles all non-employment contracts in the manner outlined in the following procedure.

  • Section 1: Definitions
    • A. Contract - as defined in the NSHE Procedures Manual, Chapter 5, Section 3:
      • 1. "A contract is an agreement between two or more persons (or entities) that creates an obligation to do or not to do a particular thing. Its essential components are competent parties (persons or entities legally capable of contracting), subject matter (the purpose of the contract), a legal consideration (the inducement to contract, usually money or something of value, but also including mere promises to perform something or refrain from doing something), mutuality of agreement (all parties must voluntarily enter the contract) and mutuality of obligation (all parties are obligated to do something or not to do something they otherwise have a right to do).
      • 2. Labels do not control whether a contract exists or not. The following, which are not meant to be all-inclusive, are all contracts as they constitute an agreement between two or more persons that creates an obligation to do or not to do a particular thing (this policy does not include letter of appointment contracts):
        • a. contract
        • b. agreement
        • c. lease
        • d. rental agreement
        • e. letter or memorandum of intent
        • f. letter or memorandum of agreement
        • g. letter or memorandum of understanding
        • h. employee separation agreement
        • i. facility use agreement
        • j. education affiliation agreement
        • k. purchase order
        • l. grant application
        • m. grant agreement"
    • B. To be valid, the agreement must state that it is entered into by the BOARD OF REGENTS OF THE NEVADA SYSTEM OF HIGHER EDUCATION, on behalf of Western Nevada College. Similarly, the signature block should read:

      THE BOARD OF REGENTS OF THE NEVADA SYSTEM OF HIGHER
      EDUCATION, on behalf of Western Nevada College


      By: ______________________________
      Chancellor (or appropriate title if
      signature has been delegated)
  • Section 2: Signature Authority
    • A. The president, pursuant to the delegation of authority from the Chancellor set forth in the NSHE Procedures Manual, Chapter 5, Section 3, Question 13, has signature authority for all contracts which require consideration (cash, property, or services) valued at one million dollars ($1,000,000) or less calculated by adding the total cumulative payments, delivery or performance over the entire term of the contract, and which are for terms of five years or less or which provide the right to renew for terms that do not exceed five years in the aggregate and other prescribed agreements. Contracts exceeding these limitations must be recommended by the President and forwarded to the Chancellor for signature.
    • B. The president, pursuant to authorization granted in the NSHE Procedures Manual, Chapter 5, Section 3, Question 14, has delegated to the vice presidents of Academic and Student Affairs, Finance and Administrative Services, Development and External Relations, and Human Resources and General Counsel signature authority for their appropriate areas, with the following limitations:
      • 1. The contract must not exceed $100,000.00.
      • 2. The contract must not exceed one year in duration.
    • C. Notwithstanding the delegation of authority set forth above, no vice president shall enter into a contract that substantially impacts the college without informing the president and obtaining the president's authorization to execute such an agreement.
    • D. A letter memorializing the President's delegation is on file in the President's Office. Any contract exceeding the foregoing limitations must be signed by the President or his/her designee in times of absence.
  • Section 3: Contracting Procedures
    • A. All contracts must be reviewed by the vice president for Human Resources and General Counsel prior to signature.
    • B. A signed contract must be on file in the vice president of Finance and Administrative Services office prior to the effective date of the contract.
    • C. The Facilities Management & Planning department is responsible for coordinating and processing on-site Facility Use Agreements for the college.
  • Section 4: Signature Authorization Form
  • Section 5: Exceptions
    • A. Any exceptions to this policy require the written approval of the college president or his/her designee(s).
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted July 23, 2003 Dates Revised November 3, 2009; September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

NSHE Procedures Manual, Chapter 5, Section 3

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-1-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-1-2: Compensation of School Districts for Use of Facilities

WNC Policy 7-1-2
Procedure: Compensation of School Districts for Use of Facilities
Policy No.: 7-1-2
Department: Finance & Administrative Services
Contact: Vice President of Finance and Administrative Services
Policy:

WNC will not compensate school districts for use of facilities except in negotiated circumstances.

  • Section 1: Payment to School Districts Will Be Derived as Follows
    • A. WNC will project the office space needed from the district during the academic year.
    • B. If applicable, the costs of salaries for services provided to WNC will be determined over and above the facility use amount.
    • C. The compensation is subject to renegotiation each year.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted May 4, 1984 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-1-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-1-3: Fringe Benefits Calculation

WNC Policy 7-1-3
Procedure: Fringe Benefits Calculation
Policy No.: 7-1-3

This policy is has been rescinded and is no longer active.

If you wish to view an archive of this policy, please visit the WNC library.

Note: Policy removed on 8/4/2008 as directed by presidential staff.

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-2-1: Travel

WNC Policy 7-2-1
Procedure: Travel
Policy No.: 7-2-1
Department: Controller's Office
Contact: Controller
Policy:

All WNC travel is governed by the State Administrative Manual (SAM) and the WNC Travel Policy.

  • Section 1: In-State Travel
    • A. Travel Advance
      • 1. If an advance is desired, a completed Employee Travel Request form must be submitted to the controller's office at least five (5) working days prior to the time the check is needed.
      • 2. Advances are not made for less than $50.00.
      • 3. An Employee Travel Expense Reimbursement Claim must be filed and advances must be cleared within fifteen working days after completion of the trip.
      • 4. An advance is not issued if a previous advance has not been cleared.
      • 5. Advances are released three working days prior to the trip.
      • 6. No advances are made for airfare.
    • B. Allowable Travel Expenses
      • 1. Per Diem Rate
        • a. Persons traveling in-state shall receive travel reimbursement at a per diem rate as specified at www.gsa.gov.
          1) Lodging: per www.gsa.gov (receipt required)
          2) Breakfast: Per www.gsa.gov - Must leave employee residence or work location before 6:00 a.m. and return after 8:00 a.m. (receipt not required).
          3) Lunch: per www.gsa.gov - Must leave employee residence or work location before 11:00 a.m. and return after 1:00 p.m. (receipt not required).
          4) Dinner: per www.gsa.gov - Must leave employee residence or work location before 5:00 p.m. and return after 7:00 p.m. (receipt not required).
          5) Maximum per diem: see www.gsa.gov
          6) WNC calculates per diem based on the departure/arrival times and does not follow the "First Day/Last Day of Travel" per diem rate found on www.gsa.gov.
        • b. Employees must be at least 75 miles from their principal workstation to receive reimbursement for meals.
        • c. The employee may claim in-room telephone charges if details of the numbers called, business purpose, and original receipts are provided.
        • d. The employee may claim internet charges with documentation used for business purposes.
        • e. Reimbursement for lodging in areas less than 50 miles from the employee's principal work station must be pre-approved and justified in writing or their Employee Travel Request form will not be allowed unless:
          1) Inclement weather conditions make travel difficult
          2) Late official meetings are required
          3) Individuals involved are conference hosts responsible for the meeting arrangements.
        • f. Upon approval of the Academic Director, divisions may make exceptions to the rate of reimbursement for lodging when the following applies:
          1) Lodging is procured at a prearranged place such as a hotel when a meeting, conference or training session is held, or
          2) Costs escalated because of special events; lodging within prescribed allowances cannot be obtained nearby; and costs to commute to/from the nearby location exceed the cost savings from occupying less expensive lodging. If the condition(s) above exist, divisions may apply the following rules to the rate of reimbursement for in-state travel:
          3) 150% of the standard CONUS federal per diem rate for nonsurveyed in-state travel sites.
        • g. When requesting reimbursement for higher room rates, the employee must obtain pre-approval by the president or appropriate vice president and must attach a copy of the approval to their reimbursement request.
        • h. When traveling in-state, ensure that room taxes are not charged by providing a copy of the Tax Exempt Letter found on Westnet.
        • i. Travelers will not be reimbursed when using personal hotel or reward program points.
        • j. Reimbursement requests for taxi, bus, shuttle or limousine expenses must include original receipts and must outline what portion relates to gratuity/tip. Gratuities/tips are reimbursed under incidental expenses.
        • k. Parking or storage fees will be allowed when considered necessary for either college or private vehicles (original receipt required).
        • l. Employees may receive up to the rate permitted by the United States General Services Administration (GSA) for incidental expenses (fees for luggage carts, metered parking, subway/bus use, toll charges and tips/gratuity); no receipt required.
        • m. When employees receive free meals or lodging, no reimbursement is allowed.
        • n. When conference/meeting fees provide for meals, no additional reimbursement will be allowed for meals.
        • o. Meals exceeding the state reimbursement rates will not be allowed as part of the registration fee when listed as an optional item on the registration form.
        • p. Employees may voluntarily claim less than the established rates.
    • C. Method of Travel
      • 1. Transportation must be by the most economical means, considering total cost, time spent in transit, and the availability of state-owned vehicles, personal vehicles and special use vehicles.
    • D. Airlines and Travel Arrangements
      • 1. Airline tickets should be purchased at discounted rates whenever possible.
      • 2. Travelers who lose the discounted rate because of a lack of planning will be reimbursed at the discounted rate only.
      • 3. Transportation from air terminals shall be by the most economical means.
      • 4. Travelers will not be reimbursed when using personal airline miles.
    • E. Bonus Flight Coupons
      • 1. Whenever possible, frequent flier mileage earned because of state-paid travel, should be used by the college to meet state travel needs.
      • 2. Travelers will not be reimbursed when using personal airline miles.
    • F. Combining State Business and Personal Travel
      • 1. Employees who incorporate private and state travel must demonstrate that the state costs are not increased by the personal travel.
      • 2. The employee must clearly delineate the private and the state charges when submitting a travel claim or the claim will be returned for additional documentation.
    • G. Financial Responsibility for Canceled Trips
      • 1. Employees may be held financially responsible if a trip is canceled based on their request.
      • 2. Employees will not be held responsible for trips canceled from circumstances beyond their control.
    • H. Use of Rental Vehicles
      • 1. The motor pool must be used before rental vehicles for in-state travel.
      • 2. A rental vehicle may be used in Carson City, Reno and Las Vegas only when the state motor pool division gives written notice that no motor pool vehicle is available.
      • 3. The State's Purchasing division negotiated rental agreements with various vehicle rental companies that provide first dollar liability insurance, without having to pay an additional amount at the time of rental.
        • a. These agreements provide a full physical damage waiver.
        • b. The use of these contracted companies is mandatory, and if we fail to utilize them then the agency, in this case the NSHE or the individual institution, is being placed at risk for the full value of the rented vehicle.
        • c. Refer to the Nevada State Purchasing division website: http://purchasing.state.nv.us/Vehicle_Rentals/Vehicle_rental.htm before renting a vehicle.
      • 4. BCN Purchasing has contracted with certain companies for out-of-state vehicle rental.
    • I. Private Vehicle Use
      • 1. For institution's convenience
        • a. Legitimate travel is travel that takes place from an employee's work station to another location for business purposes. COMMUTING IS NOT A REIMBURSABLE TRAVEL EXPENSE. For trips related to an employee’s travel to a work location other than a primary assignment, the employee is only paid for the mileage in excess of the standard commute-to-work mileage for that employee, which should be supported with map mileage information (mapquest or google maps detail).
        • b. An employee using their personal vehicle for the state's convenience will be reimbursed at the state approved rate.
        • c. A traveler flying out of Reno for a trip exceeding one day, is requested to use a private vehicle. Since this request is for the college's convenience, the traveler will be reimbursed at the higher state approved rate.
        • d. All travelers leaving from their college work station and returning the same day must use a college vehicle, if one is available.
          1) If a college vehicle is NOT available, the traveler may use a personal vehicle, and receives reimbursement at the higher state approved rate.
          2) A "Statement of Vehicle Availability" from the person keeping the vehicle log must be attached to the travel reimbursement request prior to the date used.
        • e. Travelers living in Reno may periodically be requested to pick up information at a NSHE facility before coming to WNC. These people will be reimbursed at the higher state approved rate from Reno to Carson City.
      • 2. For employee's convenience
        • a. An employee using a personal vehicle for their convenience will be reimbursed at the lower state rate per mile.
        • b. If a college vehicle is available and the traveler chooses to use a personal vehicle, reimbursement is at the lower state rate per mile.
      • 3. Travel claims are due fifteen working days after the trip is completed. Travel claims submitted more than fifteen working days after the travel occurred must include a letter of explanation approved by the appropriate vice president.
      • 4. Persons traveling on a routine basis on college business must submit travel claims at least once per month. State funded travel claims submitted after July 15 for travel in the preceding year are charged to unrestricted funds.
    • J. Purchase of Plane Tickets
      • 1. Purchasing plane tickets from internet/ travel agencies is discouraged because of the service charges assessed by internet/travel agencies.
      • 2. The Business office will purchase tickets for employees upon receipt of a request from the appropriate account signer. The following information is needed:
        • a. Departure airport
        • b. Destination airport
        • c. Preferred flight number or approximate time of departure
        • d. Account to be charged.
        • e. Legal name on federal identification.
        • f. Birthdate as follows: mm/dd/yyyy.
      • 3. Requests for tickets should be sent via e-mail to the travel desk in the Business office. An e-ticket will be purchased and a confirmation will be sent to the traveler.
      • 4. Travelers may also purchase tickets with a personal credit card and request a reimbursement.
      • 5. If circumstances require purchases from a travel agency, the service charge will be allowed.
      • 6. Travelers will not be reimbursed when using personal airline miles.
    • K. State Motor Pool Use
      • 1. Obtain the Nevada State Motor Pool Daily Vehicle Approval Form from the following site: http://motorpool.state.nv.us/WebPages/Reservations.htm.
      • 2. Travelers on college business in Las Vegas are required to use the state motor pool. The hours of operation are from 7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m.
      • 3. A state motor pool, shuttle is available outside the baggage claim area.
      • 4. A "Daily Vehicle Approval Form" must be completed and confirmed BEFORE the trip.
      • 5. CONTRACT TERMS AND CONDITIONS: The renting agency agrees to exercise all reasonable care and observe all traffic laws while using a state vehicle. Except for acts of God, mechanical failure or identifiable third party accident fault, the renting agency will return state vehicles in the same condition as received, less normal wear and tear, and will be financially responsible for all abuse or physical damage expense. All non-reported accidents/incidents, including accidents /incidents reported after the reporting time requirements, will result in billing to the rental agency for total physical damage sustained by the state vehicle.
      • 6. In the event a vehicle is damaged, which renders the vehicle "out of order" until repairs can be completed; a substitute vehicle may be obtained on a daily rental basis provided substitute vehicles are available.
      • 7. Each motor pool vehicle is issued or assigned with a spare tire, snow chains (except in Las Vegas), jack and jack handle.
        • a. The renting agency will be responsible for returning the vehicle with all items listed above.
        • b. If motor pool must replace missing items, the last renting agency will be billed for replacement items at motor pool cost.
      • 8. REMARKS: Include vehicle malfunctions, service required, accidents, citations received, etc. to the motor pool upon returning vehicle.
  • Section 2: Out-of-State Travel
    • A. Out-of-State Approval
      • 1. An employee's approved travel request form must be signed by the president or appropriate vice president prior to the out-of-state trip.
      • 2. Confirmation of approval of the travel request shall be provided to the employee prior to departure.
    • B. Out-of-State Advance
      • 1. If an advance is desired, an Employee Travel Request form must be filed in the Controller's office at least five (5) working days prior to the time the check is needed.
      • 2. Advances will not be made for less than $50.00.
      • 3. An Employee Travel Expense Reimbursement Claim must be filed and advances must be cleared within fifteen working days after completion of the trip.
      • 4. An advance will not be made if a previous advance has not been cleared.
      • 5. No advances will be made for airfare.
      • 6. Advances will be released three days prior to the trip.
    • C. Out-of-State Allowable Travel Expenses
      • 1. Persons traveling out-of-state shall receive travel reimbursement at a per diem based on www.gsa.gov rates for destination.
      • 2. Per diem and lodging is based upon rates listed at www.gsa.gov
        • a. Lodging : per www.gsa.gov (receipt required)
        • b. Breakfast: per www.gsa.gov-- Must leave employee residence or work location before 6:00 a.m. and return after 8:00 a.m. (receipt not required)
        • c. Lunch per www.gsa.gov -- Must leave employee residence or work location before 11:00 a.m. and return after 1:00 p.m. (receipt not required)
        • d. Dinner per www.gsa.gov -- Must leave employee residence or work location before 5:00 p.m. and return after 7:00 p.m. (receipt not required)
        • e. Total: per www.gsa.gov.
        • f. Maximum per diem: see www.gsa.gov
        • g. WNC calculates per diem based on the departure/arrival times and does not follow the "First Day/Last Day of Travel" per diem rate found on www.gsa.gov.
      • 3. The employee may claim in-room telephone/internet charges if details of the numbers called, business purpose, and original receipts are provided.
      • 4. Reimbursement for lodging in areas less than 50 miles from the employee's principal work station must be justified in writing, in advance, and will not be allowed unless:
        • a. Inclement weather conditions make travel difficult
        • b. Late official meetings are required
        • c. Individuals involved are conference hosts responsible for the meeting arrangements.
      • 5. Travelers will not be reimbursed when using personal hotel or reward program points.
      • 6. Reimbursement requests for taxi, bus, shuttle or limousine expenses must include original receipts and must outline what portion relates to gratuity/tip. Gratuities/tips are reimbursed under incidental expenses.
      • 7. Parking or storage fees will be allowed when considered necessary for either college or private vehicles. (original receipt required)
      • 8. Employees may receive up to the rate permitted by the United States General Services Administration (GSA) for incidental expenses (fees for luggage carts, metered parking, subway/bus use, toll charges and tips); no receipt required.
      • 9. When employees receive free meals or lodging, no reimbursement is allowed; when registration fees provide for meals, no additional reimbursement will be allowed for meals.
      • 10. Meals exceeding the state reimbursement rates will not be allowed as part of the registration fee when listed as an optional item on the registration form.
      • 11. Meals served in flight as part of the airfare may not be claimed for reimbursement.
    • D. Exceptions to Lodging Rates
      • 1. Except for the following, lodging exceeding the out-of-state lodging rates will not be allowed:
        • a. Persons attending conferences and lodging is included in the registration fee, lodging rates above www.gsa.gov will be allowed provided a Travel Request Form is signed and approved, and the lodging does not exceed 175% of rates per www.gsa.gov or 300% of the standard CONUS federal rates for non-surveyed out-of-state travel rates prior to travel.
        • b. Receipts must accompany reimbursement requests.
        • c. When requesting reimbursement for higher room rates, the employee must get pre-approval by the president or appropriate vice president and must attach a copy of the approval to their reimbursement request.
      • 2. Other exceptions to the maximum out-of-state lodging rates must be approved in writing by the president or appropriate vice president.
    • E. Use of Rental Vehicles
      • 1. For out-of-state travel, rental vehicles should only be used when necessary and rented from a company with whom the state has a contract.
      • 2. Justification for renting a vehicle must accompany an out-of-state travel request form.
      • 3. Out-of-state vehicle rental must be approved by the president or appropriate vice president prior to the travel.
    • F. Submission of Out-of-State Travel Claims.
      • 1. Employees have fifteen working days after returning to complete a travel claim. The travel claim should include:
        • a. Out-of-state travel request, including approval for hotel rates in excess of the standard rates.
        • b. If appropriate, a complete brochure and/or correspondence related to the meeting to include program, location, hotel rates, hosted meals, etc.
        • c. A Claim for Employee Travel Expense form must be completed, even if the amount requested is $0 due to expenses being paid by an outside entity.
      • 2. It is the responsibility of the traveler to insure that room rates are confirmed when reservations are made. If hotel rates are not confirmed, the traveler will not be reimbursed for the increased expense.
    • G. Foreign Travel
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted May 11, 2004 Dates Revised September 2, 2014; June 20, 2013; March 12, 2013; July 30, 2012; December 6, 2011; September 2, 2008; April 15, 2008; December 18, 2007; March 28, 2006

SAM: Section 0200-0256
U.S. Department of State: http://aoprals.state.gov/content.asp?content_id=114&menu_id=81
NSHE Business Center North Purchasing Department:

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-2-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-2-1-1: Student Team or Group Travel

WNC Policy 7-2-1-1
Procedure: Student Team or Group Travel
Policy No.: 7-2-1-1
Department: Controller's Office
Contact: Controller
Policy:

All WNC travel is governed by the State Administrative Manual (SAM) and the WNC Travel Manual.

  • Section 1: Definition
    • A. Team travel is defined as any student group, such as a team, class or other organization directly affiliated with and sponsored by the college, traveling to an activity or event directly related to a college recognized function. Team travel includes expenses of college employees required to accompany a student group and appropriately chargeable to team travel expense. For team or group travel claims, one college employee assumes responsibility for the payment and reporting of all expenses associated with the trip. Team travel does not include unchaperoned students.
  • Section 2: Reimbursable Expenses
    • A. Reimbursements for team travel are dependent on the needs and circumstances of each trip. The maximum reimbursements are those approved in the travel section in the WNC Policy Manual. Team travel reimbursements may be less. At least five (5) days prior to each trip, the responsible college employee will submit a travel budget to the athletic director, or appropriate dean for non athletic group travel, for approval. The athletic director, or dean for non-athletic group travel, will review the proposed travel budget to ensure that it does not exceed the standard meal and lodging rates and verify the availability of funds. The travel budget will also be reviewed for adequacy to meet the nutritional needs for the activity and safe lodging of the participants. The amount approved will be advanced to the responsible employee and is the maximum support the college will reimburse. All requests must be accompanied by a roster of all travelers and each traveler's affiliation with WNC (i.e., student, coach, team doctor, etc.).
  • Section 3: Advances
    • A. Advances for team travel may be secured by submission of a Team Travel Advance Request and roster of participants at least five days prior to the time the check is required. An advance will be issued by the WNC Controller's Office with a check payable to the coach or college employee acting in an advisory capacity. The amount of the advance will be the amount approved by the respective dean on the Team Travel Advance Request.
  • Section 4: General Fund Cash Advance Settlement
    • A. Within ten days after the completion of the trip, an expense report on a Claim for Team Travel Expenses form must be filed in the Controller's Office. Food and lodging items on the expense report shall not exceed the amounts preapproved by the athletic director. Other expenses such as transportation will be reimbursed in accordance with the college's general travel policy. Another advance may not be made if a previous travel advance has been outstanding for more than ten days.
    • B. The Claim for Travel Expense must include the original Group Travel Per Diem Sheet signed by each person who traveled with the group/team. This acknowledges their receipt of travel per diem monies or expenditures made on their behalf. A Lodging Room Number List indicating the room assignment for each traveler must also be attached.
    • C. Upon completion of the trip the coach or advisor will submit a completed Claim for Travel Expenses to the Dean who initially approved the trip. If the cash advance amount was in excess of actual needs, the cash advance recipient must return the excess amount by submitting a personal check or money order (NO CASH) payable to the "Board of Regents" with the travel claim. Do not return the excess cash advance directly through the College Business Office. Doing so will not clear the traveler's outstanding cash advance and may delay reimbursement.
  • Section 5: Method of Transportation
    • A. The method of transportation must be the most economical available. Charter planes are not allowed. College employees and students may use State motor pool and college-owned vehicles for travel sponsored by the college, as well as contracted types of commercial transportation.
  • Section 6: Side Trips
    • A. Official business-related side trips by an employee taken during team or group travel should be submitted as a separate travel claim and not included with the team travel claim. However, the employee claim and the team travel claim must cross-reference each other.
  • Section 7: Alcoholic Beverages
    • A. The purchase of alcoholic beverages shall not be included in the travel budget for any trip or part of the reimbursement.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted May 17, 2005 Dates Revised September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-2-1-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-3-1: Purchasing Procedures

WNC Policy 7-3-1
Procedure: Purchasing Procedures
Policy No.: 7-3-1
Department: Controller's Office
Contact: Controller

This policy is available as a downloadable file only.

Download this policy.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted June 25, 1986 Dates Revised May 14, 2013; September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

WNC Memo from Dane Apalategui, Controller: 6-25-86

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-3-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-3-2: Bank Deposits

WNC Policy 7-3-2
Procedure: Bank Deposits
Policy No.: 7-3-2
Department: Finance & Administrative Services
Contact: Controller
Policy:

Process for depositing of cash and checks.

  • Section 1: Procedure
    • A. Controller's office will deposition checks daily via the remote deposit process.
    • B. Controller's office will deposit cash every Tuesday and Friday. Additional deposits may be made as needed at the direction of the controller or designee.
    • C. As directed by the Controller's office, all other college offices/function shall make deposits to the bank or the WNC Controller's office every three days unless the total exceeds $500. For amounts of $500 or more, the deposit shall be daily.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted March 29, 2005 Dates Revised May 3, 2011; September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-3-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-3-3: Policy for Equipment Purchasing and Inventory Control

WNC Policy 7-3-3
Procedure: Policy for Equipment Purchasing and Inventory Control
Policy No.: 7-3-3
Department: Finance & Administrative Services
Contact: Vice President of Finance and Administrative Services
Policy:

WNC process governing the purchasing and inventory control of equipment

  • Section 1: Purchasing of Equipment
    • A. Individual departments and divisions must purchase equipment using standard purchasing procedures and funds from their individual operating accounts, or institutional accounts with appropriate approval. Purchases under $2,000 can be completed utilizing purchase orders through the college Business Office or departmental purchase cards. Purchases over $2,000 will be forwarded to Business Center North for completion. Furniture purchases must conform to WNC policies, including a choosing from a list of approved ergonomic products for chairs and receiving quotes from Nevada Prison Industries for office furniture. Items listed in 2 A of this policy must be included in the college's inventory of sensitive equipment.
  • Section 2: Definitions
    • A. Sensitive Equipment: Equipment valued between $2,000 and $5,000 and all computer equipment. Regardless of the source of funds, approval for purchase of these items must be obtained from the relevant college service area (i.e., Computing Services for computers, Media Services, etc). These items are tracked and inventoried separately by the institution and a report of these items must be provided to the Chancellor and/or Board of Regents upon request. The following items are considered sensitive equipment:
      • 1. Bicycles
      • 2. Camera, digital, film, video
      • 3. Cell phones, two way radios, individual communication devices
      • 4. All computers costing less than $5,000, desktop, servers, laptop, PDA's regardless of acquisition cost
      • 5. Copy, fax and multi-function machines
      • 6. Lawn mowers
      • 7. Microscopes and telescopes
      • 8. Printers
      • 9. Music systems and components
      • 10. Scales and balances
      • 11. Televisions
      • 12. Video: projectors, recorders, monitors
    • B. Fixed assets or Inventoried Equipment: Any items with an initial value of over $5,000 or any firearms. The ownership of this property is vested in the Board of Regents of the NSHE. These items will be purchased by Business Center North and are depreciated on a fixed asset schedule. These items are tracked by System and the inventory records are maintained by BCN. Inventoried equipment is defined as all merchandise meeting the following criteria:
      • 1. Has an unit cost of $5,000 or more
      • 2. Is complete in itself
      • 3. Does not lose its identity even though it may become a component part of another item when placed in use
      • 4. Is of a non-expendable, non-repairable, durable nature with a life expectancy of one-year or more.
      • 5. Any firearms regardless of value.
  • Section 3: New Hire Furniture and/or Equipment
    • A. The purchase of furniture and/or equipment for new employee positions, not previously filled, utilizes this same process and follows this same policy for all furniture and equipment. Departments anticipating filling new positions should budget for furniture and equipment, including computer equipment, which will be needed by the person hired for the position.
  • Section 4: Replacement of Furniture and/or Equipment
    • A. The purchase of furniture and/or equipment for vacant or reallocated positions utilizes the same process and follows the same policy for all furniture and equipment, except the requesting department is responsible for the funding required for the purchase. The requesting department must request a transfer of funds from their operating account to the appropriate College equipment account before the purchase can be made. The College equipment account number may be obtained from the Budget Office.
  • Section 5: Purchase Orders and receiving procedures for purchases over $2,000 and Computer Equipment
    • A. Accounts Payable will send Central Receiving a copy of the purchase order's Receiving Document for any purchases over $2,000, which requires processing through Business Center North.
      • 1. Upon delivery of the equipment, Central Receiving will attach the Receiving Document to the items received and deliver to the requesting division/department. Upon receipt of the invoice, Accounts Payable will send the invoice to the receiving department for signature signifying the purchase was received and approving payment, once the signed invoice is received back to the Business Office it will be paid.
      • 2. For computer equipment, a copy of the purchase order will be sent to Computing Services at the time it is ordered. This will enable Computing Services to match the item upon receipt with the requesting department. Computing Services will deliver the items to the requesting department with a copy of the purchase order. Once the invoice is received it will be forwarded to the receiving department for review and approval. Once a signed invoice is received back to the business office, the invoice will be paid.
  • Section 6: Credit Card Procedures
    • A. Sensitive equipment referenced in section 2 of this policy cannot be purchased with a WNC credit card. Violations of this policy will result in exception notices as follows:
      • 1. First occurrence: letter of explanation from the employee with whom the purchase was generated (explaining why proper procedures were not followed) sent to the Controller. The Business Office will direct the employee to review the WNC policy on purchasing and provide additional training if needed.
      • 2. Second occurrence: letter of explanation (why the purchase was not processed within policy guidelines) from the employee who authorized the purchase with approval from that employee's Vice President sent to the Controller. Upon review of the circumstances, the employees purchase card may be revoked depending on the circumstances of the purchase. If the card is retained, additional training will be provided to the employee on proper purchasing procedures.
      • 3. Third occurrence: Card will be suspended/revoked. Upon an explanation of the circumstances of the purchase, and in conjunction with additional training, the card may be reinstated depending on the situation.
  • Section 7: Inventory requirements
    • A. Fixed asset or inventoried equipment will be subject to an annual inventory. NSHE will forward inventory forms to the Business Office and these forms will be then forwarded to the department having custody of the item(s). The department with custody of the equipment will be required to complete the inventory within the stated timeframe, sign and date the inventory forms and return it to the Business Office. The Business Office will return the completed forms to BCN.
    • B. For sensitive items as defined in Section 2 A., these items will be tracked using WNC campus-based records and the department having custody of the item will be responsible for conducting an annual inventory and forwarding the results to the Business Office. Actual inventory procedures will be promulgated via memorandum from the Business Office, normally in the 4th quarter of the fiscal year along with the sensitive item inventory list from the previous year. The responsible department will conduct an inventory and annotate on the list as inventoried or if not located, what the disposition of the item was (i.e. disposed of through normal channels, transferred to another department, lost or stolen. For new sensitive items received, the receiving department will forward the following data to the Business Office:
      • 1. Description of item including serial number and manufacturer
      • 2. Item location including campus, building name and room number
      • 3. Date acquired and purchase order number
    • C. Once this information is received by the Business Office, the item will be added to the department's inventory list and an equipment tag will be sent to the department to affix to the item.
    • D. If a department disposes of a sensitive item using approved NSHE procedures, a note must be sent to the Controller stating the reason for the disposition of the item and if applicable, the asset tag will be removed from the item and returned to the Business Office. The Business Office will then remove the item from the department's inventory listing.
  • Section 8: Exceptions
    • A. Any exceptions to this policy require the written approval of the college president or designee(s).
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted September 20, 2005 Dates Revised April 6, 2010; September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-3-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-3-4: Policy for Account Administration

WNC Policy 7-3-4
Procedure: Policy for Account Administration
Policy No.: 7-3-4
Department: Finance & Administrative Services
Policy:

Addition/deletion/revision of financial accounts

  • Section 1: Signature Authority Background
    • A. The Vice President of Finance and Administrative Services establishes balance sheet and operating accounts as needed. There are established procedures to request new accounts or change accounts.
    • B. Signature authorization levels are hierarchical:
      • 1. The President has signature authority for all operating accounts within the financial accounting
        system.
      • 2. Each vice president has signature authority for all operating accounts within their appropriate
        area or responsibility.
      • 3. The dean or director has signature authority for all operating accounts within their appropriate
        area of responsibility.
      • 4. Each management level may further delegate signature authority for those operating accounts
        under their direct authority by completing an Account Addition/Change Request Form,
        denoting such delegation.
  • Section 2: Account Creation
    • A. The decision to establish a new account must be made at the highest possible administrative level. The four most important considerations are: 1) the purpose of the account, 2) the funding source for the account, 3) department assignment, and 4) whether there is a current account that can be used for the purpose. Changes of account title or deletion of an account must be coordinated through the Controller’s Office.
  • Section 3: Changing/Deleting an Account
    • A. The account manager may delegate account signature responsibility. To delegate or change
      account signature authorization, change an account name or delete an account, an Account
      Addition/Change Request Form should be obtained from the controller’s office web page and
      completed indicating the change that needs to be made. For mass changes, a spreadsheet
      attached to a signed Account Addition/Change Request Form or a spreadsheet attached to an e-
      mail from the account manager can be used.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted October 12, 2012 Dates Revised
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-3-4.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-4-1: Conflict of Interest

WNC Policy 7-4-1
Procedure: Conflict of Interest
Policy No.: 7-4-1
Department: Controller's Office
Contact: Controller
Policy:

Conflicts of interest are prohibited.

  • Section 1: Conflicts of Interest
    • A. In addition to such conflicts of interest prohibited by law, it shall also be prohibited for a member of the Board of Regents or an employee of the Nevada System of Higher Education to become a contractor or a vendor for the purchase of supplies, equipment, services (except regular employment services) and construction under any contract or purchase order of any kind authorized by the Nevada System of Higher Education under the provisions of this chapter, or to be interested, directly, indirectly, through any member of the regent's of employee's household, as defined by NRS 281.431, or through any business entity in which the regent or employee has a financial interest, as defined by NRS 281.431, in any kind of contract so authorized by the receipt of any commission, profit or compensation of any kind.
    • B. Except where may be prohibited by law, exceptions to this policy may be permitted for contracts or purchase orders for which the proposed contractor or vendor is the sole source for the contract or purchase order, has taken no part in developing the plans or specifications for the contract or purchase order and has not participated in or otherwise actively influenced the consideration or acceptance of offers for the contract or purchase order.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004; October 2, 1984
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
NRS Code NRS 281.431

UNS memo from Donald Klasic, General Counsel to Dr. Bersi, Chancellor, and all UNS Institution Presidents (10/1/84)
NSHE Board of Regents' Meeting Minutes: 6/91; 12/02

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-4-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-4-2: Cell Phone Use

WNC Policy 7-4-2
Procedure: Cell Phone Use
Policy No.: 7-4-2
Department: Controller's Office
Contact: Controller
Policy:

Cell phones will be governed by the usage rules as listed.

  • Section 1: Usage Rules
    • A. The vendor used for cell phone billing must be able to provide incoming and outgoing call numbers and duration.
    • B. While we do not encourage personal calls, essential calls of minimal duration will be allowed on a limited basis.
    • C. Cell phones will be assigned to vehicles when traveling out of town.
    • D. All cell phones will be pre-approved by the President, Vice Presidents or Designees.
    • E. Copies of each bill will be sent to the assigned department for identification and payment of personal calls and for explanation of long distance calls. The bill, payment of personal calls, and long distance log will be sent to the supervisor for approval before being forwarded to the Business Office.
    • F. Anyone in violation of this policy will lose his or her cell phone and disciplinary action may be taken where appropriate.
    • G. All LAND lines will be paid through the College telephone budget account. Any other communication devices such as cell phones or pagers will be paid by the department using the device.
    • H. Business calls made on personal cell phones will be reimbursed at a standard rate as determined by the Business Office.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted April 25, 2000 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004

NSHE Board of Regents' Meeting Minutes: 5/8/03

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-4-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-4-3: Identity Theft Prevention Policy

WNC Policy 7-4-3
Procedure: Identity Theft Prevention Policy
Policy No.: 7-4-3
Department: Finance & Administrative Services
Contact: Vice President of Finance and Administrative Services
Policy:

Detection, identification and mitigation of identity theft

Western Nevada College (WNC) developed and implemented this Identity Theft Prevention Program pursuant to the Federal Trade Commission's Red Flags Rule, which implements Section 114 of the Fair and Accurate Credit Transactions Act of 2003. In recognition that some activities of WNC are subject to the provisions of this Rule as promulgated by the Commission, the college adopted the following policy. This policy complements, and is supported by existing department data security policies at the college.

  • Section 1: Purpose
    As required, WNC establishes an "Identity Theft Program" to detect, identify, and mitigate identity theft in the accounts covered under the Red Flag rules at the college.
    • A. The college will incorporate relevant Red Flags into a policy to enable the college to detect and respond to potential identity theft.
    • B. The college shall ensure that the policy is updated periodically to reflect changes in risks to customers or creditors or to the college from identity theft.
  • Section 2: Definitions
    Pursuant to the Red Flag regulations at 16 C.F.R. 681.2, the following definitions apply to this policy:
    • A. "Identity theft" is a "fraud committed or attempted using the identifying information of another person without authority."
    • B. "Covered accounts"
      • 1. Any University account maintained primarily for a student or related to a loan administered by the University, which involves multiple payments or transactions.
      • 2. Any University account for which there is a reasonably foreseeable risk from identify theft to customers.
    • C. "Red Flag" is a "pattern, practice, or specific activity that indicates the possible existence of identity theft."
    • D. "Identifying information": Any name or number that may be used, alone or in conjunction with any other information, to identify a specific person," including, but not limited to: name, address, telephone number, social security number, date of birth, government issued driver's license or identification number, alien registration number government passport number, employer or taxpayer identification number, unique electronic identification number (including student ID), computer Internet Protocol addresses or routing codes.
    • E. Identification of a "Responsible University Official"
      • 1. The President designates the vice president of finance and administrative services as the Policy Administrator.
      • 2. The Policy Administrator shall exercise appropriate and effective oversight of the policy and shall report regularly to the President on the status of the policy.
  • Section 3: Program Administration and Maintenance
    • A. The Policy Administrator is responsible for:
      • 1. Developing, implementing, and updating WNC's policy;
      • 2. Ensuring appropriate training of college staff on the policy;
      • 3. Reviewing staff reports regarding the detection of Red Flags;
      • 4. Reviewing steps for identifying, preventing, and mitigating identity theft;
      • 5. Determining appropriate prevention and mitigation steps to be taken in specific circumstances;
      • 6. Reviewing, evaluating, and promulgating periodic changes to the Policy based on:
        • a. Changes in identity theft risks, detection, mitigation, and prevention methods
        • b. Technological advances
        • c. College's experiences with identity theft
        • d. Changes in types of accounts the college maintains
        • e. Changes in the college's business arrangements with other entities
        • f. Changes in legal requirements related to identity theft.
  • Section 4: Identification of Red Flags
    The following are relevant Red Flags in each of the listed categories for which employees should be aware and diligent in monitoring:
    • A. Notifications and warnings from credit reporting agencies
      • 1. Report of fraud accompanying a credit report;
      • 2. Notice or report from a credit agency of a credit freeze on a customer or applicant;
      • 3. Notice or report from a credit agency of an active duty alert for an applicant; and
      • 4. Indication from a credit report of activity that is inconsistent with a customer's usual pattern or activity.
    • B. Suspicious documents
      • 1. Identification document that appears to be forged, altered, or inauthentic;
      • 2. Identification document on which a person's photograph or physical description is inconsistent with the person presenting the document;
      • 3. Other document with information that is inconsistent with existing customer information (such as if a person's signature on a check appears forged); or
      • 4. Application for service that appears to have been altered or forged.
    • C. Suspicious personal identifying information
      • 1. Identifying information presented that is inconsistent with other information the customer provides (example: inconsistent birth dates);
      • 2. Identifying information presented that is inconsistent with other sources of information (for instance, an address not matching an address on a credit report);
      • 3. Identifying information presented that is the same as information shown on other applications that were found to be fraudulent;
      • 4. Identifying information presented that is consistent with fraudulent activity (such as an invalid phone number or fictitious billing address);
      • 5. Social Security number presented that is the same as one given by another individual;
      • 6. An address or phone number presented that is the same as that of another person;
      • 7. A person fails to provide complete, personal identifying information on an application when reminded to do so (however, by law Social Security numbers may not be required in all instances); and
      • 8. A person's identifying information is inconsistent with the information that is on file for the customer.
    • D. Suspicious account activity or unusual use of account
      • 1. Change of address for an account followed by a request to change the account holder's name;
      • 2. Payments stop on an otherwise consistently up-to-date account;
      • 3. Account used in a way that is inconsistent with prior use (example: very high activity);
      • 4. Mail sent to the account holder is repeatedly returned as undeliverable;
      • 5. Notice to the college that a customer is not receiving mail sent by the institution;
      • 6. Notice to the college that an account has unauthorized activity;
      • 7. Breach in the college's or NSHE's computer system security; and
      • 8. Unauthorized access to or use of customer account information.
    • E. Alerts from others
      • 1. Notice to the college from an individual, identity theft victim, law enforcement, or other person who has opened or is maintaining a fraudulent account for a person engaged in identity theft.
  • Section 5: Detecting Red Flags
    • A. New accounts
      • 1. College personnel will take the following steps to obtain and verify the identity of the person opening an account:
        • a. Require personal identifying information such as name, date of birth, residential or business address, driver's license, or other identification;
        • b. Verify customer's identity (for instance, review a driver's license or other identification card);
        • c. Independently contact the customer.
    • B. Existing accounts
      • 1. College personnel will take the following steps to monitor transactions with an account:
        • a. Verify the identification of customers if they request information (in person, via telephone, via facsimile, via email);
        • b. Verify the validity of requests to change billing addresses; and
        • c. Verify changes in banking information given for billing and payment purposes.
  • Section 6: Responding to Red Flags and Mitigating Identity Theft
    • A. In the event college personnel detect identified Red Flags, such personnel shall take all appropriate steps to respond and to mitigate identity theft depending on the nature and degree of risk posed by the Red Flag, including but not limited to the following examples:
      • 1. Continue to monitor an account for evidence of Identity theft;
      • 2. Contact the individual;
      • 3. Change any passwords or other security devices that permit access to accounts;
      • 4. Not open a new account;
      • 5. Close an existing account;
      • 6. Reopen an account with a new number;
      • 7. Notify public safety and/or law enforcement; or
      • 8. Determine that no response is warranted under the particular circumstances.
  • Section 7: Staff Training and Reporting
    • A. College employees responsible for implementing the Policy shall be trained in the detection of Red Flags, and the responsive steps to be taken when a Red Flag is detected.
    • B. Appropriate staff shall provide reports to the Policy Administrator on incidents of identity theft, the effectiveness of the Policy, and the college's compliance with the Policy.
  • Section 8: Service Provider Arrangements
    • A. When the college engages a service provider to perform an activity in connection with one or more covered accounts, the college will take the following steps to ensure the service provider performs its activity in accordance with reasonable policies and procedures designed to detect, prevent, and mitigate the risk of identity theft:
      • 1. Require, by contract, that service providers have such policies and procedures in place; and
      • 2. Require, by contract, that any service providers review the college's Policy and report any Red Flags to the Policy Administrator.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted April 1, 2009 Dates Revised
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-4-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-4-4: Use of land-line phones and verification of long distance charges

WNC Policy 7-4-4
Procedure: Use of land-line phones and verification of long distance charges
Policy No.: 7-4-4
Department: Finance & Administrative Services
Contact: Vice President of Finance and Administrative Services
Policy:

Western Nevada College telephone equipment and service is to be used for official college business. All WNC telephones and fax machines must be protected against unauthorized long distance usage. Phones or fax machines in open access areas should be designed so that long distance calls or faxes cannot be made or sent, and can only be made/sent with personal identification numbers (PIN). In these instances, personnel requiring long distance access must be assigned a PIN through the WNC Facilities Office.

  • Section 1: Usage Rules
    • A. Personal toll calls and/or faxes should not be made from college telephone numbers.
    • B. Personal toll calls and/or faxes should not be made from college telephone numbers.
    • C. Reimbursement for these types of calls are paid to the Business Office within 30 days of the billing distribution and deposited in the college telephone account.
    • D. All authorized billing codes will be assigned toll charges on direct dial calls and service charges based on the telephone company’s monthly billing. An online report reflecting the information for the monthly billing will be provided to identified individuals linked to the PIN.
    • E. Listing of long distance charges will be provided to the designated individual for identification and verification that all calls are college business related. The reports must be ‘signed’ verifying that all calls are for college business.
    • F. If not verified within 15 working days, a reminder is sent to the employee with a copy to the employee’s supervisor as a follow-up for the employee.
    • G. If not verified within an additional five (5) working days, any employee in violation of this policy will lose access to long distance service and disciplinary action may be taken as appropriate.
    • H. All land-lines costs are paid through the college telephone account.
      Telephone charges are generally considered to be unallowable as direct costs to federally funded sponsored projects.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted May 14, 2013 Dates Revised
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-4-4.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-5-1: Payment Plans

WNC Policy 7-5-1
Procedure: Payment Plans
Policy No.: 7-5-1
Department: Controller's Office
Contact: Controller
Policy:

Students enrolled in an equivalent of six or more credits may enter in a payment plan agreement with WNC.

  • Section 1: Procedure and Guidelines
    • A. During fall and spring semesters, a student enrolling for six or more credits may select the on-line payment plan option in which the student makes three monthly payments to cover the semester's registration fees. Payment due dates are determined by the college each semester and posted on the myWNC finance screens.
    • B. The cost of Community Education classes and the cost of textbooks are not included in payment plans.
    • C. Students who fail to meet their first payment plan requirement may have their enrollment cancelled; students who fail to meet subsequent payment requirements will be assessed a 10% fee based on the amount due on payment due date.
    • D. Failure to attend class will not release the obligation to pay all outstanding fee balances.
    • E. Payment plan balances can be obtained from the myWNC Student Center or from the Business Office.
    • F. Under exceptional circumstances, special payment arrangements may be approved by the controller or designee.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised May 3, 2011; September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

WNC Schedule of Classes

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-5-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-5-2: Delinquent Accounts

WNC Policy 7-5-2
Procedure: Delinquent Accounts
Policy No.: 7-5-2
Department: Controller's Office
Contact: Controller
Policy:

A student (or former student) who has an approved deferred payment agreement at the end of the semester's sixth week has a delinquent account will automatically be placed on financial hold by WNC and be sent to collection.

  • Section 1: Procedure
    • A. A collection fee based on the delinquent balance will be charged against the total amount owed.
    • B. Students on financial hold may not receive a transcript, register for classes or be awarded a certificate or a diploma until the delinquent account has been cleared and the financial hold removed.
    • C. Delinquent accounts may be sent to collection after 90 days.
    • D. The student will also be responsible for collection and legal fees.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised May 3, 2011; September 2, 2008
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

NSHE Board of Regents' Meeting Minutes: 3/86; 6/01
WNC Schedule of Classes

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-5-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-5-3: Late Payment Fees

WNC Policy 7-5-3
Procedure: Late Payment Fees
Policy No.: 7-5-3
Department: Controller's Office
Contact: Controller
Policy:

A late payment fee will be assessed of students not paying after the second week of the semester.

  • Section 1: Procedure
    • A. A late payment fee of $25 will be assessed to all students who register in full-term courses after the Friday of the second week of the semester.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised May 3, 2011; September 2, 2008; May 11, 2008
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

WNC Schedule of Classes

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-5-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-5-4: Fee Refund

WNC Policy 7-5-4
Procedure: Fee Refund
Policy No.: 7-5-4
Department: Controller's Office
Contact: Controller
Policy:

The refund policy, established by the Board of Regents, is applicable to all students, in all divisions, in all programs, and all course registration fees, except for zero credit courses. The application fee is not refundable and cannot be transferred to another person or another fee.

  • Section 1: Refund
    • A. The refund policy for a fall, spring and summer semester withdrawal or net credit load reduction is:
      • 1. One hundred percent (100%) if withdrawal is completed within the first five (5) working days of the semester.
      • 2. No refund shall be given after the period outlined above.
      • 3. Courses scheduled to begin at a date different from the regular semester and/or after the beginning of the semester must be dropped prior to the first class session for a 100% refund. Once the class has started, no refund of any amount will be given.
  • Section 2: Circumstances
    • A. Upon written approval of the Dean of Student Services, a full (100%) refund of all registration fees and tuition shall be given upon official withdrawal at any time during the first eight weeks of the semester, for the following circumstances:
      • 1. Induction or activation of a student into the United States Armed Forces.
      • 2. Death of a spouse, child, parent or legal guardian of the student.
      • 3. Death of the student.
      • 4. Verifiable error on the part of the institution; or
      • 5. Verifiable incapacitating illness or injury which prevents the student from returning to school for the remainder of the semester.
    • B. In General, no refund is made if withdrawal is after the first half of the semester.
    • C. Nonresident tuition shall be refunded in conformity with the above schedule for load reduction to six credit hours or less and for withdrawal during refund period.
    • D. Questions regarding refunds should be referred to the Office of Admissions and Records.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted March 18, 2004 Dates Revised May 3, 2011; March 15, 2011; September 2, 2008
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

WNC College Catalog

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-5-4.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-5-5: Institutional Student Fee Policy

WNC Policy 7-5-5
Procedure: Institutional Student Fee Policy
Policy No.: 7-5-5
Department: Finance & Administrative Services
Policy:

Assessing, expending, and adjusting student fees.

  • Section 1: General Conditions and Applicability
    • A. In addition to regular tuition and student fees, fees may be assessed to students for lecture and laboratory classes and other student fees. This includes the following fees:
    • B. Fees assessed to students must be approved in advance, and if relevant, identified in the schedule of classes.
    • C. Student and Special Course Fees are reviewed annually and if changed, approved in the manner outlined below.
    • D. Not charging an approved fee is possible if alternative funding becomes available.
    • E. This policy applies to courses for which regular tuition and student fees charged, and is not intended to control course fees charged for distance education, workforce services, or other self-support classes.
    • F. The appropriate director, dean, and/or vice president monitors expenditures and balances from fee accounts. College oversight of fee balances will be the responsibility of the vice president of finance and administrative services. As warranted, fee adjustments, including reductions, may be implemented.
  • Section 2: Definition and Use of Course Fee Revenue
    • A. Course fees are designed to cover costs included in the fee justification and consistent with Board of Regents policies governing that type of fee (i.e., course fees - equipment maintenance and replacement, consumable materials and supplies, field trips, applied music, clinical practice, etc.).
    • B. Course fees may be assessed to support projects that result in items retained by students (e.g., materials for a millwork or art project).
    • C. The amount of a course fee must be based on anticipated expenditures incurred on behalf of students or the service covered. Fees should cover only these expenditures, and fee amounts must not be approved to create excess revenues. Fund balances in the fee accounts will be monitored by the appropriate dean's and/or vice president's offices, and examined periodically to ensure that revenues are approximately equal to expenditures for approved expenditures.
  • Section 3: Student or Special Course Fee Adjustments and Approvals
    • A. Prior to submitting a proposal for a fee or a fee change, the appropriate academic director will review the justification for the fee. The results of the review will be part of the proposal.
    • B. Proposals for all new fees, changes in existing fees, and/or deletion of fees must be submitted in writing to the appropriate academic director and vice president on the fee request form. The request must include rationale and justification, explanation of how the amount of the fee was determined; the date of implementation or deletion; and the recommended amount of the fee. The request form, with approvals, is submitted to College Council for review and recommendation.
    • C. Recommendations of the College Council are forwarded to the President for final action by the first week of October. Unless otherwise approved, fee changes are effective the subsequent July.
    • D. No fee may be imposed without the President's approval, and if more than $50, not without Board approval.
    • E. For new courses offered with a course fee of $50 or less, temporary approval may be authorized by the President for a period not to exceed one year.
    • F. The office of the vice president for academic and student affairs is responsible for listing the correct, approved fees on class schedule publications and in PeopleSoft.
  • Section 4: Disclosure Requirements
    • A. The official listing of the approved student and special course fees is maintained in the office of the vice president of finance and administrative services.
  • Section 5: Review of Fees and Expenditures
    • A. During September of each year, the vice president of finance and administrative services will provide a copy of the student and special course fee master list to each academic director or responsible party. The area or individual responsible for the fee will review fee account fund balances. Further, the amount of the fee, the account to which fees are posted, and the expenditures from the fee accounts will be reviewed. Any adjustments will be initiated from this review by the director, dean and/or responsible party, including decreasing or eliminating the fee.
  • Section 6: Definition and Use of Technology Fee-Regular Revenue
    • A. Funds generated by the Technology Fee-Regular must be used directly for the betterment of the students’ educational experience. Funds may be used for any technology-related expenditure, including, but not limited to equipment, associated software and licensing, Internet and Web-related support, user services/help desk support, lab support, lab coordinators and assistants, electronic library media, enhanced instructional technology for classrooms and labs, and distance education/interactive video equipment and facilitators.
    • B. An annual report on the use of technology fee-generated funds is submitted to the Associated Students of Western Nevada (ASWN) and the Board of Regents.
    • C. The vice president for academic and student affairs has signature authority for this account.
    • D. The Technology Committee reviews all funding requests using to the following criteria:
      • 1. Does request fall under criteria for student technology fee funding as stated by the Board of Regents Handbook?
      • 2. Does request directly apply to the betterment of students' educational experience?
      • 3. How is the cost of the item(s) justified?
      • 4. What is the number of students/classes/programs affected?
      • 5. How urgent is the need? (e.g., this month, this semester, next semester, necessary to complete a project, etc.)
      • 6. Availability of ongoing/supporting costs for the life cycle of the technology
      • 7. Proposals will be prioritized based upon need when Technology Fee funds are limited.
  • Section 7: Definition and Use of Technology Fee-iNtegrate Revenue
    • A. Funds granted by the Technology Fee-iNtegrate must be used to directly to support the development and implementation of NSHE-wide student information, finance, and Human Resources applications. Funds may be used for the implementation of and support of the iNtegrate projects, including but not limited to support for functional and technical staff, technology costs, and costs for communication devices.
    • B. An annual report on the use of the funds is submitted to the Associated Students of Western Nevada (ASWN) and the Board of Regents.
    • C. The vice president for finance and administrative services has signature authority for this account.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted April 10, 2009 Dates Revised February 12, 2013
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-5-5.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-6-1: Computer Loan

WNC Policy 7-6-1
Procedure: Computer Loan
Policy No.: 7-6-1
Department: Controller's Office
Contact: Controller
Policy:

Western Nevada College employees may be eligible for a computer loan based on the eligibility as listed.

  • Section 1: Approval of Loan
    • A. The approval of a computer loan to any employee is at the discretion of WNC.
    • B. The final decision of granting or not granting this loan may not be appealed or grieved by the employee.
  • Section 2: Eligibility
    • A. Computer loans are available to professional and classified employees (regardless of funding source) who are .50 FTE or greater.
    • B. The employee must be employed with WNC for one year or more and have received a satisfactory or above on his/her last evaluation.
    • C. The supervisor must complete the Letter of Eligibility form recommending approval or denial of the loan. If the supervisor has reason to believe there could be a risk of non-repayment, he or she may recommend that the loan be denied.
    • D. Employees will not be eligible for additional loans for a period of three years from the last loan date unless there is no waiting list.
  • Section 3: Loan Request List
    • A. Eligible employees should complete a Request for Computer Loan form and submit it to the WNC Controller's Office.
      • 1. The loan request list is maintained on a first come first serve basis.
    • B. The employee will be notified when he or she reaches the top of the list, and will have a maximum of 30 days to make the computer purchase and complete the required paperwork.
    • C. Should the employee not be ready to make the computer purchase within the specified time frame, his or her name will be removed from the list, and he or she will need to reapply.
    • D. Exchanging positions with another person is not permitted.
  • Section 4: Terms
    • A. The employee agrees to abide by all terms and conditions listed on the promissory note.
    • B. Maximum loan amount is $1,800 or the purchase price whichever is less. The loan may be applied to the purchase of both hardware and software.
    • C. Only one computer per loan may be in effect at any time.
    • D. The computer loan is interest free.
    • E. The repayment period will be by payroll deduction and be as follows:
      • 1. Professionals - 18 months - Deduction will be taken once monthly.
      • 2. Classified - 24 months - Deduction will be taken out 1/2 from each check per month.
    • F. Computer loans are due and payable immediately upon termination of the employee.
    • G. WNC reserves the right to apply the amount of any remaining paycheck(s) to the payment of the Promissory Note.
  • Section 5: Contact
    • A. WNC Controller's Office
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted June 13, 1995 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004; December 18, 2001
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-6-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-6-2: Distribution of Payroll Checks

WNC Policy 7-6-2
Procedure: Distribution of Payroll Checks
Policy No.: 7-6-2
Department: Controller's Office
Contact: Controller
Policy:

It is the policy of WNC to distribute payroll checks in a specific manner, as described herein.

  • Section 1: Definitions
    • A. Existing Employees: Those employed at WNC prior to the effective date of this policy (date approved).
    • B. New Employees: Those employed at WNC after the effective date of this policy (date approved).
    • C. Pick Up: Carson City Campus employees and students who opt for payroll check pick up in person.
    • D. U.S. Mail Distribution: Employees designating mail distribution of payroll checks will receive their checks via the U.S. Mail.
    • E. Direct Deposit: Employees who authorize the Business Office to deposit payroll checks directly into their banks.
    • F. Employee Classifications:
      • 1. Professional: all academic faculty and all administrative faculty
      • 2. Classified: all employees within the State Classification System.
  • Section 2: Manner of Distribution
    • A. Payroll checks shall be distributed in the following manner:
      • 1. Existing employees shall receive their payroll checks in the same manner as prior to the adoption of the policy. The only exception is that pick ups must be made within the designated time period.
      • 2. New Employees. New employees at the Carson City Campus shall have the following options according to their employee classification:
        • a. Professional Employees -- Direct deposit or U.S. Mail
        • b. Classified Employees -- Direct deposit, U.S. Mail, or Pick Up
        • c. Students -- Direct deposit, U.S. Mail, or Pick Up
        • d. All other employees -- Direct deposit or U.S. Mail
      • 3. Fallon Campus, Douglas Campus and Others: All employees and students assigned to the Fallon Campus, the Douglas Campus and other locations outside Carson City, shall receive their paychecks via the U.S. Mail or direct deposit.
    • B. Pick Up
      • 1. Day and Hours. Those opting for pick up will be able to receive their checks at the WNC Carson City Campus Business Office during normal business hours within two working days (including the payday). Any and all payroll checks not picked up during normal business hours within two working days will be placed in the U.S. Mail.
      • 2. Verification. Payroll checks will only be distributed to those individuals to whom the check is written. Employees and students picking up their checks shall be required to sign for the checks. A photo I.D. may be required.
    • C. U.S. Mail
      • 1. For those opting to have their paychecks distributed by the U.S. Mail, the Business Office will use addresses in the Human Resources System that is maintained by the Personnel Office.
  • Section 3: Address Changes
    • A. Employees and students are responsible to insure that addresses in the Human Resource System are current and accurate.
    • B. Changes in addresses must be forwarded to the Personnel Office as soon as possible.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted April 1, 1997 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-6-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-7-1: Grant Procedures

WNC Policy 7-7-1
Procedure: Grant Procedures
Policy No.: 7-7-1
Department: Controller's Office
Contact: Controller
Policy:

The WNC Grants Review Committee must review all grant applications prior to submission.

  • Section 1: General Requirements
    • A. It is the responsibility of principal investigator (PI) to schedule a review of the application with the committee at least five working days prior to required grant submission date.
    • B. All grant applications and award contracts must be reviewed and signed by the WNC president or designee, in accordance with WNC Policy 7-1-1: Contracts.
  • Section 2: Award Files
    • A. An award file will be maintained for each grant.
    • B. The grant’s principal investigator is responsible for ensuring that grant award files are maintained in accordance with all requirements set by the granting agency.
    • C. At a minimum, all award files will contain the following:
      • 1. Request for proposal
      • 2. WNC grant committee approval
      • 3. Original grant application
      • 4. Requests for revisions
      • 5. All notices-of-award issued by the granting agency
      • 6. WNC project data sheet
      • 7. All correspondence related to the grant
      • 8. Personnel activity reports
      • 9. Programmatic reports required by the granting agency
      • 10. Inventory of year-end supplies inventor
  • Section 3: Establishing Grant Accounts
    • A. Upon receipt of a notice-of-award, the grant principal investigator will prepare and forward a completed project data sheet and notice-of-award to the business office.
    • B. The business office will set up an account in the appropriate restricted fund.
    • C. In addition to the normal college procedures and practices for personnel and purchasing, any restrictions from the granting source also govern expenditures for a grant or contract.
  • Section 4: Personnel Activity Reports
    • A. The principal investigator of each grant-funded program will ensure that an "A WNC Personnel Activity Report" is completed for all individuals employed from grant funds.
    • B. The forms will be completed at least once each semester and maintained with the principal investigator’s grant files.
  • Section 5: Expenditures
    • A. Prior to initiating any purchases, the grant’s principal investigator will verify that the expense is allowable and meets the objectives of the grant.
  • Section 6: Supplies Inventory
    • A. Within two weeks of the close of each grant, the grant principal investigator will document the value of any remaining supplies and other expendable property purchased with Federal grant funds.
    • B. If the aggregate value exceeds $5000, a plan will be developed to utilize the inventory on other federally funded projects or compensate the Federal government.
    • C. Documentation of the supplies will be maintained with the grant's program files. This documentation will be maintained regardless if the value exceeds $5000.
  • Section 7: Close Out Process
    • A. At the end of each grant, the controller will provide the grant’s principal investigator with a detailed listing of all grant expenses, sorted by sub-object.
      • 1. The grant principal investigator and controller will use this report to complete any expenditure reports required by the grantor.
      • 2. All expenditure reports will be reviewed by the controller's office and submitted by the controller's office.
      • 3. All programmatic reports will be submitted by the department's dean or designee, in accordance with standards set by the grantor.
    • B. To ensure that all grant funds have been requested, the grant close-out process includes the controller preparing a schedule summarizing all receipts and expenses incurred by each grant.
      • 1. All accounts receivable will be invoiced and any excess funds in grants will be returned to the grantor.
    • C. The controller will maintain a master schedule of the indirect costs earned from each grant.
      • 1. Indirect costs posted to the general ledger will be balanced to the master schedule.
      • 2. Final reports sent to the grantor will also be balanced to the master schedule of indirect costs.
  • Section 8: Record Retention
    • A. In accordance with OMB Circular A110, all grant records will be kept until the grant is audited and closed out.
    • B. If a close out audit is not scheduled, all records will be maintained for a minimum of three years after the grant ends.
  • Section 9: Equipment Disposal
    • A. In the case of disposition of equipment purchased with grant funds, the granting agency will be consulted regarding the proper method of disposition.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted December 12, 1986 Dates Revised December 4, 2012; September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004; May 9, 1994
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook

OMB Circular A110

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-7-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-7-2: Institutional Sustainability Policy

WNC Policy 7-7-2
Procedure: Institutional Sustainability Policy
Policy No.: 7-7-2
Department: Finance & Administrative Services
Contact: Vice President of Finance and Administrative Services
Policy:

Consistent with the Nevada System of Higher Education's policy, Western Nevada College's students, faculty and staff are committed to the development and continuation of a healthy and safe living/learning environment; one in which the college strives to maximize strategies that protect the Sierra Nevada region, and to foster sustainability in its decisions and operations. Achievement of this commitment will enable us to meet the needs of the present without limiting the capabilities of future members of the greater WNC community to meet their own needs.

  • Section 1: Policy Goals
    • A. WNC bases the attainment of this goal on proactive and rational decisions and programming in any or all of the following areas:
      • 1. Planning, construction, renovation, maintenance and operation of all campus facilities, including the application of the LEED certification system to any future construction
      • 2. Development of policies and programs that promote the preservation of natural habitat that serves as the locations for all college service centers
      • 3. Promotion of the effective and efficient use of energy and water resources
      • 4. Promotion and enhancement of current and new college recycling initiatives
      • 5. Support the development and use of alternative transportation systems in the greater Carson City region
    • B. This stance is based on the following NSHE Board of Regents Energy and Sustainability Policy (Board of Regents Handbook, Title 4, Chapter 10, Section 26, adopted in August 2006):
      • 1. The Board of Regents is committed to protecting the environment, reducing the System's dependence on non-renewable energy sources, and promoting the construction, maintenance, and renovation of builds that are environmentally responsible, economically feasible and healthy spaces to work and live. Therefore, the Chancellor shall develop procedures and guidelines applicable to NSHE institutions that will address matters including, but not limited to:
        • a. Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design Green building rating system or an equivalent standard adopted by the director of the Office of Energy;
        • b. Energy and water conservation including the minimized use of nonrenewable energy sources and the use of local renewable energy sources; and
        • c. Alternative methods of transportation.
  • Section 2: Institutional Procedures and Guidelines
    WNC's commitment to sustainability focuses on the following areas:
    • A. Construction of New and Renovation of Existing Facilities
      • 1. New Construction - Using the nationally recognized U.S. Green Building Council's Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) certification standards, WNC commits that any new campus construction plans will include requirements that designers and contractors acquire points for adherence to renewable energy installations, use of recycled and/or local construction materials, and energy conservation designs. To ensure that the lifetime cost of new facilities is cost effective, construction of all new facilities at WNC shall be at least LEED Certified; the goal is to obtain LEED Silver or Gold certification when funding permits.
      • 2. Major (greater than 20,000 sq. ft.) Reconstruction and Renovation - WNC commits to the application of LEED certification principles in all existing structure renovations and seeks to attain LEED-EB certification for construction when funding permits.
      • 3. In either of these areas, specific measures and strategies must be described in the project's programming phase. If it is determined that the project cannot meet the requirements of the policy, the reasons must be documented in the project program and presented to the college for review and concurrence prior to the schematic design phase.
    • B. Energy Efficiencies - WNC conducts an ongoing assessment of all energy use. As a result, the following activities and programs are in place:
      • 1. Gas and Electricity - Currently involved in an energy retrofit project related to boilers/chillers in the Bristlecone building. This initiative will reduce electric/gas consumption to heat and cool the facility. This project also includes the replacement of antiquated equipment to further increase energy conservation. Completion is targeted by early 2009.
      • 2. Adherence to State Administrative Manual 1028.0 requirements and temperature settings for energy efficient state buildings
      • 3. HVAC - DDC management for HVAC systems on all campuses; controls temperatures for all facilities based on time of day and occupancy
      • 4. Lighting - replacement of all HID lighting in technology (automotive, welding, machine tool, construction, etc.) labs with T5HO florescent lighting; generates a 50% reduction in energy use over the HIDs; changed the ballasts in all fluorescent lights to electronic ballasts at all campus locations; these initiatives will continue as appropriate, and funding is available
      • 5. Water - low flush urinals and toilets installed in all campus facilities; irrigation - satellite controls installed to monitor the need for watering; related efforts will continue to reduce use of water
      • 6. Equipment and Appliance Replacement - As equipment and appliances are replaced (either by purchase or donation), UL approved and EnergyStar rated replacements are required.
      • 7. HECC-SHECC (FY08) funding committed to roof preventative maintenance and weatherization including the installation of additional insulation.
    • C. Purchasing of Goods and Services
      • 1. Textbooks (used) - Working with the Follett Higher Education Group, WNC contracted campus store vendor, the college is committed to the 'buy-back' and resale of used textbooks. We continue to work on increasing the sale of used textbooks (current percentage is 37% in comparison to the national rate of 32%) for the Follett Corporation.
      • 2. Other goods and services - In cases where environmentally friendly products and services are available at or near cost-competitive rates, college purchasers will opt for the environmentally friendly product or service. The college also pursues involvement with organizations and corporations that actively support and apply sustainability principles to their daily operations (i.e., Association for the Advancement of Sustainability in Higher Education, Follett Higher Education Group, etc.).
    • D. Transportation
      • 1. Jump Around Carson (JAC) Bus Service - WNC works closely with the Carson City Transportation Services to promote and increase the accessibility to this relatively new service. This initiative includes the development and distribution of advertising materials, notices, and posters promoting use of the service, the development of a discounted pass program for students, as well as the sale of these passes on campus (i.e., in the WNC Bookstore). This service provides coverage to all of Carson City.
      • 2. Ride Sharing - Car-pooling is promoted through individual class and curriculum groups.
      • 3. Bicycle racks - Working with Muscle Power, a local not-for-profit health and wellness organization, the college promotes the installation of bicycle racks for use by all members of the community.
      • 4. Alternative Vehicles - Facilities - use of golf carts on both the Carson and Fallon campuses; motor pool has replaced old model motor vehicles with E85 vehicles; and as additional funds become available, hybrid vehicles will be purchased.
    • E. Recycling
      • 1. WNC's recycling program focuses on regulated waste streams and is augmented by a contract with OARC, a not-for-profit group that provides skill development opportunities to individuals with disabilities. The college's faculty and staff strongly support these initiatives.
      • 2. For example, the institution currently contracts with Waste Management, Inc. (Carson City) for the recycling of cardboard and printer paper. This effort also includes materials from the college bookstore and caf.
      • 3. In addition, e-wastes (computers, monitors, printers, and other electronic equipment) are transported to Business Center - North for disposal by University of Nevada - Reno through their recycling program.
      • 4. Batteries are recycled through various local vendors based on type
      • 5. Environmental Health and Safety Services contracts with a vendor to recycle all toner and ink cartridges for reuse
      • 6. Industrial products, such as oils, solvents, antifreeze, and metals, are recycled through various local vendors
      • 7. Food products and wastes (cooking oil, glass, plastics, etc.) generated by the college's dining operation (Sedway Caf) are recycled through local vendors (Bently Biodiesel) or by the contracted vendor, and utilized for compost. Biodegradable food and beverage containers are also used in this operation.
  • Section 3: Summary
    • A. There is consensus on campus that these efforts are not sufficient, and the college president charged the Academic and Administrative senates with responsibility for creation of a task force to enhance the college's efforts. This group is developing a plan to expand the WNC recycling program to include newsprint, aluminum, plastic and other materials that are not currently recycled.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised October 6, 2009; September 2, 2008
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-7-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 7-7-3: Trade-out Policy

WNC Policy 7-7-3
Procedure: Trade-out Policy
Policy No.: 7-7-3
Department: Finance & Administrative Services
Contact: Vice President for Finance and Administrative Services
  • Section 1: Definition
    • A. A trade-out is defined as an agreement between WNC and an individual, partnership, corporation, or other such entity for goods or services in exchange for anything of value from the institution, including, but not limited to, advertising, club memberships, sponsorships, or tickets to any event.
  • Section 2: General Policy
    • A. All trade-out agreements, including new trade-out agreements, renewal trade-out agreements, and multi-year trade-out agreements must be in writing and approved by the president or his or her designee.
    • B. All trade-out agreements, including new trade-out agreements, renewal trade-out agreements, and multi-year trade-out agreements may be approved only when the value of the goods or services received by WNC is equal to or greater than the value of the goods or services received by the individual, partnership, corporation or other entity.
    • C. All trade-out agreements are subject to review/audit by the Vice President for Finance and Administrative Services or his or her designee.
    • D. All trade-out agreements, including new trade-out agreements, renewal trade-out agreements, and multi-year trade-out agreements may be non-renewed where it is determined that the value of the goods or services received by WNC is not equal to or greater than the value of the goods or services received by the individual, partnership, corporation or other entity.
    • E. Trade-out agreements are to be used solely for the benefit of WNC and exclusively for business purposes. Any personal use or benefit from a trade-out agreement is prohibited.
    • F. All trade-out agreements must be in compliance with applicable laws, regulations, and Board of Regents' policies and must be in the best interests of WNC.
    • G. This policy may be amended or repealed on the recommendation of the president and approval of the Board of Regents.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted January 14, 2014 Dates Revised
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/7-7-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 8-1-1: Computer Support Services Guidelines

WNC Policy 8-1-1
Procedure: Computer Support Services Guidelines
Policy No.: 8-1-1
Department: Computing Services
Contact: Director
Policy:

All Student Information System (SIS) related questions should be directed to the dean of student services. If the dean requests technical help both the systems analyst and the micro-computer specialist will be available.

The systems analyst is responsible for all contacts with the System Computing Services (SCS). Problems which require assistance from SCS should be directed to the systems analyst or the micro-computer specialist.

All requests for major special projects and programs should be directed to the systems analyst.

File servers will be backed up once a week at both campuses. Users are urged to store data on disks -- applications will live on the servers.

Specifications for hardware and software purchases should be submitted to the systems analyst or the micro-computer specialist so they can recommend vendors, compare prices and check compatibility.

All major computer related purchase orders at the college must be initialed by the systems analyst or micro-computer specialist.

Service:
Carson -- Submit a computer services request form to the micro-computer specialist.
Fallon -- Requests should be made directly to the systems analyst. Memos may be used in his absence.

  • Section 1: Priorities in Order
    • A. Registration support including hardware set-up and installation
    • B. File server maintenance and management
    • C. Academic Computing: Including support for labs in Hawthorne, Yerington, Lovelock, Fernley, Douglas and other centers as needed.
    • D. Administrative Computing
    • E. Hardware installation and maintenance
    • F. Software applications: Work with faculty and staff with the implementation and configuration of new software.
    • G. Planning for new construction as needed.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/8-1-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 8-1-2: Computing and Network Use Agreement

WNC Policy 8-1-2
Procedure: Computing and Network Use Agreement
Policy No.: 8-1-2
Department: Computing Services
Contact: Director
Policy:

All students and staff who use WNC's computing facilities are responsible for knowing the content of Western Nevada College's Computer and Network Use Agreement. Students and staff may be required to sign this document.

  • Section 1: Standards of Conduct
    • A. Improper conduct regarding the use of computers at WNC falls into three categories:
      • 1. Academic dishonesty
      • 2. Disruption or destruction of computer facilities, equipment or programs
      • 3. Violation of licenses and copyright agreements, WNC policy, and state and federal laws.
  • Section 2: Academic Dishonesty
    • A. Examples of this type of behavior regarding computers include, but are not limited to:
      • 1. Submitting another's' programs, documentation, or program results as your own work.
      • 2. Obtaining or attempting to obtain unauthorized access to information stored in electronic form.
      • 3. Submitting false results of a program's output for a class assignment or falsifying the results of program execution for the purpose of improving a grade.
  • Section 3: Disruption or Destruction of Computer Facilities
    • A. Examples of this type of behavior include, but are not limited to:
      • 1. Damaging or stealing university owned equipment or software.
      • 2. Sending of offensive e-mail.
      • 3. Causing the display of false system messages.
      • 4. Maliciously causing system slow-downs or rendering systems inoperable.
      • 5. Changing, removing, or destroying (or attempting the same) any data stored electronically without proper authorization.
      • 6. Putting viruses or worms into a system.
    • B. Most software used on WNC computers is covered by copyright, license, or non-disclosure agreements. Violation of these agreements puts WNC and the individual in jeopardy of civil penalties. Examples of such violations include, but are not limited to:
      • 1. Making copies of copyrighted or licensed software without proper authorization.
      • 2. Using software in violation of copyright, license or non-disclosure agreements.
      • 3. Using college computers for unauthorized private of commercial purposes.
  • Section 4: Appropriate Use of the Internet
    • A. NSHE member institutions subscribe to Internet appropriate use policies.
    • B. In general, usage in support of research and educational objectives is acceptable.
  • Section 5: Use Agreement
    • A. In addition to agreeing to abide by the Standards of Conduct for the Use of NSHE Computing and Network Resources, and the Appropriate Use of the Internet, I agree to the following statements:
      • 1. I will not willfully destroy, damage, tamper, alter, steal, misappropriate or use without permission any system, program or file of the Nevada System of Higher Education.
      • 2. So that others may not use my account, I agree to use my account for my own work and to keep my password confidential. I agree to report the use of my account by others to the systems analyst on the Fallon campus or the micro-computer specialist on the Carson campus.
      • 3. I understand that while WNC makes every attempt to preserve the integrity of my data and files stored on the system, if a conflict arises between keeping the system operational and maintaining the integrity of my data, keeping the system operational will take precedence. WNC will not be held responsible for any loss of data.
      • 4. I agree to indemnify and hold harmless WNC, its employees, and agents from any claim, demand, liability, cause of action, suit, judgment or expense (including attorney's fees), arising out of my breach of this agreement.
      • 5. I understand that I do not own my computing account, but do have exclusive access to the account. WNC owns the account and gives me, and only me, the privilege of using it.
      • 6. I understand and agree that each time I access the WNC computing network I am bound by the terms of the agreement along with any changes or additions to this agreement and the terms of all WNC policies that are in effect at the time I access the system.
      • 7. I understand downloading copyright protected materials from the internet from a college owned computer or through a college owned network is a violation of federal copyright law and may result in either civil or criminal penalties. Specific penalties for violation of federal copyright laws are summarized below:

        Copyright infringement is the act of exercising, without permission or legal authority, one or more of the exclusive rights granted to the copyright owner under section 106 of the Copyright Act (Title 17 of the United States Code). These rights include the right to reproduce or distribute a copyrighted work. In the file-sharing context, downloading or uploading substantial parts of a copyrighted work without authority constitutes an infringement. Penalties for copyright infringement include civil and criminal penalties. In general, anyone found liable for civil copyright infringement may be ordered to pay either actual damages or "statutory" damages affixed at not less than $750 and not more than $30,000 per work infringed. For "willful" infringement, a court may award up to $150,000 per work infringed. A court can, in its discretion, also assess costs and attorneys' fees. For details, see Title 17, United States Code, Sections 504, 505. Willful copyright infringement can also result in criminal penalties, including imprisonment of up to five years and fines of up to $250,000 per offense. For more information, please see the Web site of the U.S. Copyright Office at www.copyright.gov, especially their FAQ's at www.copyright.gov/help/faq.
      • 8. I understand that violations of this agreement may result in the revoking of all my computer and network access privileges.
    • B. In signing this agreement I acknowledge that any infractions will result in disciplinary action from WNC and appropriate local, state and federal agencies.

      1. Date:


      2. Name:


      3. Signature:


      4. Approved:



Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted July 10, 2008 Dates Revised January 18, 2011; September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
NRS Code NRS 281.481

NSHE Board of Regents' Meeting Minutes: 6/99

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/8-1-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 8-1-3: Computing Workstation/Network Resources Use

WNC Policy 8-1-3
Procedure: Computing Workstation/Network Resources Use
Policy No.: 8-1-3
Department: Computing Services
Contact: Director of Computing Services
  • Section 2: Computer and Network Use Agreement
    • A. Each employee, student, and member of the public who requests to use computer resources at Western Nevada College must sign, or in the case of an online session, electronically agree, that he understands and will comply with the Computer and Network Use Agreement. The agreement content may be freely copied onto a separate form for customer signature or online posting, (provided as Attachment 1).
    • B. NOTE: The content is extracted from the NSHE Computing Resources Policy, approved 6/18/99, and NevadaNet Appropriate Use Policy (revised 9/22/2005) [provided as Attachments 1 & 2].
  • Section 3: Workstation Use
    • A. Computer Labs
      Computing labs at Western Nevada College are used to support academic, community, and non-academic training programs.
      • 1. Types of Computer Labs
        • a. Imaged: This type of lab contains specific software used to teach and train software applications and computer use. Each workstation within these labs is imaged and locked down to prevent any changes to the workstation without proper authorization.
        • b. Non-imaged: This type of lab is not imaged or locked down. Each workstation may be freely configured to meet the course objectives presented in this lab type.
      • 2. Use of Computer Labs
        • a. Students may use any lab in accordance with Western Nevada College Policy No. 8-2-1.
        • b. Members of the public or the campus community may reserve labs in accordance with the Western Nevada College Facility Use Policy.
        • c. People not enrolled in a Western Nevada College course must have prior approval to use a campus computer lab workstation.
    • B. Public Access
      Workstations are provided for use by the student population and the community at large. A login name and password is required to access and use any of the public workstations.
      • 1. Types of Public Workstations:
        • a. Registration: This type of workstation is provided for students or prospective students to register for scheduled classes at Western Nevada College. The public may use these workstations for accessing information about the college and courses offered. These workstations are locked down and will not accept any changes made by the user.
        • b. Library: This type of workstation is used by students, prospective students, and the public for academic studies, access to information provided by the college, and Internet access. Common software applications are installed primarily for student use to complete class assignments.
        • c. Student Assistance: This type of workstation is primarily used for assisting students in the office areas of Financial Aid and Admissions & Records.
        • d. Testing: This type of workstation is dedicated for students taking online tests.
      • 2. Use
        • a. Students may use any public workstation and have priority over the public. Specific use of the workstation is governed by NSHE Computing Resources Policy.
        • b. The public is allowed to use specific Library workstations. The use of the workstations may be limited.
    • C. Staff/Faculty
      These workstations are provided for use by Western Nevada College staff/faculty and work-study employees. A login name and password is required to access and use any of the employee workstations.
      • 1. Types of Employee Workstations:
        • a. Desktop
        • b. Laptop
      • 2. Use of Employee Workstations
        • a. Specific use is governed by NSHE Computing Resources Policy.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted January 13, 2009 Dates Revised

NSHE Computing Resources Policy; NevadaNet Appropriate Use Policy

Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/8-1-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 8-2-1: Computer Lab Use

WNC Policy 8-2-1
Procedure: Computer Lab Use
Policy No.: 8-2-1
Department: Applied Sciences, Mathematics, and Information Systems Division
Contact: Division Chair
Policy:

Students from other NSHE institutions may use WNC computer labs if they have a written request from their instructor and pay required fees. This use is on a space available basis.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted October 1, 1993 Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/8-2-1.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 8-2-2: Computer Security

WNC Policy 8-2-2
Procedure: Computer Security
Policy No.: 8-2-2
Department: Computing Services
Contact: Director
Policy:

In order to protect the security of all college computers and to prevent the spread of viruses, only authorized personnel are allowed to install software on college computers.

  • Section 1: Personal Software
    • A. Staff or faculty who plan to install personal software on college computers need to inform computer services staff prior to installation.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted Dates Revised September 2, 2008; May 11, 2004
NSHE and NRS Codes
NSHE Code Reference NSHE Board of Regents Handbook
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/8-2-2.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 8-2-3: Network Policy

WNC Policy 8-2-3
Procedure: Network Policy
Policy No.: 8-2-3
Department: Computing Services
Contact: Director
  • Section 1: Use of the Network
    • A. The network installed in Western Nevada College is used to transmit digital, telephonic (VOIP), and video data to and through all campus locations.
  • Section 2: Types of Networks
    • A. Production Network
      • 1. This network is used to connect devices used by staff, faculty and students, i.e., workstations, file servers, printers and support devices together, for use on a common college network.
    • B. Facilities Network
      • 1. It is designed to connect HVAC, security, and video devices onto a private network. This network is not designed to share data with the production network.
    • C. Public Network
      • 1. This network is used to connect specific workstations and wireless access points together for public Internet access only.
    • D. Telephone/Interactive Video Network
      • 1. This network shares connection with the interactive video connections in the following locations. The network does not interface with any other network. The locations are:
        • a. Carson
        • b. Douglas
        • c. Fallon
  • Section 3: LAN (Local Area Network)
    • A. Defined
      Reference: Wikipedia
      • 1. A local area network (LAN) is a computer network covering a local area, like a home, office, or group of buildings. Current LANs are most likely to be based on switched IEEE 802.3 Ethernet running at 10, 100 or 1,000 Mbit/s or on Wi-Fi technology.
      • 2. The defining characteristics of LANs in contrast to WANs (wide area networks) are: their much higher data rates; smaller geographic range; and that they do not require leased telecommunication lines.
    • B. WNC Implementation
      • 1. Each location participating in the LAN structure in WNC uses the network to connect together workstation, printers and peripherals used by Computer Labs, staff and faculty. Each location is configured as a private network residing behind a hardware firewall. The LAN networks communicate with one another via the WAN (Wide Area Network). The locations participating in this LAN infrastructure are:
        • a. Carson
        • b. Hightech Center (Carson)
        • c. Douglas
        • d. Fallon
        • e. Fernley
        • f. Hawthorne
        • g. Lovelock
        • h. Yerington
      • 2. Note: Although Smith Valley has a WNC presence, the LAN network is controlled by another agency.
  • Section 4: WAN (Wide Area Network)
    • A. Defined
      Reference: Wikipedia
      • 1. A wide area network or WAN is a computer network covering a broad geographical area. Contrast with personal area networks (PANs), local area networks (LANs) or metropolitan area networks (MANs) that are usually limited to a room, building or campus respectively. The largest and most well-known example of a WAN is the Internet.
      • 2. WANs are used to connect local area networks (LANs) together, so that users and computers in one location can communicate with users and computers in other locations. Many WANs are built for one particular organization and are private. Others, built by Internet service providers, provide connections from an organization's LAN to the Internet. WANs are most often built using leased lines. At each end of the leased line, a router connects to the LAN on one side and a hub within the WAN on the other.
    • B. WNC implementation
      • 1. All locations that participate in the WNC data network are connected through a Wide Area Network called the "NevadaNet". Access to the NevadaNet is accomplished using routing devices that are owned by WNC but configured and controlled by NSHE, (Reno). The NevadaNet, is supported and controlled by NSHE, (Reno) Telecom Services. The information on the operation and control of the NevadaNet is contained in the following policies :
        • a. NevadaNet Appropriate Use Policy
        • b. NevadaNet Connection Policy
        • c. NevadaNet Interactive Video Scheduling and Usage Policy
      • 2. The initial point of contact for problems related to the NevadaNet is WNC Computing Services. This may be accomplished by using the online work request system or via telephone if the problem meets the Break/Fix criteria.
      • 3. Locations within the college that use the NevadaNet are:
        • a. Carson
        • b. Hightech Center (Carson)
        • c. Douglas
        • d. Fallon
        • e. Fernley
        • f. Hawthorne
        • g. Lovelock
        • h. Yerington
      • 4. Note: Although Smith Valley has a WNC presence, the wired network is controlled by another agency.
  • Section 5: Wireless and Broadband
    • A. WiFi Defined
      Reference: Wikipedia
      • 1. Wi-Fi (also WiFi, wifi, etc.) is a brand originally licensed by the Wi-Fi Alliance to describe the underlying technology of wireless local area networks (WLAN) based on the IEEE 802.11 specifications. It was developed to be used for mobile computing devices, such as laptops, in LANs, but is now increasingly used for more services, including Internet and VoIP phone access, gaming, and basic connectivity of consumer electronics such as televisions and DVD players, or digital cameras. More standards are in development that will allow Wi-Fi to be used by cars in highways in support of an Intelligent Transportation System to increase safety, gather statistics, and enable mobile commerce (see IEEE 802.11p).
      • 2. A person with a Wi-Fi enabled device such as a computer, cell phone or PDA can connect to the Internet when in proximity of an access point. The region covered by one or several access points is called a hotspot. Hotspots can range from a single room to many square miles of overlapping hotspots. Wi-Fi can also be used to create a mesh network. Both architectures are used in community networks, municipal wireless networks like Wireless Philadelphia, and metro-scale networks like M-Taipei.
      • 3. Wi-Fi also allows connectivity in peer-to-peer mode, which enables devices to connect directly with each other. This connectivity mode is useful in consumer electronics and gaming applications.
    • B. Broadband defined
      Reference: Wikipedia
      • 1. Broadband Internet access, often shortened to "broadband Internet" or just "broadband", is a high data-transmission rate internet connection. DSL and cable modem, both popular consumer broadband technologies, are typically capable of transmitting faster than dial up modem (56 kilobits per second). The real maximum speed of a dial-up modem is only about 48 Kilobits/second.
      • 2. It should be noted that "broadband" is technically a misnomer. Broadband and baseband are two different ways of sending multiple transmissions on a wire. With baseband you send a single signal over the wire, and each transmission gets a turn to go: that is, you send part of transmission A, then B, then C, then start over at A. Baseband can use either a digital or an analog line. Broadband is always analog; with broadband you can send multiple transmissions at once by sending different transmissions on different frequencies.
      • 3. DSL, cable, and other high-speed Internet services are digital, not analog, and are therefore not broadband, by definition. Rather, marketing for high-speed Internet providers hijacked the term because it sounded impressive.
    • C. WNC implementation
      • 1. Neither WiFi or Broadband technologies are intended to be a direct replacement for the wired infrastructure used at WNC. WiFi is installed for use by students, guests and faculty in public areas throughout the college. There is the possibility that WiFi coverage will exceed the boundaries of the public area and may provide network access to wireless devices in some adjacent areas, i.e., lab or administrative offices. WiFi provides access to the Internet only and will not provide a direct access to the services contained on other college networks.
      • 2. At present, Broadband technology is not in use at WNC.
      • 3. Locations within WNC that use the wireless technology are:
        • a. Carson
        • b. Hightech Center (Carson)
        • c. Douglas Fallon
  • Section 6: Wired Infrastructure
    • A. Defined
      • 1. A physical network comprised of Ethernet rated cable and fiber connected through routing and switching devices.
    • B. WNC implementation
      • 1. Each campus location within WNC has an established wired infrastructure that connects workstations, printers, file servers and support hardware. All locations route each wired data drop (wall connection) through a switched network. The locations that participate in the WNC wired network are:
        • a. Carson
        • b. Hightech Center (Carson)
        • c. Douglas
        • d. Fallon
        • e. Fernley
        • f. Hawthorne
        • g. Lovelock
        • h. Yerington
      • 2. Note: Although Smith Valley has a WNC presence, the wired network is controlled by another agency.
  • Section 7: Physical Connections to the WNC Network
    • A. Wired Network
      • 1. Authorized Connection
        • a. Any college owned device that has been tested, configured and authorized for use by WNC Computing Services may be connected to the Production, Facility, Public and Telephone networks.
        • b. Guests/students of the college may connect to the wired network using connection points configured for public use.
      • 2. Unauthorized Connection
        • a. Devices that have not been authorized for use in accordance with the "Authorized Connection" criteria stated above are not permitted on the Production, Facilities, Public and Telephone networks.
      • 3. New or Location Change of Connections
        • a. New or a change of an existing connection on the wired infrastructure will be coordinated through Computing Services. This will accomplished using the online work request system hosted by WNC Computing Services or in the case of a computer lab, through the Lab Configuration Request system.
    • B. Wireless Network
      • 1. Authorized Connection
        • a. Any college owned wireless access point device that has been tested, configured and authorized for use by WNC Computing Services may be connected to the Production, Facility, Public and Telephone networks.
        • b. Guests/students of the college may connect to the wireless network using access points configured for public use.
        • c. Note: For a definition of what an access point is and its use, see "WiFi Defined" contained in this policy on page 3.
      • 2. Unauthorized Connection
        • a. Devices that have not been authorized for use in accordance with the "Authorized Connection" criteria stated above are not permitted on any WNC network.
      • 3. New or Location Change of Connections
        • a. New or a change of an existing connection on the wireless infrastructure will be coordinated through Computing Services. This will accomplished using the online work request system hosted by WNC Computing Services or in the case of a computer lab through the Lab Configuration Requests system.
  • Section 8: Security of the WNC Network
    • A. Physical
      • 1. All network devices, wiring joined together in a wiring closet and support hardware must be protected from public access by a physical barrier. A locked door, fencing or locked cabinet will serve as an acceptable physical barrier.
    • B. Authentication
      • 1. Access to all devices on the network require authentication, i.e., name and password. The exceptions to this are printers and peripheral devices that contain no data, i.e., door control card access readers. The form of authentication used is controlled by the service area supporting the device.
    • C. Access control
      • 1. Access to the LAN infrastructure is controlled by a hardware firewall device that prevents the public network (aka: the Internet) from having direct access to the internal private networks (LANs). Control of the physical access to the network and associated nodes/devices located in a physical room or cabinet is the responsibility if WNC Computing Services, Facilities and Media Services. No person or agency will be granted access without the express permission of one of the departments that has control of the device/hardware.
      • 2. Devices/hardware controlled by Computing Services:
        • a. File Servers
        • b. Switches
        • c. Routers
        • d. Power Conditioning Devices
        • e. Tape Changers
        • f. Wireless Access Points
        • g. Workstations
        • h. Patch Panels
        • i. Ethernet wiring
        • j. Firewalls
        • k. Media Converters
        • l. Ethernet cabling
        • m. Fiber links
        • n. Data Conduits
        • o. Power Conditioning Units (UPSs)
        • p. KVM Switches
      • 3. Devices/hardware controlled by Facilities:
        • a. HVAC (heating and air) panels
        • b. Security panels (building)
        • c. Telephone systems
      • 4. Devices/hardware controlled by Media Services:
        • a. Video surveillance
        • b. Interactive Video
        • c. Macintosh hardware, software and peripherals
      • 5. For support assistance on all of the devices listed above:
        • a. Computing Services may be contacted via the online work request system.
        • b. Facilities and Media Services may be contacted using the existing methods described in their respective published support policies and procedures.
        • c. Macintosh hardware, software and peripherals support is required using the online work request system sponsored by Computing Services.
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted February 20, 2007 Dates Revised September 2, 2008
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/8-2-3.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 8-2-4: Network Password Policy

WNC Policy 8-2-4
Procedure: Network Password Policy
Policy No.: 8-2-4
Department: Computing Services
Contact: Coordinator/Director
Policy: Overview

Passwords are an important aspect of computer security. They are the front line of protection for user accounts at WNC. A poorly chosen password may result in the compromise of Western Nevada College's entire network. As such, all WNC employees, faculty, and staff (including contractors and vendors with access to WNC systems) are responsible for taking the appropriate steps, as outlined below, to select and secure their passwords.

Purpose

The purpose of this policy is to establish a standard for creation of strong passwords, the protection of those passwords, and the frequency of change.

Scope

The scope of this policy includes all personnel who have or are responsible for an account (or any form of access that supports or requires a password) on any network system that resides at any Western Nevada College campus or facility, has access to the WNC network, or stores any non-public Western Nevada College information.

Policy

General

All system-level passwords (e.g., root, enable, network admin, application administration accounts, etc.) must be changed on at least a quarterly basis.

All user-level passwords for network accounts are required to be changed at least every 90 days. The new password cannot have been used in the last 9 months.

Network concurrent connections are limited to one (1) unless proof of more connections is shown to be required to do an employee's job.

Users are allowed to change their own password for network access. Password reset grace logins are set at five (5).

Intruder attempt lock outs are set at three (3) attempts at the network level.

Other user accounts (e.g., e-mail, WestNet, etc) should be changed at least every six (6) months.

User accounts with access to the Western Nevada College network must have a unique password from all other accounts held by that user.

Network passwords must not be inserted into email messages or other forms of electronic communication.

All user-level and system-level passwords must conform to the guidelines described below.

Guidelines

General Password Construction Guidelines

Passwords are used for various purposes at Western Nevada College. Some of the more common uses include: user level accounts, web accounts, email accounts, screen saver protection, voicemail password, and local router logins. Everyone should be aware of how to select strong passwords.

Poor, weak passwords have the following characteristics:

The password contains less than eight characters and no more than 20 characters

The password is a word found in a dictionary (English or foreign)

The password is a common usage word such as:

    o Names of family, pets, friends, co-workers, fantasy characters, etc.

    o Computer terms and names, commands, sites, companies, hardware, software.

    o The words "Western Nevada College", "Carson", "WNC" or any derivation.

    o Birthdays and other personal information such as addresses and phone numbers.

    o Word or number patterns like aaabbb, qwerty, zyxwvuts, 123321, etc.

    o Any of the above spelled backwards.

    o Any of the above preceded or followed by a digit (e.g., secret1, 1secret)

Strong passwords have the following characteristics:

Contain both upper and lower case characters (e.g., a-z, A-Z)

Have digits and punctuation characters as well as letters e.g., 0-9, !@#$%^&*()_+|~-=\`{}[]:";'<>?,./)

Are at least eight alphanumeric characters long. The strongest is a passphrase (Ohmy1stubbedmyt0e).

Are not words in any language, slang, dialect, jargon, etc.

Are not based on personal information, names of family, etc.

Passwords should never be written down or stored on-line. Try to create passwords that can be easily remembered. One way to do this is create a password based on a song title, affirmation, or other phrase. For example, the phrase might be: "This May Be One Way To Remember" and the password could be: "TmB1w2R!" or "Tmb1W>r~" or some other variation.

NOTE: Do not use either of these examples as passwords.

Password Protection Standards

Do not use the same password for Western Nevada College accounts as for other non-Western Nevada College access (e.g., personal ISP account, e-mail, benefits, etc.). Where possible, don't use the same password for various Western Nevada College access needs. For example, select one password for the e-mail system and a separate password for the network access system.

Do not share Western Nevada College passwords with anyone, including administrative assistants, colleagues, or work studies. All passwords are to be treated as sensitive, confidential Western Nevada College information.

Don't reveal a password over the phone to ANYONE

Don't reveal a password in an email message

Don't reveal a password to your supervisor

Don't talk about a password in front of others

Don't hint at the format of a password (e.g., "my family name")

Don't reveal a password on questionnaires or security forms

Don't share a password with family members

Don't reveal a password to co-workers while on vacation

If someone demands a password, refer them to this document or have them call the Computing Services Department.

Do not use the "Remember Password" feature of applications (e.g., Internet Explorer, Firefox, etc).

Do not write passwords down or store them anywhere in your office. Do not store passwords in a file on ANY computer system (including Palm Pilots or similar devices) without encryption.

Change passwords at least once every six (6) months (network passwords must be changed every 90 days).

When changing a password, do not use a password you have used for that system within the last nine (9) months.

If an account or password is suspected to have been compromised, report the incident to Computing Services and change all passwords.

Use of Passwords and Passphrases for Remote Access Users

Access to the Western Nevada College Networks via remote access is subject to the same policy as on-campus employees.

Passphrases

Passphrases are not the same as passwords. A passphrase is a longer version of a password and is, therefore, more secure. A passphrase is typically composed of multiple words. Because of this, a passphrase is more secure against "dictionary attacks."

A good passphrase is relatively long and contains a combination of upper and lowercase letters and numeric and punctuation characters. An example of a good passphrase:

"TrafficOn1Was*&#!2day"

All of the rules above that apply to passwords apply to passphrases.

Enforcement

Any employee found to have violated this policy may be subject to disciplinary action, up to and including termination of employment.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted March 22, 2011 Dates Revised
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/8-2-4.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 8-2-5: Firewall Policy

WNC Policy 8-2-5
Procedure: Firewall Policy
Policy No.: 8-2-5
Department: Computing Services
Contact: Coordinator/Director
Policy: Purpose

WNC operates perimeter firewalls between the Internet and its private internal network in order to create a secure operating environment for WNC's computer and network resources. A firewall is just one element of a layered approach to network security. The purpose of this Firewall Policy is to describe how WNC's firewalls will filter Internet traffic in order to mitigate risks and losses associated with security threats, while maintaining appropriate levels of access for business users.

The Firewall Policy is subordinate to WNC's general Security Policy, as well as any governing laws or regulations.

Definition

Firewall - Computer hardware or software that prevents unauthorized access to private data (as on a local area network) by outside computer users ( as of the Internet).

Scope

This Firewall Policy refers specifically to the WNC firewalls.

The role of the firewalls is to help WNC keep unauthorized visitors from accessing valuable college resources.

Stop attacks before they penetrate the network perimeter

Protect resources and data, as well as voice, video, and multimedia traffic

Control network and application activity

Reduce deployment and operational costs

WNC's Firewalls will (at minimum) perform the following security services:

Access control between the trusted internal network and un-trusted external networks

Block unwanted traffic as determined by the firewall rule set

Hide vulnerable internal systems from the Internet

Hide information such as system names, network topologies, and internal user IDs from the Internet

Log traffic to and from the internal network

Provide virtual private network (VPN) connectivity

All employees of WNC are subject to this policy.

Responsibilities

Computing Services is responsible for implementing and maintaining WNC firewalls, as well as for enforcing and updating this policy. Logon access to firewalls will be restricted to a primary firewall administrator. Password construction for firewalls will be consistent with the strong password creation practices outlined in WNC's Password Policy.

Any questions or concerns regarding WNC firewalls should be directed to the Network/ Server Support Analyst.

Policy

The approach adopted to define firewall rule sets is that all services will be denied by the firewall unless expressly permitted in this policy. WNC firewalls permit the following outbound and inbound Internet traffic.

Outbound - All Internet traffic to hosts and services outside of WNC

Inbound - Only Internet traffic from outside WNC that supports the college mission of WNC as defined by NSHE policy

Operational Procedures

WNC employees may request changes to firewall configurations in order to allow previously disallowed traffic. A firewall change request form, with full justification, must be submitted to the Computing Services department for approval. All requests will be assessed by the Computing Services Administrator to determine if they fall within the parameters of acceptable risk. If approval is given, the Network/Server Support Analyst will make the changes and note those changes in the Firewall Change Order spreadsheet. In an emergency threatening the network, the Network/Server Support Analyst may make a temporary change without the Computing Services Administrator's or director's approval. In that case, approval would be sought as soon as the Computing Services Administrator or director is available and all changes would be recorded on the Firewall Change Order spreadsheet. Requested approvals are not guaranteed as associated risks may be deemed too high. If this is the case, an explanation will be provided to the original requestor and alternative solutions will be explored.

Turnaround time for the above stated firewall reconfiguration and network access requests is approximately five (5) days from the receipt of the request form.

Firewall logs will be archived 10 days. Firewall logs will be reviewed weekly.

Enforcement

Wherever possible, technological tools will be used to enforce this policy and mitigate security risks. Any employee who is found to have violated this policy may be subject to disciplinary action, up to and including termination of employment.

Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted March 15, 2011 Dates Revised
Please direct comments about this page to the Assistant to the President
URL: http://www.wnc.edu/policymanual/8-2-5.php
Date Printed: October 30, 2014

Western Nevada CollegeWestern Nevada College Policies

Policy 8-2-6: Security Incident Response

WNC Policy 8-2-6
Procedure: Security Incident Response
Policy No.: 8-2-6
Department: Computing Services
Contact: Director of Computing Services
Policy:

Data Security Incident Response Policy and Procedures

  • Section 1: Purpose
    • A. The purpose of this policy is to define a security incident and to outline the steps to be taken as a response. These steps are designed to ensure that employees know and understand the actions that will be taken if our college network, equipment, or data are compromised. This policy includes the communication and actions that will include WNC Computing Services, NSHE IT, System Computing Services (SCS), and outside entities. An IT security incident is defined as an event that impacts or has the potential to impact the confidentiality, availability, or integrity of WNC information technology resources from outside or inside sources. Standards, procedures, and guidelines regarding IT security incident response are included in this document. Specific procedures vary depending on the type of incident, but all procedures include the following steps:
      • 1. Preparation
      • 2. Detection and Analysis
      • 3. Containment
      • 4. Eradication
      • 5. Recovery
      • 6. Post-incident Activity
    • B. With all incidents, it is important to maintain a centralized incident handler to avoid miscommunication, duplication of work, freelance investigation that could impact services or evidence, etc. To this end, ALL incidents will be assigned to WNC Computing Services who will be responsible for managing the response.
    • C. For the purposes of these incident response procedures, incidents will be classified in three categories based upon the sensitivity of the data involved, legal issues, magnitude of the service disruption, threat, expanse, and public interest. The identified class of incident helps determine the level of internal notification required as well as the potential requirement under NRS for notification to affected individuals. It is assumed that Computing Services has authority to disconnect WNC systems from the network if required to protect assets and/or reduce the magnitude and expanse of a breach. This will be done with notification provided to the President of WNC, Vice President of Administrative Services and General Counsel, Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs, and System Computing Services (SCS). Established service disruption notification procedures will be followed to communicate outages to users.
    • D. The remainder of this document will provide for incident response procedures that will be followed for most types of incidents with the understanding that there is no practical way to account for all potential incidents. The incident response general flow is illustrated in APPENDIX A and is meant as a guideline rather than a rule.
  • Section 2: Scope
    • A. This policy applies to all Western Nevada College campuses and their employees, students, and the public sector using a Western Nevada College computer, workstation, or accessing data on the WNC network.
  • Section 3: Definitions
    • A. Critical Data - Data with the highest level of protection includes, but is not limited to, data restricted by law, data restricted by legal contracts, security-related data such as passwords and risk assessments, and intellectual property. Examples: Student grades, social security numbers, passwords, credit card numbers, bank account numbers, security plans and assessments.
    • B. DMCA - Digital Millennium Copyright Act
    • C. FERPA - Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act
    • D. Financial Information - Credit Card, College financials, bank account data, financial aid
    • E. HIPAA - Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act
    • F. IDS - Intrusion Detection System
    • G. ISO - Information Security Officer
    • H. NRS - Nevada Revised Statutes
    • I. NSHE - Nevada State Higher Education. Collective of the Nevada colleges
    • J. Personally Identifiable (PII) - Per NRS 603A, PII is defined as First Name or First Initial and Last Name combined with any of the following elements: full social security number; driver’s license number or identification card number; account number, credit card number or debit card number with access code.
    • K. SCS - System Computing Services in Reno, Nevada
    • L. SEIM - Security Event and Incident Management
    • M. Sensitive Data - Data, which if available to unauthorized users, may harm an individual, a group, WNC, or the NSHE institutions, but is not “Critical Data” as defined. Examples: Infrastructure diagrams, strategy documents, financial information, purchasing information, business recovery plans, system configurations, emergency response plans.
    • N. Unrestricted Data - Data, which if available to the public, will not harm an individual, group, or NSHE institution. Examples: WNC/NSHE/ SCS home pages, press releases, job announcements, advertisements, meeting agendas.
    • O. US-Cert - United States Computer Emergency Readiness Team under the Department of Homeland Security
    • P. WNC - Western Nevada College
  • Section 4: Severity Determination
    Computing Services will use the following criteria determine the severity classification of an incident.
    • A. Class 3: Highest Severity (If the answer is ‘Yes’ to any of the following questions regarding an incident, then it is a Class 3 incident.)
      • 1. Data security. Is there a reasonable expectation that critical data was acquired by an unauthorized person as a result of this incident?
        • a. Are data protected by privacy rules or legislation involved? For example:
          - Non-directory student data as defined by FERPA
          - Social Security Number
          - Bank account, credit card, or other private financial information
          - Nevada driver's license number
          - Any medical records or protected health information as defined in HIPAA
        • b. Are other data security issues involved? For example:
          - Passwords, risk assessments, or other security-related data
          - Data restricted by legal contracts, memorandums of understanding, or other agreements
          - Data, if available to unauthorized users, will cause harm to an individual, a group, WNC, or NSHE institutions
      • 2. Legal issues. Does this incident involve any legal violation?
        • a. Threat to persons or property
        • b. Theft greater than $10,000
        • c. Child pornography
        • d. Copyright violations
          - Warez server (Warez refers primarily to copyrighted works distributed without fees or royalties, and may be traded, in general violation of copyright law.)
          - Unauthorized P2P (Peer to Peer) distribution or collection of music, movies, or other content protected by copyright
      • 3. Magnitude of service disruption. Does this incident impact WNC mission critical services?
      • 4. Threat. Are hosts involved in this incident actively attacking other hosts?
      • 5. Expanse. Is this incident widespread (over 10% of unit or greater than 100 hosts WNC-wide)?
      • 6. Public interest. Is there active public interest in this incident?
    • B. Class 2: Medium Severity (If the answer is 'No' to all of the Class 3 questions above, but 'Yes' to any of the following questions then it is a Class 2 incident.)
      • 1. Data security. Is there a reasonable expectation that sensitive data as defined in the Definitions Table was acquired by an unauthorized person as a result of this incident? For example:
        • a. Infrastructure diagrams such as building and network
        • b. Strategy documents
        • c. Financial information
        • d. Purchasing information
        • e. Policies, standards, and procedures
        • f. Business recovery plans
        • g. System configurations
        • h. Emergency response plans
        • i. Emergency equipment inventories
      • 2. Legal issue. Does this incident involve a legal violation? For example
        • a. Theft less than $10,000
        • b. Harassment
      • 3. Magnitude of service disruption. Is it likely that this incident will impact WNC mission critical services?
      • 4. Threat. Is an attack likely to occur from hosts involved in this incident?
      • 5. Expanse. Is this incident somewhat widespread (3-10% of unit or 10-100 hosts WNC-wide)?
      • 6. Public interest. Is there likely to be public interest in this incident?
    • C. Class 1: Lowest Severity (If an incident meets the definition of an incident and if the answer is 'No' to all of the Class 2 and Class 3 questions above, then it is a Class 1 incident.)
  • Section 5: Incident Response Procedures
    • A. Incident Response Procedures for Vulnerabilities (Examples: vulnerability scan results; patch or upgrade needed; weak password; unrestricted access; vendor notification)
      • 1. Discovery: WNC receives notification of potential operating system and application vulnerabilities from a variety of sources including but not limited to: vulnerability scans, individual reporting an issue, vendor notification, US-CERT alert notification and SCS.
      • 2. Upon discovery of a vulnerability:
        • a. Report the vulnerability to the Information Security Officer (ISO).
        • b. A ticket is created and assigned to the appropriate functional area for investigation and remediation.
        • c. If the vulnerability exposes Personally Identifiable Information (PII) that is processed, stored, or transmitted by the reported system or application, notify the ISO.
        • d. Escalate the incident to investigate potential compromise of IT resources. Follow procedures below for "Compromise of IT Resources."
      • 3. If the vulnerability can be resolved within 30 days:
        • a. Remediate the vulnerability.
        • b. Information Security Officer will rescan or validate the remediation.
        • c. Close the ticket if resolved.
      • 4. If the vulnerability cannot be remediated within 30 days but can be remediated in less than 6 months:
        • a. Complete Vulnerability Remediation Process (APPENDIX C) to be signed off by Computing Services Director.
        • b. File the Remediation Plan with the ISO.
        • c. ISO will follow-up by date listed for remediation to validate successful completion of remediation plan.
      • 5. If remediation is not completed by date provided and signed off by Computing Services Director, ISO will notify the Vice President of Administrative Services and schedule a meeting with the Vice President of Administrative Services and the Computing Services Director to determine a course of action to remediate the vulnerability.
      • 6. If the vulnerability cannot be remediated within 6 months due to application conflict or other cause:
        • a. The Computing Services Director will complete a Risk Acceptance Form and submit to SCS. SCS will sign off as accepting the risk on behalf of WNC.
        • b. The completed Risk Acceptance Form will be submitted to the ISO and will be followed up on after 6 months to see if the vulnerability can be remediated at that time. The Risk Acceptance Form is found under APPENDIX E.
    • B. Incident Response Procedures for Compromised IT Resources (Examples: attack/exploit, backdoor or Trojan, denial of service, malware, unauthorized access, unauthorized disclosure)
      • 1. Open ticket and notify ISO.
      • 2. ISO will assign an incident handler through ticketing system.
      • 3. Incident handler will determine severity based on severity classification standard and provide appropriate internal notification.
      • 4. Incident handler will gather information as per APPENDIX F: WNC Incident Report standard.
      • 5. Incident handler will, with the assistance of “need-to-know” internal technical experts if required, perform an initial assessment depending on the OS, application, symptoms, and role of system:
        • a. DO NOT USE COMMANDS ON COMPROMISED SYSTEM!
        • b. Write down each command performed on any live system.
        • c. Minimize any actions that write to disk.
        • d. Gather and save any pertinent log information including but not limited to:
          - Local application, security, system logs
          - Anti-virus log files
          - Network, IDS, SEIM logs
        • e. Record network connections using known good command (from secured USB).
        • f. Record all running processes using known good command (from secured USB).
        • g. On workstations, provide an "inventory" list of for the system in question.
      • 6. Mitigate the damage
        • a. If system is attacking others: disconnect system from network.
        • b. If suspicion of backdoor or other unauthorized listening port: disconnect from network.
        • c. If system contains PII and compromised: disconnect from network.
        • d. Disable any process that is actively corrupting or deleting data.
        • e. Disable any malware processes.
        • f. Change any passwords that may have been compromised.
      • 7. Create a forensic image using authorized tools if:
        • a. Compromise may lead to criminal investigation.
        • b. If system needs to get back online quickly by re-installing (investigation may continue).
        • c. If compromise may lead to legal or HR/Personnel related investigation.
        • d. If cause of compromise is not readily known and more detailed investigation is needed.
      • 8. Investigation
        • a. Perform log analysis
        • b. Perform forensic analysis
        • c. Evidence documentation
        • d. Produce incident report for Class 3 and Class 2 incidents using WNC Incident Report template under APPENDIX F.
    • C. Incident Response Procedures for Copyright Infringement:
      SCS receives Copyright Infringement notifications for multiple NSHE campuses including WNC. Most notifications are received via e-mail to "abuse" or "host master." When a notification is received:
      • 1. The WNC Network Functional Area will open a ticket and review the IP address information to determine the appropriate routing of the infringement.
      • 2. Notification is sent to the WNC Information Security Officer and the Director of Computing Services.
      • 3. If the IP address in question is assigned to another NSHE institution, K-12 school, or agency, send the complaint notification back to SCS.
      • 4. If the IP address in question is on a WNC managed network, the ISO will be notified and a ticket will be assigned to the Network Admin Functional Area.
      • 5. The ISO shall promptly acknowledge notification of each infringement claim. If the claim fails to comply in supplying information, the ISO shall promptly attempt to contact the person making the notification or take other reasonable steps to assist in the receipt of the notification that substantially complies.
      • 6. The ISO will examine the notification for:
        • a. Identification of the copyrighted work claimed to have been infringed.
        • b. Identification of the material that is claimed to be infringing and that is to be taken down or disabled, and information "reasonably sufficient" to enable WNC to locate the material.
        • c. A statement that the complainant has "a good faith belief" that use of the material in the manner complained of is not authorized by the copyright owner, the owner's agent, or the law.
        • c. A statement that the complainant has "a good faith belief" that use of the material in the manner complained of is not authorized by the copyright owner, the owner's agent, or the law.
        • e. A statement that the information in the notification is accurate and that, under penalty of perjury, the complainant is authorized to act on behalf of the copyright owner.
        • f. If the complaint meets the appropriate requirements, the ISO shall direct prompt removal of material or removal of all local or wide area network access to the material or activity claimed to be infringing.
        • g. The ISO will take responsible steps to notify the alleged infringer promptly of the take-down. This notice will specify information required to make a counterclaim.
        • h. The ISO may terminate access and exercise disciplinary and/or other correctional measures for any copyright infringement claim, including repeated claims and/or violations or flagrant misuse of WNC information systems equipment or network connections and/or services.
    • D. Incident Response Procedures Counter-notification
      If the person responsible for the alleged infringing distribution of copyrighted material believes the material was misidentified or the distribution was lawful, they should send a counter-notification to the ISO containing the following:
      • 1. A physical signature of the person responsible for the alleged infringing distribution.
      • 2. An incident handler will be assigned by the ISO and will gather information as per APPENDEX E: Risk Assessment Report standard.
      • 3. A statement under penalty of perjury that the alleged infringer has a good faith belief that the material was removed or disabled as a result of mistake or misidentification of the material.
      • 4. The alleged infringer's name, address and telephone number, and a statement that the alleged infringer consents to the jurisdiction of the federal district court for the judicial district in which the alleged infringer is located and that the alleged infringer will accept service of process from the complainant.
      • 5. Once the complaining party receives the claim, the DMCA permits WNC, as a service provider, to restore materials or access within two weeks - unless the complaining party serves notice that it intends to seek a court order to restrain infringement. WNC, NSHE, or SCS policy may mandate for other reasons that materials or access not be restored, and that other investigation, containment, or disciplinary measures proceed.
    • E. Incident Response Procedure for Suspicious Activity (Examples: sweeps, scans, unusual connections, excessive bandwidth consumption)
      Sweeps and scans are common occurrences however, a sweep/scan coming from a WNC institutional network against SCS controlled resources, specifically iNtegrate, or from within SCS can indicate a compromised system.
      • 1. A ticket will be opened and assigned to the ISO.
      • 2. An incident handler will be assigned by the ISO and will gather information as per Policy Documents: Risk Assessment Report standard.
      • 3. If the scan/sweep is coming from a WNC Institution, the ISO from SCS will inform the appointed ISO and provide the information gathered by the SCS incident handler.
      • 4. If the same IP address continues to scan/sweep SCS resources, specifically iNtegrate, after notification, the WNC ISO will instruct that IP address be blocked via firewall or router ACL.
      • 5. If the scan/sweep originates from within WNC and is not authorized by the WNC ISO, an investigation will be conducted to determine the cause of the scan/sweep and if violation of Acceptable Use or WNC Computer Use policy has occurred. The ISO will notify the Computing Services Director and the Vice President of Administrative Services and the Vice President of Academic and Student Affairs regarding any such violation of policy and investigation.
      • 6. Excessive bandwidth consumption and unusual connections are most often discovered through network reports, SIEM and IDS alerts and other network monitoring tools. Upon report of such suspicious activity:
        • a. A ticket will be opened and assigned to the ISO.
        • b. An incident handler will be assigned by the ISO and will gather information as per APPENDEX E: Risk Assessment Report standard.
        • c. Incident handler will, with the assistance of "need-to-know" internal technical experts if required, perform an initial assessment depending on the OS, application, symptoms, and role of system.
      • 7. DO NOT USE COMMANDS ON COMPROMISED SYSTEM!
      • 8. Write down each command performed on any live system.
      • 9. Minimize any actions that write to disk.
      • 10. Gather and save any pertinent log information including but not limited to:
        • a. Local application, security, system logs
        • b. Anti-virus log files
        • c. Network, IDS, SEIM logs
      • 11. Record network connections using known good command (from secured USB device).
      • 12. Record all running processes using known good command (from secured USB device).
      • 13. On workstations, provide an "inventory" list of for the system in question.
      • 14. Create a forensic image using authorized tools if:
        • a. Compromise may lead to criminal investigation
        • b. If system needs to get back online quickly by re-installing (investigation may continue)
        • c. If compromise may lead to legal or HR/Personnel related investigation
        • d. If cause of compromise is not readily known and more detailed investigation is needed
    • F. Notification
      Per NRS 603A.220 (APPENDIX I) notification of a data breach must be provided to the owner of the PII of any breach of the security of the system data immediately following discovery if the personal information was, or is reasonably believed to have been, acquired by an unauthorized person.
      • 1. Notification methods may include:
        • a. Written notification
        • b. Electronic notification, if the notification provided is consistent with the provisions of the Electronic Signatures in the Global and National Commerce Act.
        • c. Substitute notification, if the data collector demonstrates the cost of providing notification would exceed $250,000, the affected class of subject persons to be notified exceeds 500,000 or the data collector does not have sufficient contact information. Substitute notification must consist of all the following:
          - Notification by electronic mail when the data collector has electronic mail addresses for the subject persons.
          - Conspicuous posting of the notification on the Internet website of the data collector, if the data collector maintains an Internet website.
          - Notification to major statewide media.
      • 2. If any incident is determined to meet or believed to meet the definition of a data breach of personally identifiable information as per Nevada Revised Statute, the ISO will notify the Vice President of Administrative Services and General Counsel who shall determine the appropriate course of action to comply with State law.
    • G. Post Incident
      • 1. After an incident has been resolved it is important that Computing Services review the response to improve the incident response procedures. The "lessons learned" review should be conducted within two weeks of the incident closure for Class 2 and Class 3 incidents.
        • a. The incident handler assigned to the incident will summarize the incident and the results of the response.
        • b. The ISO will send a summary to the Vice President of Administrative Services and General Counsel.
        • c. The incident handler will schedule a meeting of Computing Services
        • d. The incident response team will determine action items necessary to improve the incident response procedures.
        • e. Computing Services will update and publish current documentation within 30 days of the Post Incident Review.
      • 2. Note: Incidents involving personnel should remain confidential and therefore will not be subject to this review. Incident review when PII data, legal or law enforcement matters are involved will be conducted at the discretion of the Vice President of Administrative Services and General Counsel
    • H. Incident Documentation
      • 1. When a potential incident is reported to the ISO and assigned an incident handler, the first step is to classify the incident and initiate the appropriate response procedures. This involves gathering information and documenting the incident; assessing the reported information to determine the severity, and determining the incident type. See APPENDIX H for Data for Incident Documentation Reporting.
  • Section 6: References
    • A. Response Toolkit
      • 1. All incident handlers and responders should have available to them a set of tools kept on CD and/or USB device to provide investigation of live systems without using potentially compromised commands/ utilities. Additionally, some tools can be run through online services such as Sysinternals Live found at http://live.sysinternals.com
    • B. Recommended Tools
      • 1. Windows
        • a. SysInternals Suite (a particular utility for investigation)
        • b. Autoruns - shows detailed system auto-starting locations and programs
        • c. Process Explorer - shows information about which handles and DLL processes have opened or loaded
        • d. PsInfor - gathers key information about the local or remote system
        • e. PsLogList - lets you dump the contents of an Event log on the local or a remote computer
        • f. PsService - displays the status, configuration and dependencies of a service
        • g. RootkitRevealer - advanced rootkit detection for Windows XP 32bit and Server output lists Registry and file system API discrepancies that may indicate the presence of a user-mode or kernel-mode rootkit.
        • h. TCPView - shows detailed listings of all TCP and UDP endpoints on your system and state of the TCP connections. Tcpvcon is a CL version with same functionality.
        • i. Hijack This! - Identifies browser hijacks and other malware set to run at startup
        • j. http://www.eventid.net/search.asp is a database of event id’s for more information on suspicious entries
Date Adopted and Dates Revised
Date Adopted January 14, 2014 Dates Revised February 11, 2014